Home

R&S®Spectrum Rider FPH User Manual

1. 481812045 AAAS REF N AM Center A 8000114252 GAZ race Clear Detect Max Peak Trig Free Span 8 WAZ Trace Mode Detector Trace 2 SNE RECALL 1321 1011 02 01 01 User Manual This manual describes the following R amp S FPH model and options e R amp S FPH 1321 1111 02 e R amp S FPH B3 1321 0667 02 e R amp S FPH B4 1321 0673 02 e R amp S FPH B22 1321 0680 02 e R amp S FPH K9 1321 0709 02 e R amp S FPH K19 1321 0721 02 e R amp S FPH K29 1321 0738 02 The contents of this manual correspond to firmware version 1 00 or higher The firmware of the R amp S Spectrum Rider makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgment on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 81671 Munchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S Spectrum Rider is abbreviated as
2. 134 5 3 4 Data Sets Containing Transducer Factors nenne nnnennn nennen 134 6 Power Meter R amp S FPH K9 20002000 n002n0nannnnnnnn nun nnnnnen 135 6 1 Using a E E E 135 6 1 1 Connecting Ee Ee E 137 6 1 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements 138 7 Using the Internal Power Meter R amp S FPH K19 2 141 8 Performing Pulse Power Measurements R amp S FPH K29 143 8 1 Configuring the Numerical Result Display 146 8 2 Configuring the Power vs Time Result Display 146 8 2 1 Determining Pulse Charachertstce ss 147 8 2 2 Selecting the Video Bandwidth en nnnnn nennen nennen 148 AN e UE ROO A 148 8 2 4 Triggering Measurements KREE NENNEN 149 8 2 5 Selecting the Result Unit iii 149 8 2 6 Scaling the E een 150 82 1 E E erg asien 150 9 Remote C mmands nannan 151 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 7 9 1 9 1 1 9 1 2 91 39 9 2 9 2 1 9 3 See 9 3 2 9 3 9 9 3 4 9 3 5 9 4 9 4 1 9 4 1 1 9 4 1 2 9 4 1 3 9 4 2 9 4 2 1 9 4 2 2 9 4 2 3 9 4 2 4 9 4 2 5 9 4 2 6 9 4 3 9 4 4 9 5 9 6 9 6 1 9 6 2 9 6 2 1 9 6 2 2 9 6 2 3 Interfaces and Protocols gesteet irc 151 LAN BIER IE ee ee ee ee ne nee 152 USB RAS e O A aE EERE ea 152 As APP PUE PU CES POC E ee ner 153 Setting Up the Remote Control Connection ss 154 Preparing for Remote en re in i
3. Setting the battery low level The battery low level is a reminder that the remaining battery charge might be used up soon When the battery low level is reached the battery symbol in the Title bar turns red and starts blinking See chapter 3 1 1 5 Battery Operation on page 22 and chap ter 3 2 3 1 Title Bar on page 36 1 Inthe Instrument Setup dialog box select the Battery Low Level item 2 Enter the charge level in percent of a fully charged battery with the numeric keys Sa eazy User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 54 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started REESEN 3 2 7 7 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob Activating Deactivating audio alert in case of battery low level state on and off The R amp S Spectrum Rider also allows you to turn on an audio signal that indicates that the battery has reached its low level state 1 Inthe Instrument Setup dialog box select the Battery Low Level Beep item Repetitive 2 Select either Repetitive or Once to turn the audio signal on If you have selected Once the R amp S Spectrum Rider will beep once if the battery runs out of power For a continuous beep select Repetitive 3 Select Off to turn off the beeper Resetting the R amp S Spectrum Rider You can either preset the R amp S Spectrum Rider or reset it to factory settings Presetting the R amp S Spectrum Rider The PRESET key resets the R amp S Spectrum Rider to the de
4. 2 Enter the frequency of the signal The R amp S Spectrum Rider transfers the new frequency to the power sensor which then corrects the measured power readings Zeroing the power sensor Offset voltages and currents have most effect on the power readout when measuring low powers You can compensate for these offsets by zeroing the power sensor Do not apply power during the zeroing process as the power sensor cannot distinguish between external powers and internal offsets Please remove all signals from the sensor input and press Continue to start zeroing Continue Cancel 1 Press the Zero softkey 2 The R amp S Spectrum Rider asks you not to apply any signals to the power sensor during the zeroing process 3 Disconnect the power sensor from any signal sources 4 Press the Continue softkey to start zeroing 5 Press Cancel to abort zeroing for example if you cannot disconnect the signal source The R amp S Spectrum Rider immediately starts power sensor zeroing While zeroing is in progress the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the message Zero ing power sensor please wait while the system is zeroing the power sensor User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 138 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Power Meter R amp S FPH K9 When zeroing is over the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the message V Power sen sor zero done Power sensor zero done Freq Unit Zero Meas Time Selecting the unit for the power rea
5. EVENt part The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the edge fil ters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it This part is often equated with the entire register ENABle part The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENABle bit symbol amp The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol ENABle Bit 0 the associated EVEN bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENABle Bit 1 if the associated EVENT bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be written into and read by the user at will Its contents is not affected by reading Sum bit As indicated above the sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register Thus an event e g a PLL that has not locked can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy The service request enable register SRE defined in IEEE 488 2 can be taken as ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI B
6. This command defines the number of sweeps included in a single sweep It also defines the number of sweeps the R amp S Spectrum Rider uses to average traces or cal culate maximum values The R amp S Spectrum Rider performs one sweep for sweep count 0 or 1 Parameters lt ofSweeps gt Range 1 to 999 RST 10 Example SWE COUN 64 Defines a sweep count of 64 sweeps INIT CONT OFF INIT WAI Turns on single sweep mode starts the sweep and waits for its end SENSe SWEep POINts lt NrofPoints gt This command queries the number of measurement points in a single sweep This command is a query and therefore has no RST value Parameters lt NrofPoints gt Returns the number of sweep points Example SWE POIN Returns the number of sweep points SENSe SWEep TIME lt SweepTime gt This command defines the sweep time If you set a sweep time with this command the R amp S Spectrum Rider decouples the sweep time from the span and the resolution and video bandwidths Parameters lt SweepTime gt Range Specified in the datasheet RST AUTO is set to ON Default unit s Example SWE TIME 10s Sets the sweep time to 10 s SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO lt State gt This command couples and decouples the sweep time to the span and the resolution and video bandwidths Remote Control Commande Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example SWE TIME AUTO ON Switches on the coupling to frequ
7. e Move Portable License Register Licenses Follow this link if you have purchased an unregistered license Unregis tered licenses only work in combination with a specific device ID Unregister License Follow this link if you have installed a portable license Portable licenses work in combination with several device IDs However you have to unregi ster it on one device before you can use it on another Move Portable License Follow this link if you want to move a portable license Moving a portable license is possible without unregistering the license q Opens a detailed online help to the corresponding topic e The second area provides hints on using the R amp S License Manager when you move the mouse over one of the options After you have followed one of the links follow the instructions displayed in the browser If you encounter any problems during the licensing procedure you can access the online help at any time with the icon The online help contains an exten sive description of all functionality that the license manager features 3 2 7 Configuring the R amp S Spectrum Rider In the Instrument Setup dialog box the R amp S Spectrum Rider provides various gen eral settings that are independent of the operating mode of the R amp S Spectrum Rider 1 2 Press SETUP key Select the Instrument Setup softkey A corresponding dialog box to configure instrument opens Select the item you want to modi
8. lt OperatingMode gt SANalyzer PM SANalyzer spectrum analyzer PM power meter RST SAN Example INST SAN Selects spectrum analyzer mode 9 6 8 2 Remote Control Commands INSTrument NSELect lt OperatingMode gt This command selects the operating mode Parameters lt OperatingMode gt 1 spectrum analyzer 5 power meter RST 1 Example INST lt NSEL 1 Selects spectrum analyzer mode Display Configuration This chapter describes Commande to set up the display of the R amp S Spectrum Rider via remote control List of commands e DISPlay BRIGhtness on page 228 e DISPlay CMAP on page 228 e DISPlay CMAP DEFault on page 229 e DISPlay DATE FORMat on page 229 DISPlay BRIGhtness lt Brightness gt This command sets the brightness of the display backlight Parameters lt Brightness gt Range O to 1 RST 0 5 Example DISP BRIG 0 80 Sets the brightness of the display to 80 DISPlay CMAP lt ColorScheme gt This command sets the color scheme of the display Parameters lt ColorScheme gt COLor BW PF COLor Color BW Black amp white PF Printer friendly RST COLor 9 6 8 3 Remote Control Commands Example DISP CMAP BW Sets the screen colors to black and white DISPlay CMAP DEFault This command sets the display to the default state This command is an event and therefore has no query and no RST value Example
9. 08 Seite 1 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Symbole und Sicherheitskennzeichnungen Symbol Bedeutung Symbol Bedeutung L A amp A A e H Achtung allgemeine Gefahrenstelle Produktdokumentation beachten Vorsicht beim Umgang mit Ger ten mit hohem Gewicht Gefahr vor elektrischem Schlag Warnung vor hei er Oberfl che Schutzleiteranschluss Erdungsanschluss Masseanschluss des Gestells oder Geh uses Achtung beim Umgang mit elektrostatisch gef hrdeten Bauelementen Warnung vor Laserstrahl Produkte mit Laser sind je nach ihrer Laser Klasse mit genormten Warnhinweisen versehen Laser k nnen aufgrund der Eigenschaften ihrer Strahlung und aufgrund ihrer extrem konzentrierten elektromagnetischen Leistung biologische Sch den verursachen F r zus tzliche Informationen siehe Kapitel Betrieb Punkt 7 1171 0000 41 08 EIN AUS Versorgung Stand by Anzeige Gleichstrom DC Wechselstrom AC Gleichstrom Wechselstrom DC AC Ger t entspricht den Sicherheits anforderungen an die Schutzklasse II Gerat durchgehend durch doppelte verst rkte Isolierung gesch tzt EU Kennzeichnung f r Batterien und Akkumulatoren Das Ger t enth lt eine Batterie bzw einen Akkumulator Diese d rfen nicht ber unsortierten Siedlungsabfall entsorgt werden sondern sollten getrennt gesammelt werden Weitere Informationen siehe Seite 7 EU Kennzeichnung f r die getrennte Sammlung
10. After you have matched the subnet mask you can define the IP address When both devices are in the same subnet the first three digits of the IP address are usually the same See example below Example IP address PC 192 168 1 10 IP address R amp S Spectrum Rider 192 168 1 20 IP address 1 Identify the IP address of your PC i e in the Microsoft Windows TCP IP Proper ties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP TPv4 Properties You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 2 Inthe Instrument Settings dialog box select the IP Address item 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob 4 Enter the IP address of the PC with the numeric keys User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 58 Instrument Tour Configuring the R amp S Instrument View software 1 Start R amp S Instrument View 2 Select the LAN tab in the screen layout Name IP Address Add Q Connect 3 Select the Add button to create a new network connection Device connection Information Name RES FPH IP Address 192 168 1 20 Default Save Cancel 4 Specify a name for the new network connection e g R amp S Spectrum Rider 5 Enter the IP address for the R amp S Spectrum Rider in this case 192 168 1 20
11. CLS Clear status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERat ion registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ESE lt Value gt Event status enable Sets the event status enable register to the specified value The query returns the con tents of the event status enable register in decimal form Parameters lt Value gt Range 0 to 255 ESR Event status read Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently sets the register to zero Return values lt Contents gt Range O to 255 Usage Query only Remote Control Commande IDN Identification Returns the instrument identification Return values lt D gt Rohde amp Schwarz lt device type gt lt part number gt lt serial num ber gt lt firmware version gt Example Rohde amp Schwarz FPH 1321 1111 02 100001 V2 21 IST Individual status query Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll Return values lt ISTflag gt 0 1 Usage Query only OPC Operation complete Sets bit O in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu ted This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query form writes a 1 into the output buffer as
12. Example CALC DELT3 MIN Moves delta marker 3 to the trace minimum Usage Event CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt X lt FrequencyOrTime gt This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the horizontal axis Note that it is possible to place the marker outside the visible trace In that case this value is invalid If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at DELTamarker selects the deltamarker Parameters lt FrequencyOrTime gt Numeric value that indicates the coordinate on the horizontal axis Range Maximum span Default unit GHz Remote Control Commands Example CALC DELT MOD REL Delta marker positions are relative to marker 1 CALC DELT2 X 10 7MHz Positions delta marker 2 10 7 MHz to the right of marker 1 CALC DELT2 X CALC DELT2 X REL Queries the absolute and relative position of delta marker 2 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt X RELative lt FrequencyOrTime gt This command positions a delta marker on a position relative to the reference marker If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at DELTamarker selects the deltamarker Parameters lt FrequencyOrTime gt Defines the distance of the marker to the reference marker Range Depends on the current scaling
13. The R amp S Spectrum Rider comes with the R amp S Instrument View software package This software package features several tools that allow you to document measurement results or create and edit limit lines or channel tables among other things The NET Framework 2 0 or higher is required to run the software properly You can set up a connection between the R amp S Spectrum Rider and R amp S Instrument View either via its LAN port or its mini USB port See chapter 3 2 2 7 Mini USB and LAN Port on page 33 You have to install the R amp S Instrument View software on the PC before you are able to establish a connection 1 Run the CD ROM delivered with the R amp S Spectrum Rider 2 Navigate to the Software section and start the setup file 3 Follow the instructions on the screen Alternatively you can download the latest R amp S Instrument View from the R amp S Spectrum Rider product homepage EEN User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 56 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started Firewall settings If no connection can be established between the software and the R amp S Spectrum Rider after successful configuration check the firewall settings on your PC e LAN Connechon nn nana nn n rra nan nnnnnnnnnons 57 o USB Conneccion eege eeben GE iii 61 3 2 8 1 LAN Connection You can connect the R amp S Spectrum Rider directly to the PC with a LAN cable The LAN port is located on the right side of the R amp S Spectrum Rid
14. The following sections describe several elements which provide additional ways to input data to R amp S Spectrum Rider 1 Alphanumeric keys 2 3 4 5 6 Unit keys Rotary knob BACK key CANCEL key Enter key Using the Alphanumeric keys ss 81 Using tne A o RO UNO A 82 Confirming and Cancelling Entries 83 o SS lt A 83 4 3 1 Using the Alphanumeric keys Using the alphanumeric keys you can enter numeric values or characters The alpha numeric keys include the numbers from 0 to 9 the alphabet a minus sign and a dot If you have to enter a numeric value press the corresponding key In case of numeric values each key covers just the number that s printed on it You can enter negative values with the minus sign key and enter values that contain decimal places with the dot key R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions OSO K If the R amp S Spectrum Rider asks you to enter a character or you need to enter a char acter e g file names the key assignment changes Each key covers one number and more than one character with the first choice being a character If you need to enter a character press the key several times until the character you require is selected Alter natively you can key in the characters using the on screen keyboard icon which will be displayed along the entry box or press the Virtual Keyboard softkey to activate the on screen keyboard function See chapter 3 2 4 On screen Keyboard
15. http www2 rohde schwarz com en products test_and_measurement power_volt_meter NRPZ html The power sensor function turns the R amp S Spectrum Rider into a wideband power meter It then always measures the power of the whole signal in the frequency range of the power sensor In most cases the signal shape has no effect on the measurement 1 Press the MODE key 2 Press the Power Meter softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider activates the mode for power measurements Power Meter NRP Z1 1 9001 01 04 2015 19 32 D 20 0dBm 4 ly 10 77 50 5 dBm o 1556 70 dBm 20 dBm De 2 GHz 8 ps 9 Frequency Reference Meas Time Fig 6 1 Screen layout of the power meter mode 1 Connected power sensor model 2 Reference for relative power measurements 3 Power offset 4 Measurement time 5 Readout of the measured power 6 Analog readout of the measured power 7 Measurement frequency 8 Configuration Overview 9 Power sensor softkey menu o Connecting a Power CC EE 137 e Performing and Configuring Measurements nenne nennen 138 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 136 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Power Meter R amp S FPH K9 6 1 1 Connecting a Power Sensor The R amp S Spectrum Rider controls and powers the power sensors via the USB inter face on the top of the instrument See chapter 3 2 2 4 USB Port on page 32 If you are using the R amp S FSH Z1 and R amp S FSH Z18 power sensors connect
16. Almost all transmission systems divide their assigned frequency ranges into channels Each channel corresponds to a specific frequency To keep the handling of such sys tems simple you can use channel tables instead of entering frequencies manually The R amp S Spectrum Rider already comes with an assortment of channel tables that you can use without doing anything If you want to test transmission standards that are not listed you can also build channel tables manually with the Channel Table Editor of the R amp S Instrument View software package that is delivered with the R amp S Spectrum Rider To use one of those you just have to copy the channel table to the R amp S Spec trum Rider For more information on channel table see chapter 4 8 Managing Datasets on page 88 Selecting a channel table 1 Press the FREQ key 2 Press the Frequency Mode softkey 3 Select the Channel Downlink or Channel Uplink menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens the File Manager dialog to select a channel table 4 Select one of the available channel tables After activating the channel table the R amp S Spectrum Rider is set up according to the information contained in the channel table Instead of a center frequency the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the currently active channel number including the name of the channel The center frequency of a channel is defined in the channel table and is the frequency corresponding to the selected
17. Frequency Count EE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 36 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started The selected marker is highlighted in the Measurement result view it is also reflected on the marker in the Measurement trace window Table 3 2 Highlighted marker Highlighted marker in the Measurement result Highlighted marker in the Measurement trace view window VER 500 MHz Note There is a blue frame on the highlighted M1 marker For more information on marker measurement see Using Markers on page 66 3 2 3 3 Measurement Trace Window The Measurement trace window is the main user interface window in R amp S Spectrum Rider It displays the measurement traces where markers limit lines and display line are also displayed 40 0 50 0 60 0 gut 80 0 op 0 100 0 110 0 120 0 Device warning messages e g IF Ovl are displayed at the top right hand corner of the window Device Warning Message e IF Ovl This message indicates that the downconverter of the intermediate fre quency IF is overloaded in R amp S Spectrum Rider e In general a star indicates that the measurement is still in progress 3 2 3 4 Parameter View The Parameter view contains the important trace setting parameters for the spectrum measurement User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 37 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started It displays the time and date information at the top right corner of the la
18. Power Meter R amp S FPH K9 For highly accurate power measurements you can connect a power sensor to the R amp S Spectrum Rider and perform measurements Using a Power Sensor A power sensor measures the power in the frequency range defined in the data sheet of the power sensor This means that you can measure both sine signals and modula ted signals precisely over a large dynamic range The R amp S Spectrum Rider supports the following power sensors e R amp S FSH Z1 e R amp S FSH Z18 e R amp S NRP Z11 e R amp S NRP Z21 e R amp S NRP Z22 e R amp S NRP Z23 e R amp S NRP Z24 e R amp S NRP Z27 e R amp S NRP Z28 e R amp S NRP Z31 e R amp S NRP Z37 e R amp S NRP Z51 e R amp S NRP Z52 e R amp S NRP Z55 e R amp S NRP Z56 e R amp S NRP Z57 e R amp S NRP Z58 e R amp S NRP Z81 e R amp S NRP Z852 e R amp S NRP Z86 e R amp S NRP Z91 e R amp S NRP Z92 e R amp S NRP Z96 e R amp S NRP Z98 e R amp S NRP Z211 1 The FSH sensor do not have an USB connector but binder adapter instead The cable identified by FSH Z144 USB to binder adapter is required to connect these sen sors on the USB port This is a RS232 to USB converter cable R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Power Meter R amp S FPH K9 2 Only these power sensors support the trace mode power versus time display For more information on the characteristics of the supported power sensors see e the datasheet of theR amp S Spectrum Rider e the website for R amp S power sensors
19. on page 41 of on screen keyboard You can correct entries with the BACK key The BACK key moves the cursor one posi tion backwards and deletes the character that was in that place The following table shows an overview of character assignment 4 3 2 Using the Rotary Knob Using the rotary knob you can do several things e The rotary knob works like a cursor key in dialog boxes or softkey submenus In that case you can navigate to one of the items with the rotary knob If the dialog box covers more than one screen page it also scrolls through the dialog box Turning it to the right corresponds to a downward movement Moving it to the left to an upward movement e The rotary knob increases or decreases any kind of numeric value if an input field is active Turning it to the right corresponds to an increase turning it to the left to a decrease of a numeric value In most cases the rotary knob changes numeric values with a fixed step size e The rotary knob moves markers around Again the step size is fixed e Pressing the rotary knob to confirm an entry or selection User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 82 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions OO K 4 3 3 4 3 4 Confirming and Cancelling Entries Depending on the input you have made there are several ways to confirm entries e Values without unit or values that have a fixed unit that you enter in an input field can be confirmed by pressing the center of
20. 4 2 4 Add Marker Double tap on the trace window to create a new marker on the spectrum measure ment The marker will be placed on the trace where the double tab gesture is per formed Alternatively press the MARKER key on the front panel and select the New Marker from the softkey label to create a new marker on the spectrum measurement Ee User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 79 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions amp Spectrum LA D M1 123 123456 MHz 71 6 dBm 01 04 2015 19 32 REF 20 0 dBm ATT l 0 dB ps 80 kHz 60 kHz AMP OFF RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWT 50 ms Center 2 GHz Trace 1 Clear Detect Auto Peak Trig Free Span 4 GHz ge Center Freq CF Stepsize Start Freq Stop Freq Freq Offset Freq Mode 4 2 5 Delete All Markers Draw a X on the trace window to delete all markers from the spectrum measurement Alternatively press the MARKER key on the front panel and select the Delete Marker from the softkey label to delete all markers from the spectrum measurement amp Spectrum LA M1 123 123456 MHz 71 6 dBm 01 04 2015 19 32 REF 20 0 dBm 80 kHz 60 kHz lt ATT 0 0 dB AMP OFF 0 kHz RBW 20 kHz 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz 40 kHz 60 kHz SWT 80 kHz 50 ms 0 S e Center 2 GHz Detect Auto Peak Trig Free Span 4 GHz Center Freq CF Stepsize Start Freq Stop Freq Freq Offset Freq Mode User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 80 Means of Input 4 3 Means of Input
21. AMP al e OFF 20 kH RBW nu 3 MHz 40 kHz VBW 3 MHz 60 kHz SW 80 kHz 50 ms Center 2 GHz race 1 Clear Irig Free Span 4 GHz oS Center Freq CF Stepsize Start Freq Stop Freq Freq Offset Freq Mode 4 2 2 Change Reference Level Swipe up or down vertically in the trace window to adjust the EE level d i the spectrum measurement Alternatively select the REF button in the P ew to adjust the reference level or press the AMPT key on the front panel le lee the Ref Level softkey label for adjustment amp Spectrum san 01 04 2015 19 32 REF 60 kHz 20 0 dBm 80 kHz 40 kHz ATT 0 dB AMP i la OFF 20 kH RBW Z 3 MHz 40 kHz VBW 3 MHz 60 kHz SWI 80 kHz 50 ms 0 S e Center 2 GHz Trace 1 Clear Span 4 GHz Center Freq CF Stepsize Start Freq Freq Offset Freq Mode User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 78 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions REESEN 4 2 3 Change Span Pinch or stretch two fingers horizontally to adjust the span of the spectrum measure ment Alternatively select the Span in the Parameter View to adjust the span of the spectrum measurement or press the SPAN key on the front panel and select the Man ual Span softkey label for adjustment Spectrum sam 01 04 2015 80 kHz 19 32 60 kHz 20 0 dBm 40 kHz UH 20 kHz 40 kHz 60 kHz 80 kHz Center 2 GHz Trace rig Span 4 GHz Center Freq CF Stepsize Stop Freq Freq Offset Freq Mode
22. DE lr 188 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer CPOWer BANDwidth nennen nnnnnnnn nennen 212 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer PRESet BANDwidth VIDeo en nnnnnnennennneen 214 GCAEGUlale 1 22 PME Fer PRE Se Se CCl an a Er EELE EEn Sia 215 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer PRESet STA Te nennen nnennnn nenn 219 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer RELative MAGNitude iii 212 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer RELative MAGNitude AUTO 2220000222200002200000nnnnnn en nnnnnennnnnnne nennen 212 CAL Culate c 2 DME TerhREl atvel MAchudetOEtGet nennen nennen 213 CALCulates 1 24 DEL lung e 05 ecke 195 CALC ulate 1 2 4 gt Bn een 207 CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMIEST1 2 DEL una 208 NEO A A A 208 CALC ulate 1 2 4 gt LIMING 1 222 LO Wer SEL CC te caia 209 CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt LOWer THReshold en nnnnn en nnnnnnennnnnnen nennen 209 Ee E Me Bt UNE RS rese ER Eeoa s n Eea aANT E a ESET Tki 210 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 278 ee En E BO e UNIT KEE 210 GALCulate 1 4 gt L1Mite1 52 gt UPPer SELedL unse ee 210 CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMitK1 42 gt UPPer THReshold u He nn ee ineedoex 210 Re En E a E En cc Y a 199 BABIDTaAUONn oi PIE Ter ZERO AUTO EEEO EENE RE ETO EORR E ESEESE t 214 DO STEE 228 ee 228 A nn e IA 229 DISPISEDATE FORMAL analice cuactaulceceason 229 Rn E WINDSWE STORE u a een 222 DiGbla v 71 2ZSEWINDowl TRACec ZMEMon STATel 189
23. DISPIay1 2 gt WINDOWE TRAGE 122 nee 189 DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACES1 22 Y SPACINO nest a retecionencanieienetaientes 177 DiSPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACEST 2 gt 1 e E u une a u a 177 DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALel ADJust nn en nnnennn nennen 176 DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALe l RLEVEI 177 DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALel RLEVEelOFFSet 00 nn Rennen een 178 DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALel RPOSition nn nennen en 178 DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 4 gt STAT ccc cccccccssseeeceesseeceanseeecsaseeseaaeeeessageeessauseeessaneeessaaes 189 AO a WE PER ANE A 215 POR Ee RT 190 FORMAL DATA det in 191 ALO SAA A A Eh OC A 222 OO MNS Ae EE 222 INI DA CONTINUOUS oneroso idolo 183 INTS Tu BEE 183 INPUEATTERUSBON ee ee ee ee ee 178 INPUEATTENUSUON AUTO E 179 INPUCATIenuaton MODE u ee ae een een er 179 INPUESAN STATS a a 179 Le Legale le te 180 A o RAD OSEE ONSAS A REAT EESAN 232 ING We ee E 228 INS Welte enn SELF naci ee ae 227 MMEMory GATalog DIRCCIONGS een 21 MME MOV CAFAO nee ee 216 NMMEMION DIREC E 217 A PA ee ec een 217 MINE Mar DA Faroer EE EEN 217 NEE 218 EIRE A E EA E E E EA 218 MMEM FILE DATE ae ee ie 218 EME 219 RSI ONE ses see ee ee era ae oo euere ee eek 219 MMENO LOAD STATE ee ee ea ee eat 219 MIMENOrEMDIRESION ee nee iio a 220 MIME MON MOVE nee ee
24. Measuring the level 1 Press the PRESET key The R amp S Spectrum Rider is reset to its default state After the preset the R amp S Spectrum Rider displays the frequency spectrum over its full frequency span At 500 MHz the generator signal is displayed as a vertical line To analyze the generator signal at 500 MHz in more detail reduce the frequency span 2 Press the Center softkey at the Parameter view The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an entry box to define the center frequency 3 Enter a center frequency of 500 MHz The signal is now in the center of the display 4 Press the Span softkey at the Parameter view The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an entry box to specify the span 5 Enter a span of 20 MHz The R amp S Spectrum Rider now displays the generator signal with a higher resolu tion Spectrum sd 18 6 2015 300 14 33 40 0 20 dBm 50 0 10 dB 60 0 ON SE 20 MHz 500 MHz Clear Auto Peak Free 20 MHz Center Freq CF StepSize Start Freq Stop Freq Freq Offset Setting the reference level The level at the top of the measurement diagram is called the reference level To obtain the best dynamic range from the R amp S Spectrum Rider you should use its full level range That means that the maximum level value should be at or close to the top of the measurement diagram reference level User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 65 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started 1 Press the REF
25. PMETer RELative MAGNitude on page 212 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer RELative MAGNitude AUTO on page 212 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer RELative MAGNitude OFFSet on page 213 e UNIT lt 1 2 gt PMETer POWer on page 213 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer RELative MAGNitude lt RefLevel gt This command sets the reference value for relative measurements The numeric suffix at CAL Culate is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt RefLevel gt Default unit dBm Example CALC PMET REL 30 The reference value to 30 dBm CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer RELative MAGNitude AUTO lt ONCE gt This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt ONCE gt ONCE Example CALC PMET REL ONCE 9 6 3 3 Remote Control Commands CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer RELative MAGNitude OFFSet lt RefLvlOffset gt This command sets an offset for the reference value The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt RefLvlOffset gt Default unit dB Example CALC PMET REL 10 UNIT lt 1 2 gt PMETer POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the power sensor The numeric suffix at UNIT has the following effects Table 9 4 Power measurement with R amp S FSH Z1 R amp S FSH Z18 and USB pow
26. Prohibition of operating R amp S Spectrum Rider 3 1 1 6 Turn off the R amp S Spectrum Rider while driving or while the engine is on Operation of the R amp S Spectrum Rider via the cigarette lighter socket while driving or while the engine is on is prohibited Battery Maintenance The R amp S Spectrum Rider comes with a lithium ion battery In general these batteries are easy to handle When you handle the battery follow the instruction mentioned in the safety instructions and in the following chapters XP E 24 e E 24 o AA 25 A e EE UR EA 25 Handling e The battery has been designed for a specific application Do not use it for any other applications e Do not connect batteries in series or parallel as it can cause serious damage e Observe correct polarities during installation and charging e Do not heat over 70 C The battery contains thermal fuses that could activate and render the battery inoperable e The battery contains an electronic device for protection against deep discharge ee and short circuiting between the terminals If you cannot discharge the battery it may be deep discharged Charge the bat tery for 0 5 hours and check again If you cannot charge the battery it may be overcharged Discharge the battery and check again Ifthe battery has been short circuited charge it to reset the electronics Ifthe battery still does not work contact the Rohde amp Schwarz customer sup port e Do
27. Ventile inmediatamente la habitaci n y acuda a un m dico en casos graves Si sustancias qu micas provenientes de la bater a entran en contacto con la piel o los ojos pueden producirse irritaciones Enjuague en estos casos la piel y los ojos inmediatamente con abundante agua y acuda a un m dico 2 No exponga las celdas o bater as al calor ni al fuego No las almacene bajo la luz solar directa En caso de sobrecalentamiento existe peligro de explosi n o de incendio lo que puede provocar lesiones graves en personas 3 Mantenga las bater as limpias y secas Si los conectores est n sucios limpielos con un pa o seco y limpio 4 Cargue las bater as antes de su uso Solamente est permitido cargar la bater a con el correspondiente cargador de Rohde amp Schwarz Consulte en el manual o en las especificaciones t cnicas del equipo la denominaci n exacta del cargador Si las bater as se cargan de forma incorrecta existe peligro de explosi n lo que podr a causar lesiones graves en personas 5 La temperatura de carga debe encontrarse entre 0 C y 45 C consulte el manual para posibles restricciones 6 La descarga solamente puede efectuarse entre 0 C y 50 C consulte el manual para posibles restricciones 7 Cargue las bater as solamente el tiempo necesario hasta que se hayan cargado por completo La sobrecarga frecuente reduce la vida til de la bater a 8 Extraiga la bater a del equipo si no se va a utilizar D
28. button 3 3 Trying Out the Instrument 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 This chapter provides a short overview of the first steps of the measurements you can perform with the R amp S Spectrum Rider e USING the Spectrum Analyzer nenn 62 e Using a Power Sensor sise 69 e Saving and Recalling Results and Gettmgs nennen nennen 71 Using the Spectrum Analyzer This chapter provides a short overview of the first steps of the measurements you can perform with the R amp S Spectrum Rider Attenuating the Signal You can attenuate the signal to a suitable level either manually or automatically In case of automatic attenuation the level of attenuation at the RF input depends on the current reference level The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides two ways of automatic attenuation For the highest possible sensitivity it provides the Auto Low Noise attenuation mode For the lowest possible intermodulation it provides the Auto Low Distortion mode R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started The main difference between the two modes is that the attenuation level is 5 to 10 dB higher in case of Auto Low Distortion than it is for Auto Low Noise In the default state Auto Low Distortion is active 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Select the Att Amp Imp softkey 3 Select either the Auto Low Noise or Auto Low Distortion menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the current attenuation level in the Parameter view The currently active menu
29. dass alle Personen die Zugang zum Produkt haben sowie das Produkt selbst ausreichend vor Sch den gesch tzt sind Jedes Produkt muss durch geeigneten berspannungsschutz vor berspannung z B durch Blitzschlag gesch tzt werden Andernfalls ist das bedienende Personal durch elektrischen Schlag gef hrdet Gegenst nde die nicht daf r vorgesehen sind d rfen nicht in die ffnungen des Geh uses eingebracht werden Dies kann Kurzschl sse im Produkt und oder elektrische Schl ge Feuer oder Verletzungen verursachen Sofern nicht anders spezifiziert sind Produkte nicht gegen das Eindringen von Fl ssigkeiten gesch tzt siehe auch Abschnitt Betriebszust nde und Betriebslagen Punkt 1 Daher m ssen die Ger te vor Eindringen von Fl ssigkeiten gesch tzt werden Wird dies nicht beachtet besteht Gefahr durch elektrischen Schlag f r den Benutzer oder Besch digung des Produkts was ebenfalls zur Gef hrdung von Personen f hren kann Benutzen Sie das Produkt nicht unter Bedingungen bei denen Kondensation in oder am Produkt stattfinden k nnte oder ggf bereits stattgefunden hat z B wenn das Produkt von kalter in warme Umgebung bewegt wurde Das Eindringen von Wasser erh ht das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages Trennen Sie das Produkt vor der Reinigung komplett von der Energieversorgung z B speisendes Netz oder Batterie Nehmen Sie bei Ger ten die Reinigung mit einem weichen nicht fasernden Staublappen vor Verwenden Sie ke
30. of the span or 1 division of the horizontal axis e step Center The step size equals the center frequency R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode 5 1 2 3 5 1 2 4 This step size is ideal for measurements on harmonics When you increase or decrease the center frequency the center frequency automatically moves to the next harmonic e Manual An entry box is displayed to define the value This step size makes it easy to investigate a spectrum with frequencies at con stant intervals 3 Select the step size you need from the menu The R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the step size accordingly If you set the step size to 10 of the span or to the center frequency the R amp S Spec trum Rider sets the step size internally Manually defining the step size opens an input field to define the step size Setting a Frequency Offset For measurements on frequency converters such as satellite downconverters it is often convenient to reference the results to the frequency prior to conversion For this purpose the R amp S Spectrum Rider offers a frequency offset that arithmetically shifts the center frequency to higher or lower frequencies Thus the R amp S Spectrum Rider dis plays the input frequency of the DUT Positive frequency offset is possible in the range from 1 Hz to 100 GHZ in steps of 1 Hz The maximum negative frequency offset depends on the start frequency you have set The start frequency taking into accoun
31. or SENS BAND RES Ee User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 161 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax is equivalent to BAND Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as well MMEMory NETWork MAP lt string gt lt string gt lt string gt lt string gt lt boolean gt Entries in square brackets are optional or can be omitted e Braces Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times or omitted Example SENSe LIST FREQuency lt numeric value gt lt numeric value gt The following are valid commands SENS LIST FREQ 10 SENS LISTIFREO 10 20 SENSTEISTEFREO 10 20 30 40 Numeric Suffix If a device features several functions or features of the same kind e g inputs the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1 Optional keywords must be specified if they select a function with the suffix Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial2 BAUD 9600 This command sets the baud rate of a second serial interface Suffix counting O 9 4 1 3 In case of remote control suffix counting may differ from the numbers of the corre sponding selection used in manual operation SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1 Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified Some standards define a fixed numbering starting with 0 Wi
32. pour couper le produit du r seau lectrique le connecteur male du cable de raccordement est a considerer comme dispositif de separation Le dispositif de separation doit tre a tout moment facilement accessible Si par exemple le connecteur d alimentation sert de dispositif de s paration la longueur du cable de raccordement ne doit pas d passer 3 m Les commutateurs fonctionnels ou lectroniques ne sont pas appropri s pour couper l appareil du r seau lectrique Si des produits sans interrupteur d alimentation sont int gr s dans des b tis ou syst mes le dispositif de s paration doit tre report au niveau du syst me Ne jamais utiliser le produit si le c ble d alimentation est endommag V rifier r guli rement le parfait tat du c ble d alimentation Prendre les mesures pr ventives appropri es et opter pour des types de pose tels que le c ble d alimentation ne puisse pas tre endommag et que personne ne puisse subir de pr judice par exemple en trebuchant sur le cable ou par des chocs lectriques L utilisation des produits est uniquement autoris e sur des r seaux d alimentation de type TN TT prot g s par des fusibles d une intensit max de 16 A pour toute intensit sup rieure consulter le groupe Rohde amp Schwarz Ne pas brancher le connecteur dans des prises d alimentation sales ou poussi reuses Enfoncer fermement le connecteur jusqu au bout de la prise Le non respect de cette mesure peut pro
33. see the R amp S Spectrum Rider user manual 3 3 3 2 Recalling Measurement Results Use the R amp S Spectrum Rider recall function to review previously saved measurement results and settings 1 Press the SAVE RECALL key 2 Press the Recall Datasets softkey A list of all saved data sets opens If you want to recall the results from the SD card or a USB stick select it first to view its contents Spectrum Save Recall gt Recall Dataset Free 13 34 MB a ef Public Datasets Public Storage Card USB N Dataset001 set 26 08 15 11 31 Refresh 3 Confirm your selection with the Load softkey Kee User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 73 Trying Out the Instrument R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions 4 Instrument Functions This chapter provides information about the basic functionality and the user interface of the R amp S Spectrum Rider e Screen Layout and Elements ss 15 e Touchscreen Gesture Element ss 17 Means of MOU nada cd An 81 e Presetting the R amp S Spectrum Rider sn 84 e Configuring Meaeuremente ss 85 Taking SCANS nn arce 85 A EE EE 86 Ce Ma Le 88 e Updating the Firmware iii 97 Installing Firmware e cocinan dci 97 4 1 Screen Layout and Elements The following figure shows the screen layout in spectrum mode It shows all elements that are the same for all operating modes of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Screen layouts that show specifics for each ope
34. sentes consignes de securite ll incombe a l utilisateur d employer ce produit de mani re appropri e Le produit est exclusivement destin a l utilisation en industrie et en laboratoire et ou si cela a t express ment autoris galement aux travaux ext rieurs il ne peut en aucun cas tre utilis a des fins pouvant causer des dommages corporels ou mat riels L exploitation du produit en dehors de son utilisation prevue ou le non respect des consignes du fabricant se font sous la responsabilit de l utilisateur Le fabricant d cline toute responsabilit en cas d utilisation non conforme du produit Le produit est pr sum faire l objet d une utilisation conforme lorsqu il est utilis conform ment aux consignes de la documentation produit correspondante et dans la limite de ses performances voir fiche technique documentation consignes de s curit ci apr s L utilisation du produit exige des comp tences en la mati re et des connaissances de base de l anglais Par consequent le produit ne devra tre utilis que par un personnel qualifi ou des personnes form es de mani re approfondie et poss dant les comp tences requises Si pour l utilisation des produits Rohde amp Schwarz l emploi d un quipement personnel de protection s av re n cessaire il en est fait mention dans la documentation produit emplacement correspondant Conservez les consignes de s curit fondamentales et la documentation produit dans un li
35. ss 121 e Selecting the Marker Tvpe 02000 nnnnonnnnnnnnnnennnnennnne nenne nenne nenne nennen 122 e Automatic Positioning of MArkeTS iconicusisaiscni ibid 122 e Removing Berl 122 e Using Marker Functions iii 123 Using Markers and Deltamarkers The R amp S Spectrum Rider has six markers five of which can be used as either markers or delta markers The markers cannot leave the trace and indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the point they are positioned on The horizontal position of a marker is shown by a vertical line which extends from the top to the bottom of the measurement diagram The marker list above the diagram area shows the exact coordinates of all markers in use R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode The position of a delta marker is indicated by a dashed line to distinguish it from a nor mal marker The delta marker level is always a relative to the main marker level and so the delta marker level unit is always dB The delta marker frequency is always relative to the main marker in other words the delta marker frequency is the frequency differ ence between the frequency at the point marked by the main marker and the frequency at the point marked by the delta marker To measure complex signals you can activate up to six markers Marker 1 is always a normal marker and the reference of all delta markers Markers 2 to 6 are either mark ers or delta markers depending on your
36. the DUT to the R amp S Spectrum Rider if necessary Make sure not to overload the R amp S Spectrum Rider when a DUT is connected The maximum power that is permissible at the RF input is 20 dBm or 100 mW The RF input is protected from static discharges and voltage pulses by a limiting cir cuit Instrument Tour RF power overload The R amp S Spectrum Rider maybe loaded with up to 30 dBm or 1 W for up to three minutes If you apply 1 W for a longer period the R amp S Spectrum Rider may be destroyed 3 2 2 2 Risk of electric shock In order to avoid electrical shock the DC input voltage you must never exceed the value specified on the housing Risk of damage of the R amp S Spectrum Rider To avoid damage to the coupling capacitor input attenuator or the mixer the DC input voltage must never exceed the value specified in the data sheet BNC Connector The BNC connector is located on the top of the R amp S Spectrum Rider You can connect the BNC connector for various applications It supports an external trigger signal or an external reference signal When the BNC connector is configured as a trigger input it controls the start of a mea surement The trigger mode is selected in the Sweep menu see chapter 3 2 5 5 Function Keys on page 43 The trigger threshold is similar to that of TTL signals When the BNC connector is configure as reference input you can apply a 10 MHz external ref
37. 5 1 5 2 e The sweep depends on the span If you increase the span you also have to increase the sweep time In its default state the R amp S Spectrum Rider couples the sweep time to the span and the resolution bandwidth to avoid invalid settings If the coupling is active the R amp S Spectrum Rider always sets the shortest possible sweep time to make sure that the display of the spectrum is correct and valid The R amp S Spectrum Rider requires a minimum sweep time of 20 ms for every 600 MHz of span If you increase the span the R amp S Spectrum Rider will also increase the sweep time In the time domain span 0 the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the video voltage over time The horizontal axis becomes a time axis that starts at O s and ends at the sweep time that you selected The range of the sweep time in the time domain is from 34 us to 1000 s 1 Press the SWEEP key In the default state Auto SWT is active 2 Press the Manual SWT softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to set the sweep time 3 Enter the sweep time you need If the video bandwidth is no longer coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth the R amp S Spectrum Rider puts a blue dot at the SWT displays on the Parameter View Selecting the Sweep Mode The sweep mode is the way the R amp S Spectrum Rider performs the measurement In its default state the R amp S Spectrum Rider measures continuously In this mode the R amp S Sp
38. 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 10 7 MHz CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt X SLIMits lt 1 2 gt STATe lt State gt This command turns marker search limits on and off The search limit limits the evaluation range of the trace when set marker functions are performed For example marker set to peak with command CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt MAXimum PEAK on page 196 will set the marker only at the peak of the trace within the search limit The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example See CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt X SLIMits lt 1 2 gt RIGHt on page 199 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt X SLIMits lt 1 2 gt LEFT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the left limit of the marker search range To use the command you first have to turn on search limits with CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt X SLIMits lt 1 2 gt STATe on page 198 The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Parameters lt SearchLimit gt Sets the left marker search limit The unit in the spectrum analyzer mode depends on the mea surement e g Hz for measurements in the frequency domain and seconds for measurements in the time domain Range Maximum span RST is set to the left diagram border when switching on
39. 8 GHz the IFs are 8924 8 MHz 860 8 MHz and 54 4 MHz The conversion from the first to the second IF for these models is done by a second local oscillator The frequency of the local oscillator determines the input frequency at which the spec trum analyzer performs measurements fin flo fir The first mixer produces the sum frequency fio fi image frequency fe as well as the difference frequency fio fin The image frequency is rejected by the bandpass at the IF so that it does not interfere with the subsequent frequency conversions User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 272 How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Input frequency range 0 Hz Input Intermediate Local Image frequency frequency oscillator frequency Frequency fin fir flo fimage The first local oscillator is tuned with a sawtooth which simultaneously acts as the x deflection voltage for the display In practice synthesizer technology is used to gener ate the frequency of the first local oscillator and for a digital display The instantaneous sawtooth voltage therefore determines the input frequency of the spectrum analyzer The bandwidth of the IF filter at the IF determines the bandwidth that is used for mea surements Pure sine signals are passed by the IF filter characteristics This means that signals closer together than the bandwidth of the IF filter cannot be resolved This is why the bandwidth of the IF filter in a spectrum analyzer is referred to as th
40. E A E E T 170 Dee ee 171 e EE 171 PONS EE 171 WEE 171 RE A A E 171 OR 183 GALEulate 1 2 DEL Tam rker 1 PO PP EE 193 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt MAXIMUM NEXT ccccccsseececesseeeceanseeeseaseeessauseeeceusseesseaseeeseaes 194 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH List of Commands CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt MAXiMmumM PEAK is 193 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt MINimum PEAK nennen ennnnnnn nennen 194 CALC ulate 1 2 DELTamarker OR nes nee nn 194 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt X RELAative nennen nennnen nenn 195 CALCulates1 2 gt DEL Tamarkere 1 2 6 gt STATE un ee 193 AA TT 206 CALC ulates 2 DL ING ST ADS ae un 206 CALCulates 1 422 LIM 122 BEEPE STATE een see ee 207 CALC ulate 1 2 LM 1 2 DE nee ne aan 207 CALCulate lt 1 4 2 gt LIMES 1 2 gt STATes as ia 209 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt E 196 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt COUNUPREQUGNCY oo ccccccccessececetseessseccesccaidecsdcasscsseceacesccndeseseasecsedsetes 200 CAL Culate c ZMAker GCOUNGSTATel nennen 201 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FREQuency MODE cccccsssseccccceeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeseauaaseeeeesauaseeeeessanees 201 CALGulale lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt PUNGCION CEN Terasse aa 202 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion DEModulation HOLD 203 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt F UNCtion
41. EEEE 126 Navigation controls KOLAY RENOD nennen 45 NOS SDOWEb std icon 124 O Offset ege Ee Ao de his 102 Reference level oooccccoconccccccoccnncccocnncccononnconononoconons 106 On Screen keyboard AA 41 Operation complete Lei ee 170 AS RE EA 45 97 Checking options unseren nahen 46 Enabing e ele 46 Identification remote a cn 170 Managing options with R amp S License Manager 46 P Positioning RMD OI nee een 19 POWEr Recio 42 Power Meter 135 143 ANP WEE 267 RE 267 FRE E 266 CNE E E E E 269 MARP EE 270 EE ee E ee 265 ER 268 A ee eee eee eee eee 269 Power E 211 Power overload beep 5 4 hisser 54 Power SENSOT ccccceeceeceeceeeeceeeeceeeeeeaeees 135 137 138 143 Average time nennen nenne 139 COS ee 137 Reference level ooccccoconccccccoccnccccoocnncocononococononcnnnnns 139 DO 139 e ee re 69 138 Power sensor DOM anne 32 Power Le E 54 PreampliNer ira rata 64 108 o EE AE 55 84 Preview dataset euren engen 96 Primary Te TEE 132 Pulse e ee e 145 Pulse power measurement nenne nennen 143 OWE VS ME aan needs ati 143 PUTING nio OP RATION nie 17 Q Quick NAMING eseseeeeeeesesesseesseeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 93 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Index R R amp S Instrument View Channel table AAA ae 131 o EE 128 ere GEN 102 EN 108 Recalling measurement results uk T3 Reference level iii 64 104 GA e Le ni naii 118 A A 106 Ge e Ee EE 139 o eege eege 134 Reference posi
42. ER deed 81 NEE eet a er 81 Instrument Model and Command Processing 155 Interfaces and Protocols nennen 151 AN ER 151 OP A 151 SR NOIR SEINE A 151 VE 151 A ee 151 Internal power Meter nenne namen nn 141 IST flag ROMOL E 170 K Rene INGTON Beie 33 Key A A 260 AMSA ida ee 104 EE A 108 262 PRESO ii a eee 260 FEO A dad 100 CINE E 263 ARR ee ee 119 MARKER ee een 263 MEAS AE 135 141 143 MODE ee ee ee ee 259 e E 258 SE TU oe ee een 255 SPAN O ee ee er 260 EE ee 111 WEEP ene ee ore Tn eee 261 o AAEE A AEA E N 114 TRACE A een 262 A A nd ae 0 44 L LAN connection with R amp S Spectrum Rider 57 LAN DO sonara 33 Languages E 51 ESA E T E A A 103 A EE 130 OR TAE A E E 129 M Making and Storing Screenshots 221 En WE 119 Automatic POSIIONING ni 122 Della Marker EE 121 DISTaNcE anne 126 Frequency counter uw 64 o EE 123 GE 120 POSION WEE 120 125 o A ee A 122 E EEN 122 TYPE ee ee een Ga an 122 EN E 119 Max hold ae ee ee 115 MaX Peak einen 115 Measurement u a 111 Audio demodulation zu 127 Channel DOME nein 141 Frequency e TEE 125 We E OW zer 126 Noise power density cccsseccssseesseeeeeeeeees 124 131 Measurement setup Configure OVEIVIEW anni een 85 E ee E 118 A A A a A 255 A 255 Menu and Softkey Overview 255 AO T E AE T N T 115 ll Bet 115 Multiple aces 2 ee 117 Mute Ee EE 128 N MOB CON E EEE
43. FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode fit them on the display In that case one pixel represents a frequency range span 711 The detector determines the way the R amp S Spectrum Rider combines and displays the results for one pixel The data base is the video voltage of the analyzer 1 Press the TRACE key 2 Press the Detector softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider displays the submenu to select the trace detector 3 Select the detector you want to use If the Auto Detector selection is active the selection of the trace detector will fol low table 5 1 The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides several types of detectors e Auto Peak If the auto peak detector is active the R amp S Spectrum Rider displays both the maxi mum and the minimum power levels that were measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel Therefore the auto peak detector loses no information If a signal power level fluc tuates e g noise the width of the trace depends on the magnitude of the signal fluctuation The auto peak detector is the default detector e Max Peak If the max peak detector is active the R amp S Spectrum Rider displays only the maxi mum power levels that were measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel The max peak detector is useful for measurements on pulse or FM signals for example e Min Peak If the max peak detector is active the R amp S Spectrum Rider displays only the mini mum power level that were measured in the freq
44. IF_Overload This bit is set if the IF path is overloaded IFOVL is displayed 31014 to 14 Ween used AA s s s s s s s This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register This register contains information about sync and bursts not found and about premea surement results exceeding or falling short of expected values It can be read using the commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt 9 6 9 5 Application of the Status Reporting Systems In order to be able to effectively use the status reporting system the information con tained there must be transmitted to the controller and further processed there There are several methods which are represented in the following Service Request Under certain circumstances the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can react appropriately As evident from figure 9 7 an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2 3 4 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of a further register the error queue or the output buffer The ENABle parts of the status registers can be set so that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ In order to make User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 245 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands use o
45. Kunden ein h chstm gliches Ma an Sicherheit zu bieten Unsere Produkte und die daf r erforderlichen Zusatzger te werden entsprechend der jeweils g ltigen Sicherheitsvorschriften gebaut und gepr ft Die Einhaltung dieser Bestimmungen wird durch unser Qualit tssicherungssystem laufend berwacht Das vorliegende Produkt ist gem beiliegender EU Konformit tsbescheinigung gebaut und gepr ft und hat das Werk in sicherheitstechnisch einwandfreiem Zustand verlassen Um diesen Zustand zu erhalten und einen gefahrlosen Betrieb sicherzustellen muss der Benutzer alle Hinweise Warnhinweise und Warnvermerke beachten Bei allen Fragen bez glich vorliegender Sicherheitshinweise steht Ihnen die Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe jederzeit gerne zur Verf gung Dar ber hinaus liegt es in der Verantwortung des Benutzers das Produkt in geeigneter Weise zu verwenden Das Produkt ist ausschlie lich f r den Betrieb in Industrie und Labor bzw wenn ausdr cklich zugelassen auch f r den Feldeinsatz bestimmt und darf in keiner Weise so verwendet werden dass einer Person Sache Schaden zugef gt werden kann Die Benutzung des Produkts au erhalb des bestimmungsgem en Gebrauchs oder unter Missachtung der Anweisungen des Herstellers liegt in der Verantwortung des Benutzers Der Hersteller bernimmt keine Verantwortung f r die Zweckentfremdung des Produkts Die bestimmungsgem e Verwendung des Produkts wird angenommen wenn das Produkt nach den Vorgaben
46. RST SCReen Example SYST CAPT MODE BOTH Captures both a screenshot and a dataset of the current mea surement SYSTem CAPTure SCReen STATe lt State gt This command includes or excludes screenshots from the data capture Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example SYST CAPT SCR ON Includes screenshots into the data capture Saving Events The following commands configure the circumstances under which the R amp S Spectrum Rider saves events These commands are independent from the operating mode Using the commands requires an GPS receiver and a storage device SD card or memory stick List of commands e SySTem SOEVent DISTance INTerval on page 225 e SySTem SOEVent LIMits MODE on page 225 Remote Control Commande e SYSTem SOEVent RECording STORage on page 225 e SYSTem SOEVent SOURce on page 226 e SYSTem SOEVent TIME INTerval on page 226 e SYSTem SOEVent STATe on page 227 SYSTem SOEVent DISTance INTerval lt Seconds gt This command defines a distance that you must cover before the R amp S Spectrum Rider saves another coordinate Parameters lt Seconds gt Distance between one coordinate and the next RST 1m Example SYST SOEV ON Turns on saving coordinates on an event SYST SOEV REC STOR USB Selects a USB device as the storage device SYST SOEV SOUR DIST SYST SOLV DIST INT 5 Saves the coordinates every 5 m SYSTem SOEVent LIMits MODE lt arg0 gt This command se
47. STATus Subsystem The returned value is always a number that represents the bit pattern of the queried register This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ Error Queue Query Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be displayed via man ual operation using the setup menu or queried via remote control using the command SYSTem ERRor Each call of SYSTem ERRor provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Espe cially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regu User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 246 9 6 9 6 9 6 9 7 Remote Control Commands larly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well Reset Values of the Status Reporting System table 9 12 contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset None of the commands except RST and SYSTem PRESet influ ences the functional instrument settings In particular DCL does not change the i
48. Test png DISP WIND STOR Makes and stores a screenshot of the current screen in a file Test png Usage Setting only HCOPy DEVice LANGuage lt Format gt This command selects the file format for screenshots Parameters lt Format gt PNG JPG Example HCOP DEV LANG PNG Selects the png format for screenhots HCOPy IMMediate This command makes a screenshot of the current display contens in png format and stores it on the R amp S Spectrum Rider internal memory You can select a file name for the screenshot in png format with MMEMor y NAME on page 223 and select the file format of the screenshot with HCOPy DEVice LANGuage on page 222 To make a screenshot in jpg format use DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow STORe on page 222 This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Example HCOP DEV LANG PNG MMEM NAME Public Screen Shots Test png HCOP Makes and stores a screenshot of the current screen in a file Test png 9 6 6 Remote Control Commands Usage Event MMEMory NAME lt FileName gt This command defines the path and file name that the R amp S Spectrum Rider uses for storing screenshots see HCOPy IMMediate on page 222 The path and file name comply with DOS conventions This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the file name Example MMEM NAME Public Screeshots Test png Stores
49. The span you should select depends on the signal and the measurement that you are performing A rule of thumb is that it should be at least twice the bandwidth occupied by the signal The available span for frequency domain measurements depends on the instrument model e R amp S Spectrum Rider 5 kHz to 2 0 GHz e R amp S Spectrum Rider with R amp S FPH B3 5 kHz to 3 0 GHz e R amp S Spectrum Rider with R amp S FPH B4 5 kHz to 4 0 GHz If you set a span of 0 Hz zero span the R amp S Spectrum Rider performs measure ments in the time domain 1 Press the Span softkey on the Parameter view to define the span Alternatively press the SPAN key The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the span 2 Enter the span you need The R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the span of the horizontal axis Special touchscreen gesture Alternatively pinch and stretch on the touchscreen to change the span parameter See chapter 4 2 3 Change Span on page 79 If you have to switch between full span and a smaller span you can do so without hav ing to enter the numeric values 1 Press the SPAN key 2 Press the Full Span softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider displays the spectrum over its entire frequency range 3 Press the Last Span softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider restores the span that you have set just before display ing the entire frequency range User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 103 5 1 3 1 Commo
50. USB is selected at initializa tion time by means of a channel specific resource string For more information about VISA refer to its user documentation The programming examples for remote control are all written in Microsoft VISUAL BASIC Access to the VISA functions require the declaration of the functions and constants prior to their use in the project This can be accomplished either by adding the modules VISA32 BAS and VPPTYPE BAS or a reference to the VISA32 DLL to the project R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands Project Simple amp Simple Simple vbp 21 9 Forms e 3 Modules 2 VISA32 visa32 bas e VPPTYPE vpptype bas References Simple vbp Available References Visual Basic For Applications Visual Basic runtime objects and procedures Visual Basic objects and procedures MLE Automation K 145 Helper COM Component 1 0 Type Library 145 RADIUS Protocol 1 0 Type Library 1 ComponentOne AwkOne Control Priariky A VideoSoft vsOcx Controls Help aActEmail 1 0 Type Library ABManager 1 0 Type Library aboutlook 1 0 Type Library aboutlookex 1 0 Type Library Arress nnnDesinner 1 0 Tune ihrarw 111 E wi wi wi OO WISA Library Location CHWINMTISYStem3Zvisasz dll Language Standard The modules visa32 bas and vpptype bas can be found in the following location lt VXlpnpPath gt WinN T Include typically C VXlpnp WinNt Include Resetting the
51. You can also use the DC connector to charge the battery Mechanical Locking Device The Kensington lock is located on the left side of the R amp S Spectrum Rider behind a protective cap A Kensington Lock can be anchored to the R amp S Spectrum Rider housing to secure the R amp S Spectrum Rider to a workstation mechanically Mini USB and LAN Port The mini USB and LAN ports are located on the right side of the R amp S Spectrum Rider behind a protective cap 3 2 2 8 3 2 3 Instrument Tour You can connect the R amp S Spectrum Rider to aPC via USB or LAN and transfer data in both directions Configure the USB and LAN connection via the Instrument Setup menu For more information see chapter 3 2 7 1 Configuring the Hardware on page 49 SD Card Slot The SD card slot is located behind the battery compartment of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Ar Bi y IR D i a a i SA Peel open the SD card protective cap to access to the SD card slot You can use the SD card to store data sets or screenshots Touchscreen Display All measurement results are displayed on the screen Additionally the screen display provides status and setting information and it allows you to change the parameters set ting with touchscreen gesture The touch sensitive screen offers an alternative means of user interaction for quick and easy handling of the instrument R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started Risk of touchscr
52. and no query The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Example CALC LIM2 DEL Deletes the second limit line CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check To get a valid result you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end before reading out the result This is only possible in single sweep mode Remote Control Commandes The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Example INIT WAI CALC LML PATI Performs a measurement and queries the result of the check for limit line 1 Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt LOWer SELect lt LimitLine gt This command selects the lower limit line This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Parameters lt LimitLine gt String containing the file name of the lower limit line Example CALC LIM LOW SEL GSM Lower rellim Selects the lower limit line Usage Setting only CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt LOWer THReshold lt Threshold gt This command defines the level of a lower threshold limit line The numeric suffix at CAL Culate is irrelevant for this command The numeri
53. are only sent as device response e NAN Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as device response This value is not defined Possible causes are the division of zero by zero the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing val ues Example Setting command SENSe FREQuency STOP MAXimum Query SENSe FREQuency STOP Response 3 5E9 Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0 The OFF state logically untrue is represen ted by OFF or the numerical value 0 The numerical values are provided as response for query Example Setting command CALCulate MARKer STATe ON Query CALCulate MARKer STATe Response 1 Text Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for key words i e they can be entered using a short or long form Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command INPut COUPling GROund Query INPut COUPling Response GRO SCPI Command Structure and Syntax 9 4 2 5 Strings 9 4 2 6 9 4 3 Strings must always be entered in quotation marks or Example SYSTem LANGuage SCPI Or SYSTem LANGuage SCPI Block Data Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data command usi
54. by a comma A few queries permit the parameters MINimum MAXimum and DEFault to be entered Refer to chapter 9 4 2 Parameters on page 163 for a detailed description of the various parameters Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAXimum Response 3 5E9 This query requests the maximal value for the stop frequency Special Characters e Vertical stroke A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example DISPlay FORMat SINGle SPLit If parameter SING1e is selected full screen is displayed in the case of SPLit split screen is displayed A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the keywords is used SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the frequency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SENSe BAND 1 SENSe BWID 1 e Square Brackets Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution
55. calculation The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides several methods or algorithms to calculate the base and top power of a pulse e Histogram Calculates the top and base power of the pulse by analyzing the histogram of the trace data The level of the pulse top calculated by the mean value of all points rep resenting the pulse top Similarly the level of the pulse base is calculated by the points representing the pulse base This algorithm is recommended for analyzing most of the pulse signals e Integration Calculates the top power of the pulse by fitting a rectangle pulse of same energy into the pulse signal as a reference This algorithm is recommended for modulated pulse signals or when the pulse energy must be taken into account for example when you want to compare the measurement result with that of a thermal power sensor o Peak Assumes that the peak power of the pulse is also the top level of the pulse The top and base power are also the reference point for the calculation of pulse timing characteristics 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Press the Algorithm softkey 3 Select the algorithm you prefer for your measurement The R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the results accordingly Defining reference levels for pulse timing calculation To calculate pulse timing parameters like the rise and fall time of the pulse you have to define several reference levels All reference levels are a percentage of the pulse amplitude either
56. can take several seconds The IP address and subnet mask are automatically set in the corresponding input fields and are no longer available for editing Configure the R amp S Instrument View software with the IP address and subnet mask as defined by the DHCP server For more information see chapter 3 2 8 1 LAN Connec tion on page 57 3 2 8 2 USB Connection Alternatively you can connect the R amp S Spectrum Rider to the PC with a USB cable The Mini USB interface is located on the right side of the R amp S Spectrum Rider behind a protective cap For more information see chapter 3 2 2 7 Mini USB and LAN Port on page 33 When you connect the R amp S Spectrum Rider to a computer for the first time Windows tries to install the new hardware automatically The required drivers are installed along with the R amp S Instrument View software package When the drivers have been found on your system and the hardware has been suc cessfully installed Windows shows a corresponding message 1 Connect the R amp S Spectrum Rider via the Mini USB port to your computer 2 Start R amp S Instrument View on the PC 3 Select the USB tab in the screen layout User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 61 Trying Out the Instrument gt USB X x Name Serlal Nr USBIMC Driver 101053 Scan Ei Connect 4 Select the Scan button to identify the R amp S Spectrum Rider 5 Confirm the selection with the Connect
57. den anderer Art zu verhindern Entsorgung 1 2 Batterien bzw Akkumulatoren die nicht mit dem Hausm ll entsorgt werden d rfen darf nach Ende der Lebensdauer nur ber eine geeignete Sammelstelle oder eine Rohde amp Schwarz Kundendienststelle entsorgt werden Am Ende der Lebensdauer des Produktes darf dieses Produkt nicht ber den normalen Hausm ll entsorgt werden sondern muss getrennt gesammelt werden Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG ein Entsorgungskonzept entwickelt und bernimmt die Pflichten der R cknahme und Entsorgung f r Hersteller innerhalb der EU in vollem Umfang Wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihre Rohde amp Schwarz Kundendienststelle um das Produkt umweltgerecht zu entsorgen 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 7 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise 3 Werden Produkte oder ihre Bestandteile ber den bestimmungsgem en Betrieb hinaus mechanisch und oder thermisch bearbeitet k nnen ggf gef hrliche Stoffe schwermetallhaltiger Staub wie z B Blei Beryllium Nickel freigesetzt werden Die Zerlegung des Produkts darf daher nur von speziell geschultem Fachpersonal erfolgen Unsachgem es Zerlegen kann Gesundheitsschaden hervorrufen Die nationalen Vorschriften zur Entsorgung sind zu beachten 4 Falls beim Umgang mit dem Produkt Gefahren oder Betriebsstoffe entstehen die speziell zu entsorgen sind z B regelm ig zu wechselnde K hlmittel oder Motoren le sind die Sicherheitshinweise des Herstellers dieser Gefa
58. expressed in terms of power Watt or voltage Volt The Low Reference Power and High Reference Power are required to calculate the fall and rise times of the measured pulse The Low Reference Power defines the level at the start of the rising edge and the level at the end of the falling edge of the pulse The High Reference Power defines the level at end of the rising edge and the level at the start of the falling edge The Reference Power is required to calculate the pulse width its start time and its stop time 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Press the Ref Power Config softkey 3 Define the reference levels as required User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 147 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Performing Pulse Power Measurements R amp S FPH K29 8 2 2 8 2 3 You can always reset the reference levels to their default value with the Set to Default menu item All the reference levels can be relative to the power or the voltage of the signal Depending on this selection different measurement points are being analyzed so the results may be different 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Press the Ref Power Config softkey 3 Select either the Power or the Voltage menu item as the reference Selecting the Video Bandwidth When you are using a wideband power sensor you can change the video bandwidth used for the measurement The main effect of using a small video bandwidth is that it reduces the displayed inherent noise U
59. for download are firmware updates including the corresponding release notes instrument drivers current data sheets application notes and image versions 1 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation The following conventions are used throughout the R amp S Spectrum Rider manual 1 2 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Graphical user interface elements All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands program code File names commands coding samples and screen output are distinguished by their font Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in underline blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks 1 2 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating proce dures User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 12 1 2 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation The ter
60. fuite essai de fonctionnement Cela permet d assurer le maintien de la s curit du produit Batteries et accumulateurs cellules Si les instructions concernant les batteries et accumulateurs cellules ne sont pas ou sont insuffisamment respect es cela peut provoquer des explosions des incendies et ou des blessures graves pouvant entra ner la mort La manipulation de batteries et accumulateurs contenant des lectrolytes alcalins par exemple cellules de lithium doit tre conforme la norme EN 62133 1171 0000 43 08 Page 6 Consignes de securite fondamentales Les cellules ne doivent tre ni demontees ni ouvertes ni reduites en morceaux Ne jamais exposer les cellules ou batteries a la chaleur ou au feu Ne pas les stocker dans un endroit ou elles sont exposees au rayonnement direct du soleil Tenir les cellules et batteries au sec Nettoyer les raccords sales avec un chiffon sec et propre Ne jamais court circuiter les cellules ou batteries Les cellules ou batteries ne doivent pas tre gardees dans une boite ou un tiroir ou elles peuvent se court circuiter mutuellement ou tre court circuitees par d autres mat riaux conducteurs Une cellule ou batterie ne doit tre retir e de son emballage d origine que lorsqu on l utilise Les cellules ou batteries ne doivent pas tre expos es des chocs m caniques de force non admissible En cas de manque d tanch it d une cellule le liquide ne doit pas entrer en contact
61. gt This command defines the reference level With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset You can set the offset with DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 178 The numeric suffix at DISPlay and TRACe is irrelevant for this command Remote Control Commands Parameters lt RefLevel gt Sets the reference level the unit depends on UNIT lt 1 2 gt POWer on page 181 Range Specified in the data sheet RST 20 dBm Default unit dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Sets the reference level to 60 dBm DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt RefLvlOffset gt This command defines a reference level offset The numeric suffix at DISPlay and TRACe is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt RefLvlOffset gt Sets the reference level offset Range 100 dB to 100 dB RST O dB Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALe RPOSition lt RefLviPosition gt This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid First you have to set a logarithmic scale for the vertical axis with DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SPACing on page 177 For a linear scale you cannot modify the reference position The numeric suffix at DISPlay and TRACe is irrelevant for this command P
62. in each case Unless expressly permitted never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product If a product is to be permanently installed the connection between the protective conductor terminal on site and the product s protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is made The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fuse protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected from injury or damage Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this purpose Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Unless specified otherwise products are not liquid proof see also section Operating states and operating positions item 1 Therefore the equipment must be protected against penetration by liquids If the necessary precautions are not
63. is located on the lower left of the front panel It starts up and shuts down the instrument See chapter 3 1 2 Switching the Instrument On and Off on page 28 See also chapter 3 2 1 Overview Control on page 29 Screenshot Key The screenshot E key provides a quick way to capture screenshot of the current screen at anytime For more information see the R amp S Spectrum Rider user manual Softkey The six softkeys on the front panel are used to access the softkey label See chap ter 3 2 1 Overview Control on page 29 Cn ra jr The softkeys label are function specific depending on the key selected on the front panel of the instrument See chapter 3 2 5 5 Function Keys on page 43 System Keys System keys configure the instrument to a predefined state change basic settings configure evaluation setting and provide save and recall functions FT i gt AE preser serur wove ue d A detailed description of the corresponding functions is provided in the R amp S Spectrum Rider user manual R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started PRESET Resets the instrument to the default state SETUP Provides basic instrument configuration functions e Reference frequency external internal and hardware selection Date time display audio and regional configuration Battery low indicator LAN interface Disabling and enabling of options Information about instrument configuration in
64. is only possible when you are measuring the peak enve lope power with the R amp S FSH Z44 power sensor based on a customized user standard Selecting a video bandwidth is only possible when you are measuring the peak enve lope power with the power sensor based on a customized user standard See the following commands for more information about these conditions e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer PRESet STATe on page 215 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer PRESet SELect on page 215 List of commands e CAlLCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer PRESet BANDwidth VIiDeo on page 214 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer PRESet BANDwidth VIDeo lt VideoBW gt This command defines the video bandwidth of the R amp S FSH Z44 power sensor The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt VideoBW gt Default unit GHz Example CALC PMET PRES BAND VID 10MHZ Defines a video bandwidth of 10 MHz 9 6 3 6 9 6 3 7 Remote Control Commands Reading Out Measurement Results List of commands e FETCh lt 1 2 gt PMETer on page 215 FETCh lt 1 2 gt PMETer This command queries the results of measurements with the power sensor Parameters lt Return values gt The return values depend on the power sensor in use and the selected suffix at FETCh Measurements with R amp S FSH Z1 or R amp S FSH Z18 FETC1 PMET power in dBm FETC2 PMET n a Example FETC2 PMET Returns nothing for R amp S FSH Z1 R amp S F
65. is received which is undefined or syntactically incorrect An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument STATus OPERation Register In the CONDition part this register contains information on which actions the instru ment is being executing or in the EVEN part information on which actions the instru ment has executed since the last reading It can be read using the commands STATus OPERation CONDition Or STATus OPERation EVENt Table 9 7 Meaning of the bits in the STATus OPERation register CALibrating This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration This bit is always O STATus QUEStionable Register This register contains information about indefinite states which may occur if the unit is operated without meeting the specifications It can be read using the commands STATus QUEStionable CONDition and STATus QUEStionable EVENt EE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 243 Remote Control Commands Table 9 8 Meaning of bits in STATus QUEStionable register These bits are not used BATTERY LOW If the instrument is running without any external power supply and the charging level of the inter nal battery is approximately lower than 5 this bit is set to indcate that the system will be shut down automatically in approx 5 min
66. its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and in some cases a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the product If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before and when using the product It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety for example that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation In these safety instructions the word product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies including instruments systems and all acce
67. jack USB ports Touch sensitive screen area Softkey labels on display Softkey System Keys DC port behind protective cap 10 Kensington lock 11 Function Keys 12 Power key 13 Alphanumeric key 14 Unit keys 15 Back key 16 Cancel key 17 Rotary knob 18 Screenshot key 19 LAN and Mini USB ports behind protective cap 20 SD Card Slot not visible as it is located behind the battery compartment oOo Y OO PS h gt co Instrument Tour 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 Instrument Tour Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument For example cleaning agents that contain a solvent may damage the front panel labeling plastic parts or the display Never use cleaning agents such as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft lintfree dust cloth Connectors of the R amp S Spectrum Rider The R amp S Spectrum Rider has several connectors The connectors are either on the upper left or right side of the instrument ee ae o nn 30 e DAC CONTEO ee 31 E te 32 O A 32 32 e Mechanical Locking Device ss 33 e Mini USB and LAN ASA 33 E e Re GE 34 RF Input The RF input 509 is located on the top of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Connect a cable or DUT to the RF input with an N connector Use a cable to connect
68. level have only one key word This key word denotes a complete command system Example SENSE This key word denotes the SENSe command system For commands of lower levels the complete path has to be specified starting on the left with the highest level the individual key words being separated by a colon Example SENSe FREQuency SPAN 10MHZ This command lies in the third level ofthe SENSe system It sets the frequency span BANDwidth FUNCtion FREQuency DE Tector STARt STOP CENTer SPAN OFF Set Fig 9 5 Tree structure the SCPI command systems using the SENSe system as example SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Multiple keywords Some key words occur in several levels within one command system Their effect depends on the structure of the command i e at which position in the header of a command they are inserted Example SOURce FM POLarity NORMal This command contains key word POLarity in the third command level It defines the polarity between modulator and modulation signal Example SOURce FM EXTernal POLarity NORMal This command contains key word POLarity in the fourth command level It defines the polarity between modulation voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the external signal source indicated Optional Keywords Some command systems permit certain key words to be inserted into the header or omitted These key words are marked by square brackets in the description The ful
69. necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de Rohde amp Schwarz encontraria la informacion debida en la documentacion del producto en el capitulo correspondiente Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales asi como la documentacion del producto y entreguelas a usuarios posteriores Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o danos por peligros de toda clase Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas durante el uso del producto Deberan tenerse en cuenta todas las demas informaciones de seguridad como p ej las referentes a la protecci n de personas que encontraran en el capitulo correspondiente de la documentacion del producto y que tambien son de obligado cumplimiento En las presentes informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones asi como toda clase de accesorios Los datos especificos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la documentacion del producto Se alizaci n de seguridad de los productos Las siguientes senales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros Significado Significado Aviso punto de peligro general Tension de alimentaci n de PUESTA EN
70. not allow metallic objects to come into contact with the terminals e Do not solder directly to the battery Storage The battery self discharges while not in use When storing the battery for an extended period of time make sure to e Handle the battery carefully to avoid short circuits Make sure that leads and termi nals are insulated e Keep the battery in the supplied packaging prior to use The temperature should not exceed 30 C R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started REESEN e Store the battery at an initial state of charge between 15 and 50 of its capacity When calculating the initial state of charge consider The maximum consumption of electronic devices The self discharge of the battery the higher the state of charge the higher the rate of self discharge e Avoid a deep discharge of the battery A deep discharge occurs when the state of charge falls below 5 of the battery s capacity e Recharge the battery at least every six months Should the battery voltage be low or even 0 V the battery protection circuit may have gone into a sleep mode In that case reset the battery with an approved charger Transportation No special regulations apply for transporting the battery The battery cells contain no metallic lithium End of Life The capacity of the battery decreases after it has gone through numerous charge cycles and nearing its end of life When the battery is dead do not open the battery Do n
71. query Parameters lt SourceFile gt String containing the path and file name of the source file lt Destination gt String containing the path and name of the destination file Example MMEM COPY Public Standards cdmaOne obwstd USB cdmaOne std Copies the cdmaOne standard file file to a memory stick Usage Setting only MMEMory DATA lt TargetFile gt lt Block gt This command writes block data into a file The delimiter must be set to EOI to obtain error free data transfer When you query the contents of a file you can save them in a file on the remote con trol computer The command is useful for reading stored settings files or trace data from the instru ment or for transferring them to the instrument Parameters lt TargetFile gt String containing the path and file name Remote Control Commands lt Block gt lt block_data gt Data block with the structure represents hash sign lt number gt represents length of the length information lt number gt represents length information of the binary data number of bytes lt data gt binary data with the indicated number of bytes Example MMEM NAME Public User Te stfile txt Creates a new file called Testfile txt MMEM DATA Public User Testfile txt 220Contents of the file The parameter mean Public selects the target file 2 hash sign and length of the length information 20 bytes 2 digits 20 indicates the number of sub
72. regulations must be observed 4 If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems and lead to environmental damage For additional information about environmental protection visit the Rohde amp Schwarz website Instrucciones de seguridad elementales iEs imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al d a con los estandares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el maximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados segun las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestro sistema de garantia de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado segun el certificado de conformidad de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable segun los estandares tecnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de pelig
73. search limits Default unit GHz Remote Control Commands Example See CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt X SLIMits lt 1 2 gt RIGHt on page 199 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt X SLIMits lt 1 2 gt RIGHt lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the right limit of the marker search range To use the command you first have to turn on search limits with CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt X SLIMits lt 1 2 gt STATe on page 198 The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Parameters lt SearchLimit gt Sets the right marker search limit The unit depends on the measurement e g Hz for measure ments in the frequency domain and seconds for measurements in the time domain Range Maximum span RST is set to the right diagram border when switching on search limits Default unit GHz Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 100MHz Turns search limits on and defines a search range from 10 MHz to 100 MHz CALCulate lt 1 4 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt Y This command queries the absolute vertical position of a marker lf necessary the corresponding marker is activated first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end between activating the delta marker and reading out the result This is only possible in single sweep mode The unit of t
74. signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or DANGER serious injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury Indicates information considered important but not hazard related e g NOTICE messages relating to property damage In the product documentation the word ATTENTION is used synonymously These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product The use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury or material damage 1171 0000 42 08 Page 2 Basic Safety Instructions Operating states and operating positions The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer without the product s ventilation being obstructed If the manufacturer s specifications are not observe
75. taken the user may suffer electric shock or the product itself may be damaged which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product e g if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment Penetration by water increases the risk of electric shock Prior to cleaning the product disconnect it completely from the power supply e g AC supply network or battery Use a soft non linting cloth to clean the product Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers Operation 1 Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make sure that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so otherwise injuries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer operator to select suitable personnel for operating the products 1171 0000 42 08 Page 4 Basic Safety Instructions 2 Before you move or transport the product read and observe the section titled Transport 3 As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens such as nickel cannot be generally excluded If you develop an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties when using a Rohde amp Schwarz product consult a physician immed
76. ten betreiben Siehe dazu das Handbuch des Ger tes 10 Die Batterien nicht ber unsortierten Siedlungsabfall entsorgen sondern getrennt sammeln Nach Ende der Lebensdauer ber eine geeignete Sammelstelle oder eine Rohde amp Schwarz Kundendienststelle entsorgen EU Kennzeichnung f r Batterien und Akkumulatoren 11 Diese Sicherheitsinformationen f r zuk nftige Informations und Nachschlagezwecke aufbewahren 1171 1507 71 01 3 1171150771 01 00 man_1_de en _fr__001 0 Consignes de securite pour batteries rechargeables lithium ion A AVERTISSEMENT Risque de blessures graves pouvant entrainer la mort Respecter integralement les consignes ci dessous afin d liminer tout risque de blessures graves voire mortelles par suite d explosion et ou d incendie 1 Ne pas demonter ouvrir ou decouper les batteries ni les faire tomber d une hauteur importante Des produits chimiques peuvent s couler en cas de deterioration m canique et les gaz lib r s peuvent provoquer des difficultes respiratoires Aerer immediatement les locaux Dans les cas graves consulter un m decin Si la peau ou les yeux entrent en contact avec les produits chimiques liberes des irritations peuvent se produire Rincer immediatement et abondamment la peau ou les yeux a l eau claire et consulter un m decin 2 Ne pas exposer les cellules ou les batteries a la chaleur ou au feu Ne pas les stocker dans un endroit expos la lumi re directe du soleil To
77. the power sensor cable to the FSH Z144 USB to binder adapter before connecting it to the USB interface of the R amp S Spectrum Rider For the test setup of the power sensor see Test setup on page 69 After connecting the power sensor to the R amp S Spectrum Rider you can connect the DUT to the N connector of the power sensor Risk of damage to the power sensor Before you start to work with the power sensor make sure that the continuous power applied to the input of the power sensor does not exceed a certain level Refer to the documentation of the power sensor for more information on the maximum input power If the R amp S Spectrum Rider recognizes a power sensor it sets up a connection via the interface and after a few seconds shows the measured power It displays the type of the power sensor in the display header If no power sensor has been connected or it is not connected appropriately the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows nothing If there are communication problems between the R amp S Spectrum Rider and the power sensor the R amp S Spectrum Rider displays one of the following error messages that indicate the possible cause Message Error in zeroing signal at sensor A signal was present at the power Unscrew the power sensor from sensor when zeroing was per the device under test and repeat formed zeroing Warning Input overloaded The power at the input of the Reduce the power at the sensor power sensor exceed
78. the MARKER key Press the Delete Marker softkey Select the Delete All Delta menu item Confirm the selection by pressing the rotary knob The R amp S Spectrum Rider deletes all delta markers Removing all markers at the same time 1 2 3 A Press the MARKER key Press the Delete Marker softkey Select the Delete All menu item Confirm the selection by pressing the rotary knob The R amp S Spectrum Rider deletes all markers and delta markers Special touchscreen gesture Alternatively draw a x on the trace window to delete all markers and delta markers on the trace window See chapter 4 2 5 Delete All Markers on page 80 5 1 7 7 Using Marker Functions In addition to the frequency and level readout the R amp S Spectrum Rider provides sev eral more complex marker functions in spectrum analyzer mode R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Deactivating marker functions Selecting a marker function again while it is still active will turns that marker function off Marker function frequency Marker functions are only applied to the marker position at center frequency Measuring the Noise Power Density The marker noise function calculates the noise power density at the marker position in dBm Hz The R amp S Spectrum Rider includes several variables in the calculation of the noise power density including the trace pixel values the resolution bandwidth the detector and the level
79. the video bandwidth 3 Enter the video bandwidth you need The R amp S Spectrum Rider uses the video bandwidth you have entered for the mea surement If the video bandwidth is no longer coupled to the resolution bandwidth the R amp S Spectrum Rider puts a blue dot at the VBW displays on the Parameter View 4 Press the Auto VBW softkey again to couple the video bandwidth to the RBW 5 1 5 Configuring and Triggering the Sweep You can find all necessary settings to configure the sweep itself in the sweep menu To access it press the SWEEP key e Setting the Sweep Time iii 111 e Selecting the Sweep Mode 112 e Working with Trigger Functionality ss 113 5 1 5 1 Setting the Sweep Time The sweep time is the time it takes the R amp S Spectrum Rider to get the results that are contained in one trace In the frequency domain span gt 0 the sweep time is the time it takes the R amp S Spec trum Rider to measure the spectrum in the specified span To avoid the display of spurs in the spectrum the sweep time has to meet some conditions e The sweep time depends on the resolution bandwidth If the sweep time is too short the resolution filter has no time to settle In that case the displayed levels will be too low For more information see chapter 5 1 4 1 Setting the Resolution Bandwidth on page 108 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 111 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode
80. threshold The process of turning off a limit line completely is similar to that of selecting a line 1 Press the Show Limit Lines The R amp S Spectrum Rider hides the limit line 2 Toremove the limit lines select the Upper Limit or Lower Limit softkey 3 Select the Remove softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider removes the limit line 5 1 8 2 Performing Limit Checks If limit lines are active the R amp S Spectrum Rider automatically checks the trace for limit violations after each frequency sweep As long as the signal does not violate the limit line the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows a Pass message in the measurement diagram As soon as one single value i e one pixel is outside of the limits the R amp S Spectrum Rider displays a Fail message in the diagram area and in addition sounds a beep A limit checks relates only to the frequency range defined by the limit line not the span Audio signal You can turn the acoustic signal that sounds in case of a limit violation on and off gt Select the Audio Beep menu item Once selected the audio beep is active the R amp S Spectrum Rider beeps each time a limit is violated Limit violation Note that a limit check fails only if the signal exceeds the limit line If the signal level is the same as the limit value the limit check passes User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 130 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode 5 2 Working with Channel Tables
81. to be transported or ship ped at a later date you can use the material to protect the control elements and con nectors Risk of damage during transportation and shipment Insufficient protection against mechanical and electrostatic effects during transportation and shipment can damage the instrument e Always make sure that sufficient mechanical and electrostatic protection is provi ded When shipping an instrument the original packaging should be used If you do not have the original packaging use sufficient padding to prevent the instrument from moving around inside the box Pack the instrument in antistatic wrap to protect it from electrostatic charging e Secure the instrument to prevent any movement and other mechanical effects dur ing transportation Accessory List The instrument comes with the following accessories e Power supply cable and adapter set e Li ion rechargeable battery e USB2 0 cable A Mini e Side strap e Printed Getting Started manual e Document folder containing safety instructions and calibration certificate e R amp S Spectrum Rider CD Rom Setting up the R amp S Spectrum Rider The R amp S Spectrum Rider is designed for lab operation as well as for service and main tenance applications on site Depending on the environment you can adjust the viewing angle of the display and either lay it out horizontally or prop it up using the support on the back of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Pr
82. touchscreen gesture O Alternatively double tap on touch screen to position the delta marker on the trace win dow See chapter 4 2 4 Add Marker on page 79 9 1 7 4 Liha 5 1 7 6 Common Measurement Settings Selecting the Marker Type When you add new markers they will be delta markers by default Their coordinates are relative to the first marker M1 You can turn delta markers into normal markers if you need absolute information about the marker position 1 Select the delta marker you want to convert in the Measurement Result View The selected marker will be highlighted in the Measurement Result View and its corresponding label in the trace window will turns focus with a blue frame around the marker label The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens a marker input field Alternatively you can press the MARKER key to select the delta marker you want to convert with the Select Marker softkey 2 Press the Marker Type softkey The delta marker turns into a normal marker Its label changes accordingly e g D2 to M2 and its coordinates are now absolute values Automatic Positioning of Markers The R amp S Spectrum Rider offers functions that make setting the markers easier or allow to make instrument settings on the basis of the current marker position 1 Press the MARKER key 2 Press the Set to Peak Set to Next Peak or Set to Minimum softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider positions the marker accordingly The
83. werden gt Stellen Sie das Produkt nicht auf hitzeerzeugende Ger tschaften z B Radiatoren und Heizl fter Die Umgebungstemperatur darf nicht die in der Produktdokumentation oder im Datenblatt spezifizierte Maximaltemperatur berschreiten Eine berhitzung des Produkts kann elektrischen Schlag Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 3 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Elektrische Sicherheit Werden die Hinweise zur elektrischen Sicherheit nicht oder unzureichend beachtet kann dies elektrischen Schlag Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen 1 10 11 Vor jedem Einschalten des Produkts ist sicherzustellen dass die am Produkt eingestellte Nennspannung und die Netznennspannung des Versorgungsnetzes bereinstimmen Ist es erforderlich die Spannungseinstellung zu ndern so muss ggf auch die dazu geh rige Netzsicherung des Produkts ge ndert werden Bei Produkten der Schutzklasse mit beweglicher Netzzuleitung und Ger testeckvorrichtung ist der Betrieb nur an Steckdosen mit Schutzkontakt und angeschlossenem Schutzleiter zul ssig Jegliche absichtliche Unterbrechung des Schutzleiters sowohl in der Zuleitung als auch am Produkt selbst ist unzul ssig Es kann dazu f hren dass von dem Produkt die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlags ausgeht Bei Verwendung von Verl ngerungsleitunge
84. with the car adapter R amp S HZ Z302 order number 1321 1340 02 You can connect the car adapter to the DC User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 22 Preparing for Use port With the car adapter you are able to charge the R amp S Spectrum Rider via the car s cigarette lighter socket A replacement battery R amp S HA Z306 order number 1321 1334 02 with the same capacity and charging time as the delivered battery inclu ded in the standard delivery is also available if required Battery dispatched during delivery is not fully charged for battery operation you have to charge it first To charge the battery connect the charger to AC power adapter included in the deliv ery For more information see Using an external battery charger on page 23 Using an external battery charger You can also use an external battery charger R amp S HA Z303 order no 1321 1328 02 to charge the battery To charge the battery externally put the battery into the external charger and supply it with power via the AC power adapter An amber LED on the charger indicates the charging process The LED turns to green when the battery is fully charged A red LED on the charger indicates that the battery is not charging or the charging failed Fig 3 4 External battery charger 1 Lithium ion battery R amp S HA Z306 2 External charger R amp S HA Z303 3 Power supply unit R amp S HA Z301 or car adapter R amp S HA Z302 Preparing for Use
85. you are measuring strong signals you have to set a high reference level in order to prevent an overload of the signal path of the analyzer and to keep the signal within the display range If you are measuring the spectrum of a composite signal make sure that the reference level is high enough to cover all signals and that all signals are within the measurement diagram 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Press the Ref Level softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the reference level 3 Enter the reference level you require If you change the reference level the R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the position of the trace as you make the changes R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Special touchscreen gesture O Alternatively define the reference level by swiping vertically across the touchscreen to change the reference level See chapter 4 2 2 Change Reference Level on page 78 By default the reference level corresponds to the grid line at the top of the diagram You can also change the position of the reference level to another grid line if you have a signal that would otherwise overlap with the top of the diagram area The R amp S Spec trum Rider indicates the current reference level position with a triangle at the corre sponding grid line on the vertical axis See index 5 on figure 4 1 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Press the Range Ref Pos softkey The R S Spectrum Rider opens a subm
86. 0 5896 customersupport china rohde schwarz com ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 22 06 00 Quality management and environmental management Sehr geehrter Kunde Sie haben sich fur den Kauf eines Rohde amp Schwarz Produk tes entschieden Sie erhalten damit ein nach modernsten Fer tigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt Es wurde nach den Regeln unserer Qualitats und Umweltmanagementsysteme entwickelt gefertigt und gepruft Rohde amp Schwarz ist unter ande rem nach den Managementsys temen ISO 9001 und ISO 14001 zertifiziert Der Umwelt verpflichtet Energie effiziente RoHS konforme Produkte Kontinuierliche Weiterentwicklung nachhaltiger Umweltkonzepte 150 14001 zertifiziertes Umweltmanagementsystem Dear customer You have decided to buy a Rohde Schwarz product This product has been manufactured using the most advanced meth ods It was developed manufac tured and tested in compliance with our quality management and environmental manage ment systems Rohde amp Schwarz has been certified for exam ple according to the ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 management systems Environmental commitment Energy efficient products Continuous improvement in environmental sustainability 150 14001 certified environmental management system Certified Quality System ISO 9001 Certified Environmental System ISO 14001 Cher client Vous avez choisi d acheter un produit Rohde amp Sc
87. 1 Setting the Frequency on page 211 e chapter 9 6 3 2 Configuring Power Level Readout on page 212 e chapter 9 6 3 3 Defining the Measurement Time on page 213 e chapter 9 6 3 4 Zeroing of the Power Sensor on page 214 e chapter 9 6 3 5 Defining the Video Bandwidth on page 214 e chapter 9 6 3 6 Reading Out Measurement Results on page 215 e chapter 9 6 3 7 Selecting a Telecommunication Standard on page 215 Setting the Frequency The following chapter describes commands necessary to define frequency settings List of commands e SENSe PMETer FREQuency on page 211 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer CPOWer BANDwidth on page 212 SENSe PMETer FREQuency lt Frequency gt This command sets the frequency of the power sensor Parameters lt Frequency gt Specified in the data sheet Default unit GHz 9 6 3 2 Remote Control Commands Example PMET FREQ 500 MHZ Sets the power sensor s frequency to 500 MHz CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer CPOWer BANDwidth lt ChannelBW gt This command defines the channel bandwidth Available for the channel power meter The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt ChannelBW gt Default unit GHz Example CALC PMET CPOW BAND 5 MHZ Sets the channel bandwidth to 5 MHz Configuring Power Level Readout The following chapter describes commands that configure the power level readout List of commands e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt
88. 1321 1011 02 01 01 125 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring the Signal Bandwidth The n dB Down marker function places two temporary markers to the left and to the right of the reference marker and measures the bandwidth between the two temporary markers The function therefore is a good way to measure the bandwidth of a signal or the bandwidth of a filter for example The temporary markers are represented as two vertical lines The distance to the reference marker is by default 3 dB below the reference marker You can also adjust this value manually Entering a positive value sets the temporary markers below the reference marker If it is for any reason not possible to calculate the frequency spacing dashes are displayed instead of a value Upon entering a negative value the function turns into an dB up function You can use an dB up function for example for measurements on notch filters Spectrum 2 Bandwidth N dB Down 6dB ee M1 577 504479 MHz 20 dBm 0 dE OFF 1 MHz 10 kHz 110 0 Nels 6 0 dB 20 ms Center 577 5 MHz Trace1 Clear Detect Auto Peak Trig Free Span 99 MHz Sre New Marker Delete Marker Select Marker Marker Function Set Marker 1 Press the MARKER key 2 Press the Marker Function key 3 Select the n dB Down menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider displays two temporary markers on the left and on the right of the reference marker M1 It also shows the bandwidth betw
89. 200 MHz and 500 MHz The R amp S Spectrum Rider therefore displays the noise in this frequency range as a function of frequency incremented by the trans ducer factor Outside the transducer range the R amp S Spectrum Rider sets the trans ducer factor at zero i e measurements in this range do not yield conclusive results You can select a second transducer factor with the Select Secondary menu item The secondary transducer factor in that case is added to the first The unit of the second transducer factor must always be the relative unit dB as otherwise an addition would not be useful When you select a secondary transducer factor the dialog box shows only those transducer factors that have dB as their unit e Unit for Measurements with Transcducerg nennen nnnnennnnn 134 e Setting the Reference Level 134 e Frequency Range Of Transcducer nenne nenne nenne nennen 134 e Data Sets Containing Transducer Factors 134 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 133 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode E 9 3 1 9 3 2 9 3 3 9 3 4 Unit for Measurements with Transducers If the unit of the transducer is dB the units dBm dBmV or dBuV remain unchanged The linear units Volt and Watt are not permissible They are deactivated in the units menu If the unit of the transducer is dBuV m or dBuA m this unit is also used for the R amp S Spectrum Rider level display This means that both the level axis of the diagram and the lev
90. 4 Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult This command queries the frequency spacing or bandwidth of the n dB down markers The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Parameters lt Return values gt lt Bandwidth gt Bandwidth in Hz Example See CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe on page 204 Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe lt State gt This command turns the n dB Down marker function on and off The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC NDBD STAT ON Turns on the n dB marker function CALC MARK FUNC NDBD 3 Positions two temporary markers 3 dB below a reference marker CALC MARK FUNC NDBD FREQ Queries the frequency position of the n dB Down markers would return e g 100000000 200000000 CALC MARK FUNC NDBD RES Queries the measurement result would return e g 100000000 Remote Control Commandes CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NOISe STATe lt State gt This command turns the noise measurement for all markers on and off You can query the results of the noise power density at the marker position with CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NOISe RESul
91. 5 dBm Pos Ovsh 3 3 dB 5 20 0 dBm Fall Time 11 858 us Pulse Base 31 5 dBm Neg Ovsh dB 30 0 9 0 dB 40 0 7 Full 50 0 9 60 0 EN 80 0 0 0 O 110 0 O 2 GHz Trace Clear Detect Auto Peak Trig Free Trace Time 2ms 8 10 Frequency Unit Zero Reference Channel BW Connected power sensor model and type of algorithm for power calculation Numerical results showing the pulse characteristics Diagram showing the pulse characteristics in a graphical format trace display Scale of the x axis Reference for relative power measurements Power offset Video bandwidth Configuration Overview Measurement frequency 10 Softkey menu of the pulse power measurement application JO O1 PS ON gt The following power characteristics are calculated and displayed as numerical values see also the figure below for a graphical representation of the parameters User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 144 ON Inner Wees A nn Amplitude of Pulse Top if 0 5 0 0 5 it i Rise Tim i On Tim i f Air i all Ti l i i 4 Pulse Top 100 Distal 90 nominally _ Dee I Mesial 50 nominally Pulse Bottom 0 15 2 25 Time s T H D D H D DU H E i fi rem Fulse Period Pulse Repitition Interval Pulse characteristic Pulse Width Pulse Period Pulse Off Time Rise Time Fall Time Duty Cycle Start Time Time that the pulse
92. 6 Confirm the entry with the Save button Instrument Tour The connection is now created and configured x Name IP Address sen R amp S FPH 192 168 1 20 a Ww Q Add amp Connect 7 Select the new connection labeled R amp S Spectrum Rider 8 Select the Connect button to establish the connection Connecting the R amp S Spectrum Rider in an existing LAN You can either draw the R amp S Spectrum Rider IP address automatically from the DHCP server or manually assign a fixed address With manual allocation a fixed IP address and subnet mask must be assigned to the R amp S Spectrum Rider as described in chap ter 3 2 8 1 LAN Connection on page 57 Then the R amp S Instrument View software has to be configured as described in Configuring the R amp S Instrument View software on page 59 with the assigned IP address Free IP address Contact your IT system manager to get a free IP address In networks with a DHCP server DHCP permits automatic allocation of the network configuration to the R amp S Spectrum Rider connected via LAN cable For this purpose DHCP has to be active on the R amp S Spectrum Rider DHCP is off by default Turn it on like this 1 Inthe Instrument Setup dialog box select the DHCP item 2 Select DHCP to On to activate DHCP R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started The R amp S Spectrum Rider is now allocated an IP address and the subnet mask by the DHCP server This
93. A A AA Trigger Free Run Video 0 100 Eternal Rise o External Fall Fr 10 2 5 Bandwidth Selection The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Auto VBW 10 2 6 Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection eme o mw CSS Detector Auto Detector Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Show Enable Trace 2 Enable Memory 1 Enable Memory 2 Select Trace Trace Math Math Position Off Trace Memory Memory Trace 10 2 7 Display and Limit Lines The LINES key opens a menu that contains the functionality to control display and limit lines Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Show Limit Lines BEE BE Upper Limit Set Threshold Load From File o AAA Lower Limit Set Threshold Load From File AA Auto Beep 10 2 8 Markers The MARKER key open a menus to control markers and use marker functions Functions of the Power Meter Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection CECI EE Delete Marker Delete Selected Delete All Delta Delete All Marker Function Noise ps Dess A Gate BEE Me A CS BER COR BER Set Marker 10 3 Functions of the Power Meter This section contains all softkeys and menus that are av
94. ATus QUEStionable registers are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Example STAT PRES Usage Event STATus QUEue NEXT This command returns the earliest entry to the error queue and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 no error is returned This command is identical with the command SYSTem ERRor Example STAT QUE Usage Query only STATus OPERation EVENt This command reads out the EVENt section of the OPERation register The command at the same time deletes the contents of the EVENt section Usage Query only STATus OPERation CONDition This command reads out the CONDition section of the OPERation register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Usage Query only STATus OPERation ENABle lt DecimalValue gt This command controls the ENABle part of the OPERation register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENT part of the status register to bere ported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range D to 65535 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 249 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands STATus OPERation NTRansition lt
95. Adjusting the display backlight 1 Inthe Instrument Setup dialog box select the Display Backlight item 2 Enter the backlight intensity you want with the numeric keys The backlight intensity is a percentage from 0 to 100 with 100 being the brightest 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob Adjusting the keyboard backlight 1 Inthe Instrument Setup dialog box select the Keyboard Backlight item 2 Enter the backlight intensity you want with the numeric keys The backlight intensity is a percentage from 0 to 100 with 100 being the brightest 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 92 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started 3 2 7 5 Adjusting the keyboard backlight delay 1 In the Instrument Setup dialog box select the Display Backlight item 2 Enter the time you want to turn off the keyboard backlight with the numeric keys The time delay has a range of 1s to 10s 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob Configuring the Audio Output The audio settings control the audio output of the system Setting the key click volume The key click volume sets the volume of the sound that the R amp S Spectrum Rider pro duces when you press a key or select a softkey 1 Inthe Instrument Setup dialog box select the Key Click Volume item 2 Enter the volume you want with the numeric keys The key click volume is a percentage from 0 t
96. BDown STATe on page 204 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NOISe STATe on page 205 e CAlCulate lt l 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NOISe RESult on page 205 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1l 6 gt FUNCtion REFerence on page 205 CAL Culate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt COUNt FREQuency This command performs a frequency measurement at the marker position and returns the result To get a valid result you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end to make sure that the R amp S Spectrum Rideractually reaches the fre quency you want to measure This is only possible in single sweep mode Remote Control Commandes Before you can use the command you have to turn on the frequency counter with CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt COUNt STATe on page 201 The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant for this command Example See CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt COUNt STATe on page 201 Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt COUNt STATe lt State gt This command turns the frequency counter at the marker position on and off You can read out the result with CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt COUNt FREQuency on page 200 Frequency counting is possible only for one marker at a time If it is activated for another marker it is automatically deacti
97. DEModulation SELect 203 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion DEModulation GTATel nennen 202 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown ii 203 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency nen 203 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESUI nennen 204 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe nenn 204 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NOISe RESUI ins 205 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NOISel STATe EE 205 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt F UNCtion REFerence ss 205 CALCulate 1 2 gt MARKer 1 6 gt MAXIMUMENEXT use ee een 197 CALCGulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt MAXiImum PEAK eEen 196 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt MINimum PEAKT nennen nnnnnennn 197 PC E 1 52 MARKED nee 197 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKers 1 PR SLIMIS lt T 22 LEFT ren 198 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt X SLlMits lt 1 2 gt RIGHt oooooonncccccoccccccoccconoconcnnnononnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnancnnnnns 199 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt X SLIMits lt 1 2 gt STATe se 198 CALCulate lt 1 2 2 MARKer 1 67 ESTATE aa 196 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MATHA lt 1 2 gt COPY MEMO in a 188 CAlculates1 2 MATAS 231 A S 188 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MATHS1 2 gt EXPRESSION
98. DISP CMPA DEF Restores the original color scheme Usage Event DISPlay DATE FORMat lt DateFormat gt This command sets the display date format Parameters lt DateFormat gt DDMMyyyy MMDDyyyy RST DDMMyyyy Example DISP DATE FORM DDMMyyyy Audio Settings This chapter describes all commands to control the audio functions of the R amp S Spec trum Rider List of commands e SYSTem AUDio VOLume on page 229 e SySTem BEEPer VOLume on page 229 e SYSTem BEEPer KEY VOLume on page 230 SYSTem AUDio VOLume lt Volume gt This command sets the volume of the internal speaker Parameters lt Volume gt Range O to 1 ROT 0 3 Example SYST AUD VOL 0 40 Sets the volume to 40 SYSTem BEEPer VOLume lt Volume gt This command sets the volume of the system beeper 9 6 8 4 Remote Control Commands Parameters lt Volume gt Range O to 1 ROT 0 3 Example SYST BERP VOL 0 50 Sets the volume of the beeper to 50 SYSTem BEEPer KEY VOLume lt Volume gt This command sets the volume of the keyboard click noise Parameters lt Volume gt Range O to 1 RST 0 3 Example SYST BEEP KEY VOL 0 10 Sets of keyboard clicking volume to 10 Setting up a Network Connection This chapter describes all commands that are used ifthe R amp S Spectrum Rider is part of a network List of commands e SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ETHernet
99. DecimalValue gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of the OPERation register Setting a bit causes a 1 to O transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN register Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 STATus OPERation PTRansition lt DecimalValue gt This command controls the Positive TRansition part of the OPERation register Setting a bit causes a O to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN register Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 STATus QUEStionable EVENt This command reads out the EVENt section of the QUEStionable register The command at the same time deletes the contents of the EVENt section Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt This command reads out the EVENt section of the QUEStionable register The command at the same time deletes the contents of the EVENt section Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVENt This command reads out the EVENt section of the QUEStionable register The command at the same time deletes the contents of the EVENt section Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt This command reads out the EVENt section of the QUEStionable register The command at the same time deletes the contents of the
100. Deo INTernal IMMediate Selects Free Run measurements EXTernal Selects an external trigger VIDeo Selects the video trigger INTernal Selects an internal trigger RST IMMediate For more information see chapter Setting the Sweep Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Working with Traces The following commands set up the trace and the various functions associated with it e g trace mathematics or the selection of the detector List of commands e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MATH lt 1 2 gt EXPRession DEFine on page 188 e cCALCulate lt 1l 2 gt MATH lt 1 2 gt COPY MEMory on page 188 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MATH lt 1 2 gt STATe on page 188 Remote Control Commands e DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 4 gt STATe on page 189 e DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt MEMory STATe on page 189 e DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt MODE on page 189 e FORMat BORDer on page 190 o SENSe DETector lt 1 2 gt FUNCtion on page 190 e SENSe DETector lt 1 2 gt FUNCtion AUTO on page 190 e TRACe lt 1 2 gt DATA on page 191 e FORMat DATA on page 191 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MATH lt 1 2 gt EXPRession DEFine lt MathExpression gt This command defines the mathematical expression for relating traces to trace 1 You have to activate trace mathematics with CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MATH lt 1 2 gt STA
101. EVENt section Usage Query only User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 250 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands STATus QUEStionable CONDition This command reads out the CONDition section of the QUEStionable register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition This command reads out the CONDition section of the QUEStionable register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable LIMit CONDition This command reads out the CONDition section of the QUEStionable register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition This command reads out the CONDition section of the QUEStionable register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt DecimalValue gt This command controls the ENABle part of the QUEStionable register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to bere ported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle lt DecimalValue gt This command controls the ENABle part o
102. FEF TET E hspafraf 2 _FrRansuen Pan_sT2T Jo rshtafafia _NTRanston Par 5 2 0 E x ER YY dai EVENPan 3 2 9 0 14588888 288848 to higher order register aan calor EIERE 3 eTo vam Fig 9 6 The status register model CONDition part The CONDition part is directly written into by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents reflects the current instrument status This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Its contents is not affected by reading PTRansition part The Positive TRansition part acts as an edge detector When a bit ofthe CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 PTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set PTR bit 0 the EVENT bit is not set This part can be written into and read at will Its contents is not affected by reading NTRansition part The Negative TRansition part also acts as an edge detector When a bit of the CONDI tion part is changed from 1 to 0 the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVEN bit is setto 1 NTR Bit 1 the EVENt bit is set NTR Bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read at will Its contents is not affected by reading 9 6 9 2 Remote Control Commands With these two edge register parts the user can define which state transition of the condition part none 0 to 1 1 to O or both is stored in the EVENt part
103. FF Turns the coupling off manual step size ROT DIVTen Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK DIVT Couples the step size to 10 of the span SENSe FREQuency INPut MODE lt InputMode gt This command selects the frequency mode Select the Channel frequency mode only if you want to work with channel tables In this case the input of the center frequency is not a frequency value but a channel number Remote Control Commande Parameters lt InputMode gt CHANnel FREQ CHANnel Sets the frequency input mode to selection of a channel FREQ Sets the frequency input mode to frequency input in Hz RST FREQ Example FREQ INP MODE CHAN Sets the frequency mode to work with channel tables SENSe FREQuency MODE lt SweepMode gt This command sets the measurement domain frequency or time In the time domain CW and FIXed set the frequency with SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 172 In the frequency domain SWEep set the frequency with SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 172 SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 175 SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 175 SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 176 Parameters lt SweepMode gt SWEep CW FlXed SWEep Selects the frequency domain span gt 0 CW Selects the time domain span 0 FIXed Selects the time domain span 0 RST SWEep Example FREQ MODE SWE Activates frequency domain measurements SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt FreqOffset gt This c
104. IRectory on page 217 COPY on page 217 DATA on page 217 DELete on page 218 FILE on page 218 FILE DATE on page 218 MMEMory FILE TIME on page 219 INIT on page 219 LOAD STATe on page 219 MDIRectory on page 220 MOVE on page 220 RDIRectory on page 220 STORe STATe on page 221 SYSTem SET LOCK on page 221 SYSTem SET UNLock on page 221 MMEMory CATalog This command queries the files of the current directory You can select directories with MMEMory CDIRectory on page 217 This command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM CDIR Public Limit Lines Opens directory Limit Lines MMEM CAT Returns all files in Public Limit Lines Usage Query only Remote Control Commands MMEMory CATalog DIRectories This command queries the directories of the current directory This command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM CDIR Public Opens directory Public MMEM CAT DIR Returns all directories in the Public directory Usage Query only MMEMory CDIRectory lt PathName gt This command changes the current directory Parameters lt PathName gt String containing the path to another directory Example MMEM CDIR Public Opens directory Public MMEMory COPY lt SourceFile gt lt Destination gt This command copies one or more files to another directory This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no
105. Input See chapter 5 1 3 7 Setting the Input Impedance on page 108 e Amplitude See chapter 5 1 3 Configuring the Vertical Axis on page 104 e Frequency See chapter 5 1 2 Configuring the Horizontal Axis on page 100 e Bandwidth See chapter 5 1 4 Setting Bandwidths on page 108 e Analysis See chapter 5 1 6 Working with Traces on page 114 e Trigger See chapter 5 1 5 3 Working with Trigger Functionality on page 113 To configure settings gt Select any of the six configuration dialog boxes to open the corresponding dialog box See table 3 3 Configuring the Horizontal Axis The FREQ key contains all necessary functions to configure the horizontal axis for spectrum measurements The contents of the menu depend on the currently selected measurement Usually the horizontal axis contains frequency information in spectrum mode You can specify the frequency in terms of the center frequency or by defining a start and stop frequency for a particular span AA User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 100 5 1 2 1 Common Measurement Settings If you know the frequency of the signal you are measuring it is best to match the cen ter frequency to the signal s frequency If you are investigating signals e g harmonics that are within a particular frequency range the best option is to enter a start and stop frequency to define the span e Defining the Center Frequency ss 101 e Defining a Freq
106. M e 299 SI KEE ES ON ATOS O o ce 233 SYS TEN AUD VOLUME usaste ee coast 229 So Tem BEEPer KEY VOLUME ito 230 o BEEP A AN ii o e In A 229 ro EE Lee TE 233 So Tem CAP Tue COUNT ea ii aaa 223 SY o ren CAP Ture E STA TO E 223 Be Ga MODE EE 224 SYSTem CAPTure SCReen STAT c ccceccccssececccssececcceeeeccossacececsseecncaeeecseseessceaeessceeeesnscseeesseseessoes 224 Yo Tem COMM nlcale LAN ETHerfnekl u crs rennen 230 SYSLem COMMunicate RER 230 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SUBMask iii iiiiiiiiinessrrrenssceenensseennnn 231 Yo Tem COMMiunicate SOCKetADDReSS curras 291 SYotemCOMMunical SOCKetDACPIS RA KC 231 sYs Tem COMM unicale SOCK et PORT nn 231 SV TEN DIT ee e En o e e o O E E 234 oT ERRO EE 234 SYS Tem ERRO CODE H E 234 Soren ERROR GOD Ne Me zen 234 SYS TEIL e e 235 SYS RE Geib TC A KEE 234 AE KR Ee EC ee ee ee 235 EE EE ae 235 EA Ell Bn dE EE ee ee 235 SS ERT cu 236 S Tem LANGISgE CA TI a u en 236 ld SOURCE eege 236 Slds nenne ee a en 236 Sorem PRESO rato 236 SI IE FRESEIFAL TON et nn PA 237 e Eem PRE OT 237 SV Tem PRESeLUSER acc ae een 237 SO RO a OU UE shea e E esranesceeec Zor Seis EE 221 SY Tem SET UNLOCK ne ee ne 221 BY IL gelen an e e ee ra ee een ee Zor SY olen oOEV ent DIS TanceINTeralsia sera ae 225 SYS Tem SOEVentLIMIES MODE cccaseacsancsnavesesnntcnnageceensstassaaesadenavseaasenerdeniesansecdssunsenssnedencenttensedaevandbiases 225 SY o lem SOE Vert RECOMING STO Rage une ee cda
107. MARCHA PARADA Observar la documentaci n del producto Atenci n en el manejo de dispositivos de peso Indicaci n de estado de espera standby elevado A Peligro de choque el ctrico Corriente continua DC Advertencia superficie caliente Corriente alterna AC Conexi n a conductor de protecci n Corriente continua Corriente alterna DC AC Conexion a tierra El aparato esta protegido en su totalidad por un aislamiento doble reforzado Conexi n a masa 9 Distintivo de la UE para baterias y acumuladores Mas informacion en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 1171 0000 42 08 Page 8 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Significado Significado Aviso Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos Distintivo de la UE para la eliminaci n por sensibles a la electrost tica ESD separado de dispositivos el ctricos y electr nicos M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 2 Advertencia rayo l ser M s informaci n en la secci n Funcionamiento punto 7 Palabras de se al y su significado En la documentaci n del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de se al con el fin de advertir contra riesgos y peligros A PELIGRO Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita causa lesiones graves o incluso la muerte Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones graves o incluso la muerte lesion
108. ME on page 184 Remote Control Commands SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 184 ABORt This command aborts the current measurement and resets the trigger system This command is an event and therefore has no query and no RST value Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts a measurement and starts a new one Usage Event INITiate IMMediate This command initiates a new measurement sequence With sweep count gt O or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the indicated num ber of measurements With trace functions MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the pre vious results are reset on restarting the measurement In single sweep mode synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measure ments can be achieved with the command OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the sweep end is not possible since the overall mea surement never ends This command is an event and therefore has no query and no RST value Example INIT CONT OFF DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Turns single sweep mode and trace averaging on INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the sweep Usage Event INITiate CONTinuous lt State gt This command selects the sweep mode Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON Selects continuous sweeps OFF Selects single sweep ROT ON Example INIT CONT OFF Turns on single sweep mode Remote Control Commands SENSe SWEep COUNt lt ofSweeps gt
109. OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Activates the preamplifier Remote Control Commands INPut IMPedance lt Impedance gt This command selects the nominal input impedance The set impedance is taken into account in all level indications of results The setting 75 2 should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 adapter of the RAZ type 25 in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 75 Q 50 O Parameters lt Impedance gt 50 75 RST 50 Q Default unit Ohm Example INP IMP 75 Sets the input impedance to 75 Ohm SENSe CORRection TRANsducer lt 1 2 gt STATe lt State gt This command turns a transducer factor on and off Before turning it on you have to select a transducer factor with SENSe CORRection TRANsducer lt 1 2 gt SELect on page 180 The numeric suffix at TRANsducer specifies the primary or secondary transducer Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CORR TRAN1 ON Activates the primary transducer SENSe CORRection TRANsducer lt 1 2 gt SELect lt TransducerName gt This command selects a transducer factor If lt name gt does not exist yet a new transducer factor is created The numeric suffix at TRANsducer specifies the primary or secondary transducer Parameters lt TransducerName gt String containing the file name of the transducer factor If t
110. Public Datasets Public Storage Card USB H Dataset001 set 26 08 15 11 31 Be As On screen MAS 6 1 Remaining memory on selected data storage 2 Header bar 3 Selected data sets and folder structure 4 Data set name input field 5 On screen Keyboard 6 Quick naming view 7 On screen Keyboard icon 3 Specify a name for the data set in the input field of the dialog box with the on screen keyboard or the Quick naming view function In addition use the BACK key to delete a character and the CANCEL key to quit the entry You can either e Overwrite a data set that already exists by selecting it from the available data sets in the list e Edit the name of an existing data set using the on screen keyboard or Quick naming view function e Create a new data set by entering a new name with the on screen keyboard or Quick naming view function e Sort the files by selecting the respective column of the Header bar and the list will be sorted according to the type i e Name Size Date Time selected 4 Select the storage medium that you want to use 5 Press the Save softkey User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 72 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started The R amp S Spectrum Rider saves the data set Quick naming view is a feature that speed up the process of naming a file It defines one or more predefined text modules or term together for compiling a filename For more information
111. R amp S FPH B22 108 Setting the Input Impedance sise 108 USING Transducer FAC TONS Sd es ina den ee di 108 Seting BAHAMAS a ae an ee ende 108 Setting the Resolution Bandwidth nennen 108 Setting the Video Bandwidth nnnnnn nennen nnnnnenn 110 Configuring and Triggering the Sweep 111 Setting the Sweep TIME E 111 Selecting the Sweep Mode 112 Working with Trigger Fupebioneltbt oetesgeegtorfesgggekdegden nennen nennen 113 Working with Kee 114 Selecting Runen lee EE 114 Selecting the Ee EE 115 Working with a Second Ne 117 Working with WIGIMOIY e e 118 Using Rer Ee 119 USIMO GEN 119 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Contents 5 1 7 1 Using Markers and Deltamarkers ss 119 9 1 7 2 Positioning VANCE E 120 5 1 7 3 Positioning a Delta Marken ia di 121 5 1 7 4 Selecting the Marker Type iii 122 5 1 7 5 Automatic Positioning of M rkers snssnanehnen een 122 0 1 4 0 R MOMNO MIATKSTS neuen 122 9 1 7 7 Using Marker FUMCUOMS E 123 9 1 8 Using Emit ONGS EE 128 5 1 8 1 Selecting a Limit ET 129 5 1 8 2 Performing Limit EN 130 5 2 Working with Channel Tables u n nn en 131 8 3 USING Transaucer Fakte ege BEE 132 5 3 1 Unit for Measurements with Transducers 134 5 3 2 Setting the Reference Level 134 5 3 3 Frequency Range of Transducer
112. R amp S Spectrum Rider Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience In con trast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the device status Therefore control programs should always define an initial device status e g with the command RST and then implement the required settings 9 1 1 LAN Interface To be integrated in a LAN the instrument is equipped with a standard LAN interface consisting of a connector a network interface and protocols VXI 11 Instrument access via VXI 11 is usually achieved from high level programming plat forms by using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer VISA encapsulates the low level VXI 11 LAN or USB function calls and thus makes the transport interface trans parent for the user The necessary VISA library is available as a separate product For details contact your local R amp S sales representative 9 1 2 USB Interface For remote control via the USB connection the PC and the instrument must be con nected via the USB interface The required driver comes with the R amp S Instrument View software package and is automatically installed on the PC with the software package The driver addressed the instrument via the USB interface with the fix IP address 172 16 10 10 In addition a remote control connection via the SCPI interface requires the VISA library to be installed on the PC EE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 152 Interfaces a
113. R amp S Spectrum Rider R amp S Instrument View is abbreviated as R amp S Instrument View Basic Safety Instructions Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions All plants and locations of the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system The product described here has been designed built and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or if expressly permitted also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for any purpose other than
114. R amp S Spectrum Rider the amber LED o is dis played In general a red LED M indicates that there is a battery charging error Table 3 1 Summary of LED indication on POWER key Green LED Instrument is in operation mode Instrument is in switch off mode with a fully charge battery A blinking blue LED indicates that the battery charging is in process Blue LED Red LED There is an error in the battery charging This is an indication that there is no AC or DC supply to the instrument The instrument is in a switch off mode LED OFF Amber LED Instrument is in switch off mode with AC supply and there is no battery in it R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started Risk of losing data If a running instrument without battery is disconnected directly from the power cord the instrument loses its current settings Furthermore program data may be lost Press the POWER key first to shut down the application properly 3 1 3 Checking the Supplied Options The instrument can be equipped with different hardware and installed options For a list of R amp S Spectrum Rider supported hardware and installed options refer to the instru ment brochure for the list of options available In order to check whether the installed options correspond to the options indicated in the delivery note proceed as follows 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Select the Installed Options softkey A list of all available options and the curr
115. R amp S Spectrum Rider provides the following selections for automatic positioning of markers e Set to Peak The Peak function places the active marker or the delta marker on the highest level value of the trace e Set to Next Peak The Next Peak function places the active marker or delta marker on the next high est level value of the trace relative to its current position e Set to Minimum The Minimum function places the active marker or delta marker on the lowest value of the trace Removing Markers Remove markers any time you want from the trace window Removing selected markers 1 Select the marker you want to delete in the Measurement Result View Alternatively you can select the marker you want to delete with the Select Marker softkey Common Measurement Settings The selected marker will be highlighted in the Measurement Result View and its corresponding label in the trace window will turns focus with a blue frame around the marker label The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens a marker input field Press the Delete Marker softkey Select the Delete Selected menu item Confirm the selection by pressing the rotary knob The R amp S Spectrum Rider deletes the marker Deactivating markers If you delete marker 1 M1 all delta markers that are relative to that marker are also deleted Removing delta markers only 1 Select the delta marker you want to delete in the Measurement Result View Alternatively press
116. RMat IDENt lt Format gt This command sets the response format to the IDN query This function is intended for re use of existing control programs together with the R amp S Spectrum Rider Parameters lt Format gt LEGacy NEW LEGacy Format that is compatible to the older R amp S Spectrum Rider ver sion NEW Format that is compatible to the newer R amp S Spectrum Rider ver sion Example SYST FORM IDEN LEG TDN IDN would return the older R amp S Spectrum Rider version SYST FORM IDEN NEW TDN IDN would return the newer R amp S Spectrum Rider version SYSTem HELP HEADers This command returns a list of all available remote control commands This command is a query and therefore no RST value Example SYST HELP HEAD Returns the syntax of all available commands Usage Query only SYSTem HELP SYNTax lt arg0 gt This command returns the full syntax of the specified command This command is a query and therefore no RST value Parameters lt arg0 gt String containing the command you want to query Example SYST HELP SYNT SYST ERR Returns the full syntax In this case SYSTem ERRor NEXTT Remote Control Commands Usage Query only SYSTem LANGuage lt Language gt This command sets the language of the R amp S FSH user interface You can query a list of available languages with SYSTem LANGuage CATalog on page 236 Parameters lt Language gt String containing the language Exam
117. S ee 119 Trace MEMON een anne 118 Mac Mol nee ee ee ee 114 Trace selection sia 117 Transducer ee oa 108 132 To E 134 RR ele M ee 111 Event remote ae ee 171 Tagger A moe cou 113 Re et 114 U o qq 105 Power SEHE ea 139 DAS E TEN 134 Unpacking and checking the instrument 18 USB connection with R amp S Spectrum Rider 61 DS OR c 32 33 User EE 2 eege 29 75 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 284 V a 110 Vertical axis atari 104 Video bandwidth iii 110 View trace EEN 114 Volume AAA 127 Key clock VOILE nennen 53 System beeper sassssssedenunen inneren 53 W w active Marker E 120 Wait Remo soare o E ee 171 A Das EE 100 Y ee 104 Z Ke S o y AP UA A 104 LOTO ras roo 138
118. S REFerence Input for external reference signal TRIGger Input for external trigger BIAS BIAS port RST TRIGger Example SYST BNC MODE BIAS Sets the BNC socket to bias Remote Control Commande SYSTem DATE lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt This command sets the date for the internal calendar Parameters lt Year gt Range 1980 to 2099 lt Month gt Range 1 to 12 lt Day gt Range 1 to 31 Example SYST DATE 2000 6 1 Sets the date to 1 6 2000 SYSTem ERRor NEXT This command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and deletes it This command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example STAT ERR Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor ALL This command queries the complete error queue This command is a query and therefore no RST value Example SYST ERR ALL Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT This command queries the code of the next error in the error queue This command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example STAT ERR CODE Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL This command queries the complete error queue This command is a query and therefore no RST value Example SYOT ERRSCODEFALL Usage Query only Remote Control Commands SYSTem ERRor COUNt This command queries the number of errors currently in the error queue This command is a query and therefore no RST value Example SYST ERR COUN Usage Query only SYSTem FO
119. S Spectrum Rider to ab nennen nennen 56 PA CO Ip o on O een 57 USB CONSI riera di 61 Trying Out the Instrument en 62 Using the Spectrum Analvzer iii 62 Attenuating the Signal nn ice 62 Using the El el 64 Measuring ele realen 64 Measuring wa ne 67 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 3 9 1 ooo 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 1 1 4 8 1 2 4 8 1 3 4 8 2 4 8 2 1 4 8 2 2 4 8 3 4 9 Using a Power e 69 Measuring the Power with a Power Sensor 69 Saving and Recalling Results and Gettmgs nenne nennen nennen nennen 71 Saving Measurement Results ss 12 Recalling Measurement Results 13 Instrument FUNCHONS naar 75 Screen Layout and Elements u4 z n000n2n00nnnn0nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nen 75 Configuration Overview Screen Layout 76 Touchscreen Gesture Element euu22s n00nn nnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 77 Change Center FF qU enc sss nimes deene 77 Change Reference Level ss cine iiens see 18 E e o EA 79 nn eo o o OOO 79 Delete All Marker roscriniactonicinirandl ire callo een nee 80 Means Of MPU APP ee 81 USING the Alphanumeric VC 81 Using ihe Rotary e EG 82 Confirming and Cancelling EG 83 Remote OD Ci te 83 Presetting the R amp S Spectrum Rider siennes 84 Configuring MeaSuremMents ccccescecceseeeseneeeseeeeeeeeaseeeeeeeeeeneneesneneeeeaseeseaenessonen
120. SH Z18 Selecting a Telecommunication Standard These commands apply radio communication standards to measurements with the power sensor Note that the selection of a standard is available only for the power sensors R amp S FSH Z1 and Z18 List of commands e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer PRESet STATe on page 215 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer PRESet SELect on page 215 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer PRESet STATe lt State gt This command turns the use of a standard on and off The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt State gt ON OFF Example CALC PMET PRES ON Activates usage of a standard CALCulate lt 1 2 gt PMETer PRESet SELect lt Standard gt This command selects the standard for power sensor measurements The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command 9 6 4 Remote Control Commands Parameters lt Standard gt E g GSM EDGE WCDMA CDMAOne CDMA2000 DVBT DAB TETRA USER Example CALC PMET PRES SEL GSM Selects the GSM standard for power sensor measurements File Management The following commands perform various tasks in the context of file management These commands are independent from the operating mode List of commands MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory CATalog on page 216 CATalog DIRectories on page 217 CD
121. STOP lt StopFrequency gt This command defines the stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain span gt 0 Parameters lt StopFrequency gt Range Depends on the operating mode and is specified in the datasheet RST fmax Default unit GHz Example FREQ STOP 2000MHz Defines a stop frequency of 2 GHz Configuring the Vertical Axis The following commands configure the vertical level axis and level parameters of the active display List of commands e DISPlay lt l 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALe ADJust on page 176 e DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SPACing on page 177 e DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALe on page 177 e DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 177 e DISPlay lt l 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 178 DIGPlay lt l wee r WINDOW TRALe lt L e 11 8CALe RPOSIELOM on page 178 e INPut ATTenuation on page 178 e INPut ATTenuation MODE on page 179 e INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 179 e INPut GAIN STATe on page 179 e INPut IMPedance on page 180 e SENSe CORRection TRANsducer lt 1l e L SENSe CORRection TRANsducer lt l e SENSe CORRection TRANSducer lt l e UNIT lt 1 2 gt POWer on page 181 2 gt STATe on page 180 predori TE SELect on page 180 UNIT on page 180 DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt
122. SYSTem SET LOCK lt arg0 gt This command adds write protection to a dataset Parameters lt arg0 gt String containing the path and name of the dataset Example SYSTISEL LOCK Dataset00l set Protects the file Dataset001 set from overwriting SYSTem SET UNLock lt arg0 gt This command removes write protection from a dataset Parameters lt arg0 gt String containing the path and name of the dataset Example SYST SET UNL Dataset001 set Removes write protection from the file Dataset001 set Making and Storing Screenshots The following commands manage screenshots These commands are independent from the operating mode List of commands e DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow STORe on page 222 e HCOPy DEVice LANGuage on page 222 e HCOPy IMMediate on page 222 Remote Control Commands e MMEMory NAME on page 223 DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow STORe lt TargetFile gt This command makes a screenshot of the current display contens in png or jpg format and stores it on the R amp S Spectrum Rider internal memory You can select a file name for the screenshot in png format with MMEMory NAME on page 223 and select the file format of the screenshot with HCOPy DEVice LANGuage on page 222 This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at DISPlay is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt TargetFile gt Example HCOP DEV LANG PNG MMEM NAME Public Screen Shots
123. Si se produce contacto lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un m dico En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados las celdas o bater as que contienen electrolitos alcalinos p ej las celdas de litio pueden explotar Para garantizar la seguridad del producto las celdas o bater as solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde amp Schwarz correspondiente ver lista de recambios Las bater as y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura dom stica Las bater as o acumuladores que contienen plomo mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales Respete en esta relaci n las normas nacionales de eliminaci n y reciclaje Transporte 1 El producto puede tener un peso elevado Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con precauci n y si es necesario usando un sistema de elevaci n adecuado p ej una carretilla elevadora a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros da os personales 1171 0000 42 08 Page 13 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por personas Por eso no esta permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeci n en o sobre medios de transporte como p ej gruas carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc Es responsabilidad suya fijar los productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevacion Para evitar danos personales o danos en el producto siga las instruccion
124. TATe lt State gt This command turns the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example SYST COMM SOCK DHCP ON Activates DHCP SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet PORT lt Port gt This command sets the port number for the connection Parameters lt Port gt Port number RST 5550 Example SYST COMM SOCK PORT 1000 Sets the port number to 1000 System Settings This chapter describes all commands that define or query general system settings List of commands e INPut IMPedance PAD on page 232 Remote Control Commande SENSe ROSCillator SOURce on page 232 e SYSTem ACCessory on page 233 e SYSTem ACCessory AUTO on page 233 e SYSTem BNC MODE on page 233 e SYSTem DATE on page 234 e SySTem ERRor NEXT on page 234 e SYSTem ERRor ALL on page 234 e SYsTem ERRor CODE NEXT on page 234 e SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL on page 234 e SYSTem ERRor COUNt on page 235 e SYSTem FORMat IDENt on page 235 e SYSTem HELP HEADers on page 235 e SySTem HELP SYNTax on page 235 e SYSTem LANGuage on page 236 e SYSTem LANGuage CATalog on page 236 e SYSTem POWer SOURce on page 236 e SYSTem POWer STATus on page 236 e SYSTem PRESet on page 236 e SySTem PRESet FACTory on page 237 e SYSTem PRESet MODE on page 237 e SYSTem PRESet USER on page 237 e SYSTem REBoot on page 237 e SYSTem SHUTdown on page 237 e SYSTem TZONee on page 238 e SYSTem VERSion on pag
125. Te on page 188 first The numeric suffix at CAL Culate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at MATH selects the number of the trace Parameters lt MathExpression gt lt list gt IMPLied memory Subtracts the trace in memory from the current trace memory IMPlied Subtracts the current trace from the trace in memory Example CALC MATH memory IMPlied Selects the subtraction of the current trace from trace in the memory CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MATH lt 1 2 gt COPY MEMory lt MemorySlot gt This command stores the selected trace into the memory trace of the R amp S Spectrum Rider This command is an event and therefore has no query and no RST value The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at MATH selects the number of the trace Parameters lt MemorySlot gt Example CALC MATH COPY MEM Usage Setting only Copies the trace into the memory CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MATH lt 1 2 gt STATe lt State gt This command turns trace mathematics on and off Remote Control Commands The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at MATH selects the number of the trace Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MATH STAT ON Switches on the trace mathematics DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 4 gt STATe lt State gt This command turns a trace on and off The numeric suf
126. The poll provides an informative error message This procedure is to be recommended since it con siderably reduces the problems involved with remote control QUEStionable status sum bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status which can be specified in greater detail by polling the QUEStionable status register 4 MAV bit message available The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the control ler ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register MSS bit master status summary bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE OPERation status register sum bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action The type of action can be determined by polling the OPERatio
127. This command selects a file containing a user defined preset state Parameters lt PathName gt Filename of the user defined preset state SYSTem REBoot This command initiates a reboot of the R amp S Spectrum Rider This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Example SYST REB Restarts the R amp S Spectrum Rider Usage Event SYSTem SHUTdown This command turns the R amp S Spectrum Rider off This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Example SYSTSSHUF Turns the R amp S Spectrum Rider off Usage Event 9 6 9 Remote Control Commands SYSTem TIME lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt This command sets the internal clock Parameters lt Hour gt Range O to 23 lt Minutes gt Range O to 59 lt Seconds gt Range O to 59 Example SYST TIME 12 30 30 SYSTem TZONee lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt This command defines a shift of the system time to select another time zone Parameters lt Hour gt Range O to 23 lt Minutes gt Range O to 59 RST 0 0 Example SYST TZON 01 00 Shifts the time an hour ahead SYSTem VERSion This command queries the SCPI version the remote control is based on This command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example SYST VERS Usage Query only Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the present operating state of the instrument and on errors which ha
128. Trace Mode The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides several trace modes The trace mode defines the way the R amp S Spectrum Rider writes the trace 1 2 Press the TRACE key Press the Trace Mode softkey to set the trace mode R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode 5 1 6 2 3 Select the trace mode you want to work with If you have selected the average trace mode Average 10 menu item the R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to set the number of sweeps the R amp S Spec trum Rider includes in the averaging Enter the number of sweeps to include in the averaging In continuous sweep mode the R amp S Spectrum Rider now calculates the moving average over the number of sweeps you have specified In single sweep mode it stops the measurement after finishing the sweeps and averages the traces The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides the following trace modes Clear Write In its default state the R amp S Spectrum Rider overwrites the trace after each sweep You can apply all detectors in this mode Average The trace is the result of the moving average over several sweeps The R amp S Spectrum Rider calculates the moving average of the power levels for each pixel over a particular number of sweeps in the range from 2 to 999 Averaging reduces the effects of noise but has no effects on sine signals Using the trace averaging therefore is a good way to detect signals in the vicinity of noise You can apply
129. UP key Press the User Preference softkey Select the Capture Dataset item and set it on If on the R amp S Spectrum Rider saves a dataset of the current measurement if an event occurs For more information on events see chapter 4 7 Saving Events on page 86 Renaming File Names If necessary you can rename files or file directories directly on the R amp S Spectrum Rider Press the SAVE RECALL key Press the File Manager softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens the file manager Mark the selected files or file directories in the File Manager dialog Press Edit softkey A list of Edit menu is displayed for selection Select Rename to rename the files or file directories The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to change the name of the file R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions Spectrum File Manager Free 13 37 MB Public Storage Card USB L u E Channel Tables ml Rename H gi Cut wi Copy m Delete O U UO O Edit Refresh 4 8 1 3 Quick Naming of Datasets The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides a quick naming feature that speeds up the process of naming a file Putting together a filename Using the quick naming feature is a way of compiling a filename by putting one or more predefined text modules or terms together in a logical way The various terms are combined in a table each cell of which contains one term The table consists of 120 cells You
130. Y SCALe ADJust This command automatically scales the vertical axis for optimum display results This command is an event and therefore has no query and no RST value The numeric suffix at DISPlay and TRACe is irrelevant for this command Remote Control Commands Example DISP TRAC Y ADJ Adjusts the y axis Usage Event DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SPACing lt Scaling Type gt This command selects the scaling type of the vertical axis The numeric suffix at DISPlay and TRACe is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt Scaling Type gt LINear LOGarithmic LiNear Selects a linear scale LOGarithmic Selects a logarithmic scale RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling of the level axis DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALe lt DisplayRange gt This command defines the display range of the vertical axis Note that you have to set a logarithmic scaling before you can use this command with DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SPACing on page 177 For a lin ear scale you cannot modify the display range as it is fixed The numeric suffix at DISPlay and TRACe is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt DisplayRange gt Range 1dB to 150 dB RST 100 dB Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Sets the display range to 110 dB DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt RefLevel
131. a date and time stamp In the Instrument Setup dialog box you can set both date and time 10 07 2015 16 38 46 00 00 Setting the date 1 In the Instrument Setup dialog box select the Set Date item 2 Enter the date you want with the numeric keys The sequence depends on the selected date format See Setting the date format on page 51 10 07 2015 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob Setting the time 1 Inthe Instrument Setup dialog box select the Set Time item 2 Enter the time you want with the numeric keys 16 38 46 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob After you have entered the time the R amp S Spectrum Rider verifies the validity of the time If it is not a valid time it sets the next valid time Selecting the time zone 1 In the Instrument Setup dialog box select the Time Zone item 2 Enter a positive or negative time offset relative to the system time with the numeric keys 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob AAA User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 50 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started After you have confirmed the time zone the R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the dis played time accordingly without changing the system time 3 2 7 3 Selecting Regional Settings The regional settings allow you to select a different language and date format English dd mm yyyy Selecting the language The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides several
132. ace Avg Average power of the signal displayed in the dia gram Trace Peak Maximum power of the signal displayed in the dia gram Minimum power of the signal displayed in the dia gram Positive Overshoot Height of the local maximum after a rising edge divided by the pulse amplitude The result is a per centage of the pulse amplitude Negative Overshoot Height of the local minimum after a rising edge divi ded by the pulse amplitude The result is a percent age of the pulse amplitude 8 1 Configuring the Numerical Result Display The functions available for the numerical result display are the same as those available for normal power sensor measurements For more information see chapter 6 1 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements on page 138 8 2 Configuring the Power vs Time Result Display The R amp S Spectrum Rider allows you to configure several aspects of the Power vs Time result display and the way the pulse is measured e Determining Pulse Characteristics 147 e Selecting the Video Bandwidth 148 A O E EE A 148 e Triggering MESAS MOS iii iia 149 e Selecting the Result Unit 149 e Scaling bev Axvie ins enesreneseeesneenes 150 USNO MIKO S ccoo nein 150 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Performing Pulse Power Measurements R amp S FPH K29 8 2 1 Determining Pulse Characteristics Selecting an algorithm for base and top power
133. ailable in power meter mode e Power Meter Measurements ss 265 e Frequency Paramelters uu00000000sunnnennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenn nnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnne 266 BI III EE 267 e Amplitude Parameters iii 267 e Sweep RE ue LE EE 268 Functions of the Power Meter e Limits Line Parameters unuucueaenenannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunn ann nn nenn nun nn an nn nun nn ann nenn nn nun 269 o Trace Harameteres non non rro nn nr rar nnnnrnnnnnnnnss 269 e Marker Harameters nono n rn nn nrnr rn nn rn nn nn nar nnnnrnnnnannnss 270 10 3 1 Power Meter Measurements The MEAS key opens a menu that contains the functionality to configure measure ments with the power meter Power Meter Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection CCS ES Unit dBm dB Rel p woo poo 1 If Freq Mode see Frequency Parameters is set to Channel the softkey will dis play Channel Channel Power Meter Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection EEE A A Pulse Power Measurement Table 10 1 Pulse power measurement with numeric mode Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Meas Mode Average Power vs Time Functions of the Power Meter re AAA Table 10 2 Pulse power measurement with trace mode Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Zero Integration ECN oo CEC CEC 10 3 2 Frequency Paramet
134. al that must pass before the R amp S Spectrum Rider saves another coordinate Parameters lt Seconds gt Time that must pass between one coordinate and the next RST 1s Example SYST SOEV ON Turns on saving coordinates on an event SYST SOEV REC STOR USB Selects an USB device as the storage device EH e SOUR TIM SYSTZSOEVETIMEIINT 5 Saves the coordinates every 5 seconds Remote Control Commande SYSTem SOEVent STATe lt State gt This command turns saving of your current coordinates in case of certain events on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example See SYSTem SOEVent DISTance INTerval on page 225 9 6 8 Configuring the Instrument The following commands configure general instrument settings These commands are independent from the operating mode Contents e chapter 9 6 8 1 Mode Selection on page 227 e chapter 9 6 8 2 Display Configuration on page 228 e chapter 9 6 8 3 Audio Settings on page 229 e chapter 9 6 8 4 Setting up a Network Connection on page 230 e chapter 9 6 8 5 System Settings on page 231 9 6 8 1 Mode Selection This chapter describes all commands that select the operating mode of the R amp S Spec trum Rider List of commands e 1NSTrument SELect on page 227 e 1NSTrument NSELect on page 228 EI INSTrument SELect lt OperatingMode gt This command selects the operating mode Parameters
135. all detectors in this mode Max Hold The trace shows the maximum power levels that have been measured at each pixel To overwrite a max hold trace change a parameter in a way that the results can not be compared any more e g the span Using the max hold trace mode is a good way to detect intermittent signals or the maximum values of fluctuating sig nals for example Using the max hold trace mode automatically activates the max peak detector Min Hold The trace shows the minimum power levels that have been measured at each pixel To overwrite a min hold trace change a parameter in a way that the results can not be compared any more e g the span Using the min hold trace mode is a good way to highlight signals within noise or suppress intermittent signals Using the min hold trace mode automatically activates the min peak detector View The view trace mode freezes the current trace and aborts the measurement Using the view trace mode is a good way to evaluate the trace for example with markers Selecting the Detector The number of measurement results collected in a single sweep usually is very high especially if the span is large However the display of the R amp S Spectrum Rider can display only 711 results in horizontal direction as it is limited by the number of pixels that are available on the display Therefore it has to combine measurement results to User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 115 R amp S Spectrum Rider
136. ameters lt GateTriggerLength gt RST 400 us Default unit s Example SWE GATE TIME 4ms Sets a sweep time of 4 ms for the gated trigger TRIGger SEQuence CLOCk FREQuency lt TriggerClock gt This command defines the clock rate of the internal trigger Parameters lt TriggerClock gt Clock rate that defines the trigger intervals RST 100 Hz Default unit GHz Example TRIG CLOC 100 Triggers a measurement every 100 ms TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt TriggerDelay gt This command defines the length of the trigger delay Parameters lt TriggerDelay gt Range Os to 100s ROT Os Default unit s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Sets the trigger delay to 500 us TRIGger SEQuence LEVel VIDeo lt VideoTrigLevel gt This command defines the level of the video trigger Video trigger is available for time domain measurements span 0 9 6 2 5 Remote Control Commands Parameters lt VideoTrigLevel gt Range OPCT to 100 PCT ROT 50 PCT Example TRIG L V VID SOPCT Sets the trigger level to 50 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt TriggerSlope gt This command selects the slope of the trigger signal The trigger slope applies to all trigger sources Parameters lt TriggerSlope gt POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG TRIGger SEQuence SOURce lt TriggerSource gt This command selects the trigger source Parameters lt TriggerSource gt IMMediate EXTernal VI
137. amp S Spectrum Rider to the control computer 2 Start the R amp S Instrument View software 3 Press the Remote Display button in the user interface The software opens the remote display to operate the R amp S Spectrum Rider remotely See chapter 3 2 8 Connecting the R amp S Spectrum Rider to a PC on page 56 AA User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 83 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions 4 4 Presetting the R amp S Spectrum Rider Before you prepare a measurement it is recommended to preset the R amp S Spectrum Rider During a preset the R amp S Spectrum Rider resets all settings to their default state Restoring the default configuration has the advantage that old settings do not affect measurements The default setup is specific to the operating mode gt Press the PRESET key The R amp S Spectrum Rider restores its default setup You can also define your own default settings via a dataset These are then loaded after pressing the PRESET key instead of the factory default 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the User Preference softkey 3 Inthe User Preferences dialog box select the Preset Dataset item The R amp S Spectrum Rider displays the File Manager dialog box to select the data set that contains the settings you would like to have as the preset settings Spectrum File Manager Free 13 37 MB Public Storage Card USB L 1 E Channel Tables H Bf Datasets O Limit Line
138. and examples Not all commands used in the following examples are implemented in the instrument Structure ofa Commmand o iii 158 CR EE 163 e Structure of a Program Message 165 e Responses to COuertes sise iireerrereesreeneereennenns 166 Structure of aCommand The commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more parame ters Header and parameter are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several key words Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the header 6 Common GI Socrates 158 e Device Specific Commande 159 e Overview of Syntax Elements 162 Common Commands Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk and one or sev eral parameters if any 9 4 1 2 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Table 9 1 Examples RST RESET Resets the device ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE Sets the bits of the EVENT STA TUS ENABLE register EVENT STATUS QUERY Queries the contents of the EVENT STATUS register Device Specific Commands E en eren NENNE EEE NEN a en oe eee ee eee ene HN EEE eee one eee eee 159 NUS e EE 160 Optional ye enter 160 Long and Short e EE 160 e ee ee ec ea ee ee 161 RN te EE 161 NEE SUR NOR eebe 162 Hierarchy Device specific commands are of hierarchical structure The different levels are repre sented by combined headers Headers of the highest level root
139. ansferred to another R amp S Spectrum Rider Managing Options with R amp S License Manager If you are using the R amp S Spectrum Rider in a local area network LAN you can man age the firmware options with a web browser e g Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox For more information on connecting the R amp S Spectrum Rider to a LAN see chap ter 3 2 8 1 LAN Connection on page 57 After you have connected the R amp S Spectrum Rider open your web browser R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started 1 Enter the IP address of the R amp S Spectrum Rider in the address bar of the web browser htp 1172 76 68 24 Elements 112 The browser will access the R amp S License Manager In this part of the R amp S License Manager you can install and activate licenses on the R amp S Spectrum Rider This page features three areas e The first area shows the details of the connected device including the device ID and the IP address Connected Device FPH Device ID 1321 1111 K02 900188 nK FPH IP Address 10 113 10 184 Yersion 1 00 Host Name localhost e The second area provides functionality to install and activate licenses What do you want to do e Install Registered License Keys and Activate Licenses e Register Licenses Install License Keys and Activate Licenses GG Reboot Device Install Registered License Keys and Activate Licenses Follow this link if you have purchased a registered licens
140. ansition on page 250 e STATus OPERation PTRansition on page 250 e STATus QUEStionable EVENt on page 250 e STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt on page 250 e STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVENt on page 250 e STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt on page 250 e STATus QUEStionable CONDition on page 251 e STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition on page 251 e STATus QUEStionable LIMit CONDition on page 251 e STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition on page 251 e STATus QUEStionable ENABle on page 251 e STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle on page 251 e STATus QUEStionable LIMit ENABle on page 252 e STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle on page 252 e STATus QUEStionable NTRansition on page 252 e STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition on page 252 e STATus QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition on page 253 e STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition on page 253 e STATus QUEStionable PTRansition on page 253 e STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition on page 253 e STATus QUEStionable LIMit PTRansition on page 253 e STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition on page 254 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands STATus PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from O to 1 are detec ted All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to O in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle part of the STATus OPERation and ST
141. arameters lt RefLvlPosition gt Defines the reference position in Range O to 10 ROT 10 Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 5 Sets the reference position to the 5th grid line INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the input attenuation The attenuation is coupled to the reference level If you set the attenuation independ ently the R amp S Spectrum Rider turns off this coupling The R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the reference level if it cannot be set for the current RF attenuation Remote Control Commande Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range OdB to 40 dB RSE O dB AUTO is ON Default unit dB Example INP ATT 30dB Defines an attenuation of 30 dB and deactivates coupling to the reference level INPut ATTenuation MODE lt AttenMode gt This command selects the attenuation mode Parameters lt AttenMode gt LDIStortion LNOise LDIStortion Selects Auto Low Distortion mode LNOise Selects Auto Low Noise mode RST LDIS Example INP ATT MODE LNO Sets the attenuation mode to Auto Low Noise INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples and decouples input attenuation to the reference level Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST
142. as de corriente los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto podr a causar fuego o choques el ctricos En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensi n Uer gt 30 V se deber n tomar las medidas apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro p ej medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n corte protector aislamiento etc Para la conexi n con dispositivos inform ticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial debe comprobarse que stos cumplan los est ndares IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 o IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 v lidos en cada caso A menos que est permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto est en servicio Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar lesiones fuego o da os en el producto Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo se deber primero conectar el conductor de protecci n fijo con el conductor de protecci n del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexi n La instalaci n y la conexi n deber n ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no est n provistos de fusibles interruptor autom tico ni otros mecanismos de seguridad similares el circuito de alimentaci n debe estar protegido de modo que todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto as como el producto mismo est n a salvo de posibles da os Todo producto debe estar protegido co
143. at all or to the extent necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the mains supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 2 Inthe case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor 3 Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are implemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use 4 If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the mains or if the power switch is not suitable for this purpose use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the mains In such cases always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times For example if the power plug is the disconnecting device the length of the connecting cable must not exceed 3 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply network If products without power switches are integrated into racks or sys
144. ath You must fully observe the following instructions in order to avoid serious personal injury or even death due to an explosion and or fire 1 Do not dismantle open or crush the batteries or drop them from a great height If mechanical damage occurs there is a risk that chemicals may be released Gases that are released can cause breathing difficulties Immediately ventilate the area and in serious cases consult a doctor Irritation can occur if the chemicals that are released come in contact with the skin or eyes If this happens immediately and thoroughly rinse the skin or eyes with water and consult a doctor 2 Do not expose cells or batteries to heat or fire Do not store them in direct sunlight lf overheating occurs there is the risk of an explosion or a fire which can lead to serious personal injuries 3 Keep the batteries clean and dry If the terminals become soiled clean them with a dry clean cloth 4 Charge the batteries prior to using them Only use the appropriate Rohde amp Schwarz charger to charge the batteries See the device manual or data sheet for the exact designation of the charger If the batteries are improperly charged there is a risk of explosion which can cause serious personal injury 5 The charging temperature must be between 0 C and 45 C See manual for information on possible restrictions 6 Discharging may take place only at temperatures between 0 C and 50 C See manual
145. atterie Pour le nettoyage des appareils utiliser un chiffon doux non pelucheux N utiliser en aucun cas de produit de nettoyage chimique tel que de l alcool de l ac tone ou un diluant nitrocellulosique Fonctionnement 1 L utilisation du produit exige une formation sp cifique ainsi qu une grande concentration II est imperatif que les personnes qui utilisent le produit present les aptitudes physiques mentales et psychiques requises vu qu autrement des dommages corporels ou mat riels ne peuvent pas tre exclus Le choix du personnel qualifi pour l utilisation du produit est sous la responsabilit de lemployeur l exploitant Avant de d placer ou de transporter le produit lire et respecter la section Transport Comme pour tous les biens produits de fa on industrielle l utilisation de mat riaux pouvant causer des allergies allerg nes comme par exemple le nickel ne peut tre totalement exclue Si lors de l utilisation de produits Rohde amp Schwarz des r actions allergiques surviennent telles qu ruption cutan e ternuements fr quents rougeur de la conjonctive ou difficult s respiratoires il faut imm diatement consulter un m decin pour en clarifier la cause et viter toute atteinte la sant Avant le traitement m canique et ou thermique ou le d montage du produit il faut imp rativement observer la section limination des d chets point 1 1171 0000 43 08 Page 5 Consignes de securi
146. avec la peau ou les yeux S il ya contact rincer abondamment l eau l endroit concern et consulter un m decin Il y a danger d explosion en cas de remplacement ou chargement incorrect des cellules ou batteries qui contiennent des lectrolytes alcalins par exemple cellules de lithium Remplacer les cellules ou batteries uniquement par le type Rohde amp Schwarz correspondant voir la liste des pi ces de rechange pour maintenir la s curit du produit Il faut recycler les cellules ou batteries et il est interdit de les liminer comme d chets normaux Les accumulateurs ou batteries qui contiennent du plomb du mercure ou du cadmium sont des d chets sp ciaux Observer les r gles nationales d limination et de recyclage Transport 1 Le produit peut avoir un poids lev Il faut donc le d placer ou le transporter avec pr caution et en utilisant le cas ch ant un moyen de levage appropri par exemple chariot l vateur pour viter des dommages au dos ou des blessures Les poign es des produits sont une aide de manipulation exclusivement r serv e au transport du produit par des personnes Il est donc proscrit d utiliser ces poign es pour attacher le produit ou sur des moyens de transport tels que grues chariots et chariots l vateurs etc Vous tes responsable de la fixation s re des produits ou sur des moyens de transport et de levage appropri s Observer les consignes de s curit du fabricant des m
147. avertissements normalis s d apres leur cat gorie laser En raison des caract ristiques de leur rayonnement ainsi que de leur puissance lectromagn tique extr mement concentr e les lasers peuvent causer des dommages biologiques Pour plus d informations voir le chapitre Fonctionnement point 7 1171 0000 43 08 MARCHE ARRET tension d alimentation Indicateur de veille Courant continu CC Courant alternatif CA Courant continu alternatif CC CA L appareil est conforme aux exigences de s curit du degr de protection II appareil entierement prot g par isolation double renforcee Marquage UE pour batteries et accumulateurs L appareil contient une batterie ou un accumulateur Ces pieces ne peuvent pas tre limin es avec les d chets urbains non tri s mais doivent faire l objet d une collecte s par e Pour plus d informations voir la page 7 Marquage UE pour la collecte s par e d quipements lectriques et lectroniques Les d chets d quipements lectriques et lectroniques ne peuvent pas tre limin s avec les d chets urbains non tri s mais doivent faire l objet d une collecte s par e Pour plus d informations voir la page 7 Page 2 Consignes de securite fondamentales Mots d alerte et significations Les mots d alerte suivants sont utilises dans la documentation produit pour avertir des risques et dangers A DANGER Indique une
148. c Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The man tissa may comprise up to 255 characters the exponent must lie inside the value range 32000 to 32000 The exponent is introduced by an E or e Entry of the exponent alone is not permissible In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Permissible unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also possible K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENSe FREQuency STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQuency STOP 1 5E9 Special Numeric Values The texts MINimum MAXimum DEFault UP and DOWN are interpreted as special numeric values In case of a query the numeric value is returned 9 4 2 3 9 4 2 4 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax e MIN MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value e DEF DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM This value conforms to the default setting as it is called by the RST command e UP DOWN UP DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step The step width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP DOWN e INF NINF INFinity Negative INFinity NINF Negative INFinity NINF represent the numerical values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF
149. c suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Parameters lt Threshold gt Numeric value whose unit depends on the unit you have cur rently selected for the vertical axis Default unit dBm Example CALC LIM LOW THR 10DBM Defines a threshold of 10 dBm CALCulate lt 1 2 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt STATe lt State gt This command turns a limit check on and off You can query the result of the limit check with CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt FAIL on page 208 The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Remote Control Commands Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM STAT ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 1 CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt UNIT X This command queries the horizontal unit of a limit line This command is a query and therefore has no RST value The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Example CALC LIM UNIT X Queries the x unit of the first limit line Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt UNIT Y This command queries the vertical unit of a limit line This command is a query and therefore has no RST value The numeric suffix at CAL Culate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Example CALC LIM1 UNIT Queries the y unit
150. can define the contents of each cell freely User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 93 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions amp Spectrum Save Recall gt Save Dataset gt Quick Naming Location Site RL Sector ISOL DL 450 POW GSM 700 SPECTR UMTS 850 ACLR CDMA2000 900 EVDO 1800 LTE 1900 EXAMPLE TD SCDMA 2100 EXAMPLE D EXAMPLE 2400 EXAMPLE CLS Site LTE UL_ACLR Underline us Space Import Export Change Item Auto Insert Press the SAVE RECALL key Press the Save Dataset softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens the Save Dataset dialog box Press the Quick Naming softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens the Quick Naming table that contains the terms Select the term you want to add to the filename entry box Press the rotary knob to confirm the addition of term to the filename The current filename is displayed in the line below the table So if you perform for example an ACLR measurement of an uplink LTE signal at a certain location you might want that information in the filename Site LTE UL ACLR Press OK softkey to exit the quick naming table After you have exited the table the file name appears in the Save as filed in the Save Dataset dialog box If necessary you can then add additional characters Note that by default the R amp S Spectrum Rider adds a term without separators between each term If you need a separator between the term you can add a b
151. channel Selecting a channel Entering a center start or stop frequency is not possible anymore Instead you select a channel The R amp S Spectrum Rider then adjusts the center start and stop frequency according to the channel table 1 Press the FREQ key 2 Press the Center Frequency softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to select the channel 3 Enter the channel you want to perform measurements on The R amp S Spectrum Rider changes the channel according to the channel table Channel numbers are assigned to frequencies as follows e The first channel is assigned a channel number and a frequency e All subsequent channels have ascending numbers User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 131 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode e The frequency spacing between channels is fixed It can also be negative i e the center frequency of the R amp S Spectrum Rider decreases with ascending channel number e In transmission systems containing gaps in the frequency range as in the case of television for example a channel table can comprise multiple ranges 9 3 Using Transducer Factors The frequency dependent transducer factor of transducers and antennas can be directly considered in the measurement result A transducer factor consists of a numeric value and a unit The R amp S Spectrum Rider corrects the level values of the trace by the values of the transducer At the same time the unit of the transduc
152. cluding firm ware version and system error messages LINES Configures display lines and limit lines SAVE RECALL Provides a file manager function to facilitate the saving and recalling of result and instrument settings 3 2 5 5 Function Keys MODE Provides the selection between applications Function keys provide access to the most common measurement settings and func tions in the instrument MARKER A detailed description of the corresponding functions is provided in the R amp S Spectrum Rider user manual FREQ Sets the center frequency frequency step size frequency offset as well as the start and stop frequencies for the frequency range under consideration SPAN Sets the frequency span to be analyzed AMPT Sets the reference level the displayed dynamic range the RF attenuation and the unit for the level display Sets the level offset and the input impedance Activates the preamplifier R amp S FPH B22 order number 1321 0680 02 Set transducer tables to compensate primary and secondary RF path losses WIZARD Performs a sequence of standardized and recurring measure ments This function will be available in firmware V1 20 and above Sets the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 43 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started SWEEP Sets the sweep time Sets the trigger mode trigger threshold and the trigger delay of the external trigger signal Selects con
153. composants sont travaill s m caniquement et ou thermiquement au del de l utilisation pr vue ils peuvent le cas ch ant lib rer des substances dangereuses poussi res contenant des m taux lourds comme par exemple du plomb du b ryllium ou du nickel Le d montage du produit ne doit donc tre effectu que par un personnel qualifi et sp cialement form Le d montage inad quat peut nuire a la sant Les regles nationales concernant l limination des d chets doivent tre observ es 4 Si lors de l utilisation du produit des substances dangereuses ou combustibles exigeant une limination sp ciale sont d gag es comme par exemple liquides de refroidissement ou huiles moteurs qui sont a changer r gulierement les consignes de s curit du fabricant de ces substances dangereuses ou combustibles ainsi que les regles sur l limination en vigueur au niveau regional doivent tre respect es Les consignes de s curit sp ciales correspondantes dans la documentation produit doivent galement tre respect es le cas ch ant L limination non conforme des substances dangereuses ou combustibles peut provoquer des atteintes a la sant et des dommages cologiques Pour plus d informations concernant la protection de l environnement voir la page d accueil de Rohde amp Schwarz 1171 0000 43 08 Page 8 Safety instructions Tor rechargeable lithium ion batteries A WARNING Risk of serious personal injury or even de
154. con posible consecuencia de muerte Seguridad el ctrica Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad el ctrica pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte 1 Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber comprobar siempre que la tensi n preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentaci n el ctrica Si es necesario modificar el ajuste de tensi n tambi n se deber n cambiar en caso dado los fusibles correspondientes del producto Los productos de la clase de protecci n con alimentaci n m vil y enchufe individual solamente podr n enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protecci n conectado Queda prohibida la interrupci n intencionada del conductor de protecci n tanto en la toma de corriente como en el mismo producto La interrupci n puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de que el producto sea fuente de choques el ctricos Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de enchufe deber garantizarse la realizaci n de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su estado t cnico de seguridad Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red o bien si el interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexi n de la red el enchufe del cable de conexi n se deber considerar como un dispositivo de de
155. ct the AM or FM demodulation scheme you require from the menu The R amp S Spectrum Rider starts to demodulate the signal Demodulating signals If you turn on the demodulator the R amp S Spectrum Rider automatically turns off the noise marker or the frequency counter Defining the demodulation time period 1 Press the MARKER key 2 Press the Marker Function softkey 3 Select the Time menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the demodulation time 4 Enter the demodulation time you need The range is from 100 ms to 500 s In time domain the R amp S Spectrum Rider demodulates continuously Le the demodulation time is not relevant Controlling the volume 1 Press the MARKER key 2 Press the Marker Function softkey 3 Select the Volume menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the demodulation volume 4 Enter the volume you are comfortable with User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 127 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode E The demodulation volume is a percentage 0 to 100 with 100 being full volume For more information on general volume control see chapter 3 2 7 5 Configuring the Audio Output on page 53 Mute function gt Press the speaker icon to mute J or unmute H the volume The speaker icon is located at the top right hand corner of the trace window It appears only when Marker Function is set to AM or FM demodulat
156. ctromagn tica aumentada Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias para la protecci n de las mujeres embarazadas Tambi n las personas con marcapasos pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiaci n electromagn tica El empresario operador tiene la obligaci n de evaluar y se alizar las reas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de exposici n a radiaciones Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias t xicas gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud Por eso en caso de incendio deben usarse medidas adecuadas como p ej m scaras antig s e indumentaria de protecci n Los productos con l ser est n provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en funci n de la clase de l ser del que se trate Los rayos l ser pueden provocar da os de tipo biol gico a causa de las propiedades de su radiaci n y debido a su concentraci n extrema de potencia electromagn tica En caso de que un producto Rohde amp Schwarz contenga un producto l ser p ej un lector de CD DVD no debe usarse ninguna otra configuraci n o funci n aparte de las descritas en la documentaci n del producto a fin de evitar lesiones p ej debidas a irradiaci n l ser Clases de compatibilidad electromagn tica conforme a EN 55011 CISPR 11 y en analog a con EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Aparato de clase A Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los re
157. d this can result in electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed 1 Unless otherwise specified the following requirements apply to Rohde amp Schwarz products predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X use only indoors max operating altitude 2000 m above sea level max transport altitude 4500 m above sea level A tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and 5 to the nominal frequency overvoltage category 2 pollution degree 2 2 Donot place the product on surfaces vehicles cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves An installation that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or even death 3 Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in the data sheet Product overheating can cause electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or even death Electrical safety If the information on electrical safety is not observed either
158. de seguridad elementales Funcionamiento 1 El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentracion durante el manejo Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes f sicas ps quicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se pueden excluir lesiones o da os de objetos El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto lea y tenga en cuenta el cap tulo Transporte Como con todo producto de fabricaci n industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados los llamados alergenos p ej el n quel Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde amp Schwarz se producen reacciones al rgicas como p ej irritaciones cut neas estornudos continuos enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias debe avisarse inmediatamente a un m dico para investigar las causas y evitar cualquier molestia o da o a la salud Antes de la manipulaci n mec nica y o t rmica o el desmontaje del producto debe tenerse en cuenta imprescindiblemente el cap tulo Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 Ciertos productos como p ej las instalaciones de radiocomunicaci n RF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n ele
159. der zugeh rigen Produktdokumentation innerhalb seiner Leistungsgrenzen verwendet wird siehe Datenblatt Dokumentation nachfolgende Sicherheitshinweise Die Benutzung des Produkts erfordert Fachkenntnisse und zum Teil englische Sprachkenntnisse Es ist daher zu beachten dass das Produkt ausschlie lich von Fachkr ften oder sorgf ltig eingewiesenen Personen mit entsprechenden F higkeiten bedient werden darf Sollte f r die Verwendung von Rohde amp Schwarz Produkten pers nliche Schutzausr stung erforderlich sein wird in der Produktdokumentation an entsprechender Stelle darauf hingewiesen Bewahren Sie die grundlegenden Sicherheitshinweise und die Produktdokumentation gut auf und geben Sie diese an weitere Benutzer des Produkts weiter Die Einhaltung der Sicherheitshinweise dient dazu Verletzungen oder Sch den durch Gefahren aller Art auszuschlie en Hierzu ist es erforderlich dass die nachstehenden Sicherheitshinweise vor der Benutzung des Produkts sorgf ltig gelesen und verstanden sowie bei der Benutzung des Produkts beachtet werden S mtliche weitere Sicherheitshinweise wie z B zum Personenschutz die an entsprechender Stelle der Produktdokumentation stehen sind ebenfalls unbedingt zu beachten In den vorliegenden Sicherheitshinweisen sind s mtliche von der Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe vertriebenen Waren unter dem Begriff Produkt zusammengefasst hierzu z hlen u a Ger te Anlagen sowie s mtliches Zubeh r 1171 0000 41
160. detecto 225 SYS Ten Ss OE Ven SORTE ee EE 226 S1o Tem SOEVent TIME AIT Civ al las ae u 226 Solemn AA A ee ee 227 SE LEN EMMEN ae E 238 Saro Ten Ee ee ee ee 238 Sl A o E en A 238 TRACE ER RE E 191 TRIGger SEQuence CLOCK FREQUENCY oi a a tetuinetectiimenette 186 TRiGder SEQuUence HOLDOR TIME E 186 TRIGuer SEQueneer EVER VID ee en 186 TRiGgerl SEQUCGHCE SLOP CS na a 187 TRIGger ot OS ET 187 UNIT 1 22 gt PMET FOWE eie aaa 213 UNITE 2 E 181 Index A A E 21 ACCES SOS a a ne ee ee oo 19 Accessory detection KEREN 49 Alphanumeric Keys 81 AM demodulator een 127 PRIN US E 104 Attenuation eege 62 106 Audio demodulation Mite UNCON eeben 128 A 06 127 o A ee Din it 127 Audio demodulator E 127 Audio Se e EE 53 Auto low distortion WEE 62 EENS 62 Auto low noise distortion o ccccooccccccoonconoconccnnononcnonnns 106 EE een ee ee 115 a o Ue aitu 139 Average trace nec eme Granada 114 B e mn ae ie 52 Bandwidth RESOIBUON enee Ae AER 108 ED 110 Battery INSEIHON nme EREECHEN 19 Battery low level EE 54 Battery maintenance aan nenn 24 Battery operation Battery car adapter ana 22 Battery ee e RE ER Battery external Charger A ER Battery replacement A 22 Se E 130 BNG DOME en ee 31 EEGEN 49 C Center frequency ooccccccoccnccccoccnnnoncnnncnonnnnnononnnncnnnons 101 138 CF step SIZ PSE TT TROIE NNEIERENEREEIEBEUBER 101 Channel A 131 Clear write eege 113 Clear status RO a PEA 169 Command seq
161. display mode absolute or relative To stabilize the noise power display the R amp S Spectrum Rider uses the pixel the marker is on and four pixels to the right and four pixels to the left of the marker pixel Noise power density can provide useful information when you are measuring noise or digitally modulated signals However you will get valid results only if the spectrum in the vicinity of the marker has a flat frequency response When measuring the noise power density on discrete signals results are not valid Spectrum 500 MHz 24 7 2015 15 46 40 dBm 0dB OFF 3 MHz 3 MHz 100 0 50 ms ple Center 500 MHz Trace Avg Detect Sample Trig Rise span 100 MHz New Marker Delete Marker Select Marker Marker Function Set Marker 1 Press the MARKER key 2 Press the Marker Function key 3 Enable the Noise checkbox menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the level at the marker frequency in dBm Hz If you are using a delta marker for the measurement the results have the unit dBc Hz with marker 1 being the reference Sa ae User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 124 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode E Measuring the Frequency The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides a frequency counter The frequency counter accu rately measures the frequency at the marker position When calculating the horizontal position of the marker the R amp S Spectrum Rider includes the current span center frequency and the f
162. dout The R amp S Spectrum Rider can display measured power in relative units dBm or in absolute units W mW uW nW and pW It is also possible to set a reference level in dB 1 Press the Unit softkey A submenu to select the unit opens 2 Select the unit you want The R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the result display accordingly Setting the reference level If you have selected the unit dB Rel the R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to set the reference level The R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the currently set reference level in the diagram header 1 Enter the reference level you want Alternatively you can set the current level readout as the reference level 2 Press the Reference softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider sets the current result as the reference level It then displays the measured level relative to the reference level in dB The unit is automatically set to dB Rel Setting the averaging time The averaging time determines the length of the measurement The longer the averag ing time the more stable the display particularly if signals have low power or are noisy The averaging time is either Short Normal or Long e A short measurement time provides stable and accurate results for stationary sine signals with high levels gt 40 dBm It is also appropriate for measurements that require a high repetition rate e Anormal measurement time increases the stability of results for signals
163. dth Parameters lt ResolutionBW gt Range 1 Hz to 3 MHz RST AUTO is set to ON Default unit GHz Example BAND 100 kHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO lt State gt This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span Remote Control Commande Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example BAND AUTO OFF Decouples the resolution bandwidth from the span SENSe BWIDth VIDeo lt VideoBW gt This command defines the video bandwidth Parameters lt VideoBW gt Range 1 Hz to 3 MHz RST AUTO is set to ON Default unit GHz Example BAND VID 10kHz Sets the video bandwidth to 10 kHz SENSe BWIDth VIDeo AUTO lt State gt This command couples and decouples the video bandwidth to the resolution band width Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example BAND VID AUTO OFF Turns off video bandwidth coupling 9 6 2 4 Performing and Triggering Measurements The following commands control the actual measurement process including trigger functionality Performing the Measurement The following commands initialize a measurement and set up the sweep List of commands e WAI on page 171 e ABORt on page 183 e INITiate IMMediate on page 183 e INITiate CONTinuous on page 183 e SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 184 e SENSe SWEep POINts on page 184 e SENSe SWEep TI
164. e When a trigger event occurs the R amp S Spectrum Rider takes the delay time into account when drawing the trace Selecting the Result Unit In the pulse measurement application the R amp S R amp S Spectrum Rider can display mea sured power in relative units dBm or in absolute units W 1 Press the AMPT key User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 149 Configuring the Power vs Time Result Display 2 Press the Unit softkey 3 Select the unit you prefer The R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the y axis accordingly 8 2 6 Scaling the Y Axis The functionality to scale the y axis is similar to that of the Spectrum application For more information see chapter 5 1 3 2 Setting a Display Range on page 105 8 2 7 Using Markers The Power vs Time diagram supports markers The functionality is similar to that of the Spectrum application For more information see chapter 5 1 7 Using Markers on page 119 note that marker functions are not available in the Power Meter mode Interfaces and Protocols 9 Remote Commands 9 1 The commands required to perform measurements in the Spectrum application in a remote environment are described here Interfaces and PC anne 151 e Setting Up the Remote Control Conpnechon nennen 154 e Instrument Model and Command Processing 155 eo SCPI Command Structure and SYNIax unn en 158 e Command Sequence and Command Gvnchrontzaton 220 167 e Remote Control COMIMAMAS ccoo e
165. e Registered licenses only work in combination with a specific device ID Register Licenses Install License Keys and Activate Licenses Follow this link if you have purchased an unregistered license Unregis tered licenses are not connected to a specific device ID Reboot Device Follow this link to reboot the R amp S Spectrum Rider q Opens a detailed online help to the corresponding topic e The third area provides hints on using the license manager when you move the mouse over one of the options Help Reboot Device Many devices need to be rebooted before newly installed license keys can activate the licenses on these devices Use Reboot Device to allow the R amp S License Manager to remotely reboot a device which is accessible via Ll You will be requested to select the Device ID of the applicable device If you already have one or more R amp S Spectrum Rider equipped with options you can manage the licenses of these options on the license manager web page 2 Select the button The browser will access another part of the R amp S License Manager In this part of the license manager you can manage licenses already installed on your R amp S Spectrum Rider This page features two areas User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 47 Instrument Tour e The first area provides functionality to manage licenses already installed on a device What do you want to do Register Licenses e Unregister License
166. e You can select any marker in the Measurement Result View for further marker function using the marker softkey menu You can also use rotary knob to select any of the marker displayed in the Measurement Result View Special touchscreen gesture Alternatively double tap on the touch screen to position the marker on the trace win dow The first marker that is positioned on the trace window is the main marker the following markers added on the trace window are the delta markers See chapter 4 2 4 Add Marker on page 79 5 1 7 3 Positioning a Delta Marker When a normal marker is already in use you can add delta markers 1 Press the MARKER key The marker menu opens Press the New Marker softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider activates a delta marker and positions it on the next max imum level that has been measured In addition the delta marker input field opens The R amp S Spectrum Rider adds the delta marker to the marker list and shows the marker position relative to the normal marker M1 You can perform the following actions e Enter a delta marker position with the number keys and confirm the entry with one of the unit keys e Change the delta marker position with the rotary knob Confirm the delta marker position by pressing the rotary knob The delta marker input field closes To add more markers press the New Marker softkey several times until you have the number of markers you want in the display Special
167. e 167 Interfaces and Protocols The R amp S Spectrum Rider supports two different interfaces for remote control e LAWN Interface The protocol is based on TCP IP and supports the VXI 11 standard e USB Interface The connectors are located at the side of the instrument and permit a connection to a controller for remote control via a local area network LAN or directly via USB SCPI SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands messages are used for remote control Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard fol low the SCPI syntax rules The instrument supports the SCPI version 1999 The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standardization of device specific commands error handling and the status registers The tutorial Automatic Measurement Control A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488 2 from John M Pieper R amp S order number 0002 3536 00 offers detailed information on concepts and definitions of SCPI The requirements that the SCPI standard places on command syntax error handling and configuration of the status registers are explained in detail in the following sec tions Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers VISA VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments The I O channel LAN or
168. e 238 INPut IMPedance PAD lt PadType gt This command selects the matching pad connected to the R amp S Spectrum Rider Parameters lt PadType gt RAM RAZ HZTE Example INPut IMP 75 PAD RAZ Selects 75 Q input impedance and the R amp S RAZ as the match ing pad SENSe JROSCillator SOURce lt Format gt This command selects the source of the frequency reference oscillator If you use an external reference signal make sure to connect the signal to the Ext Ref BNC connector of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Remote Control Commande Parameters lt Format gt INTernal EXTernal INTernal Internal reference EXTernal External reference Example ROSC SOUR EXT Activates external source as reference signal SYSTem ACCessory lt Accessory gt This command queries the type of measurement accessory if one is connected to the R amp S Spectrum Rider for example a power sensor Parameters lt Accessory gt Z1 Z2 Z3 Z18 TS_emf NONE UNKNown Name of the accessory Example SYST ACC Queries connected measurement accessories SYSTem ACCessory AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic detection of connected measurement accessories on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF Example SYST ACC AUTO ON Turns on automatic accessory detection SYSTem BNC MODE lt BNCUsage gt This command configures the BNC sockets Parameters lt BNCUsage gt REFerence TRIGger BIA
169. e R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the second trace The second trace is in a differ ent color To show that the second trace is active the R amp S Spectrum Rider dis played the current active trace Trace 1 or Trace 2 on the Parameter View Min User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 117 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode 5 1 6 4 After you have activated the second trace the trace will becomes the active one All actions like changing the detector or trace mathematics apply to the active trace 4 Press the Select Trace softkey Trace 1 becomes the active trace Spectrum 2 12 11 2016 WE D I 63 dBm 0dB OFF 3 MHz 300 kHz 102 ms o GH a start 738 478846 MHz Trace Mm Detect Min Peak Trig Free Stop 861 316244 MHz Trace Mode Detector Show Trace Memory Select Trace Trace Math You can put both traces into the internal memory of the R amp S Spectrum Rider and restore them later Note that the memory trace 1 and memory trace 2 have the same color i e white Working with Memory Traces You can save the image of both traces to the memory of the R amp S Spectrum Rider and later restore it and compare it to a live trace The memory trace is always colored white to distinguish it from the live trace Measurement settings Because the memory trace is just a bitmap any modifications to measurement settings like span or reference level are nor reflected in the memory trace When you sav
170. e a data set the R amp S Spectrum Rider also stores the associated trace in the trace memory If you restore it at a later time you can display the memory trace as if it is anormal memory trace 1 Press the TRACE key 2 Select the trace you want to store in the trace memory with the Select Trace soft key AAA User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 118 5 1 6 5 MARKER Common Measurement Settings 3 Press the TracerMemory softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider saves the active trace 4 Press the Show softkey 5 Select the Enable Memory 1 menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the corresponding memory trace If active it labels the Memory lt x gt menu item with an active radio button Using Trace Mathematics Trace mathematics subtract the memory trace from the live trace and vice versa and then display the results 1 Press the TRACE key Press the Trace gt Memory softkey Press the Show softkey Press the Trace Math softkey Select the Trace Memory or Memory Trace menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider calculates and shows the resulting trace N oe Set m To turn off trace mathematics select the Off menu item Using Markers The spectrum analyzer mode provides marker and deltamarker functionality In addi tion you can use several marker functions e Using Markers and Ueliamarkers A 119 E Ge E tele Mr e E EE 120 e Positioning a Delta Marker
171. e network environment it can be changed Refer chapter 3 2 8 Connecting the R amp S Spectrum Rider to a PC on page 56 for instructions on how to change the IP address Instrument Model and Command Processing The block diagram in figure 9 4 shows how SCPI commands are serviced in the instru ment The individual components work independently and simultaneously They com municate with each other by means of so called messages 9 3 1 9 3 2 Instrument Model and Command Processing USB interface Ethernet Input unit with input buffer Command recognition Instrument settings database Status reporting Instrument sysiem hardware USB interface Ethernet Output unit with u output buffer Fig 9 4 Instrument model in the case of remote control A a E 156 e Command Hecogniton NEEN 156 e Data Base and Instrument Hardware 157 e Status Reporting SYSIS issue Eegen 157 XA unsueapduinsaccettidanaessntuwbneranogiapienceiaeensndecorsueed 157 Input Unit The input unit receives commands character by character from the controller and col lects them in the input buffer The input unit sends a message to the command recog nition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter lt PRO GRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR gt as defined in IEEE 488 2 or the interface mes sage DCL If the input buffer is full the traffic is stopped and the data received up to then are pro cessed S
172. e resolu tion bandwidth The R amp S Spectrum Rider has resolution bandwidths from 1 Hz to 3 MHz The bandlimited IF is passed to the envelope detector The envelope detector removes the IF from the signal and outputs its envelope The output signal from the envelope detector is referred to as the video signal As it has been demodulated it only contains amplitude information The phase information is lost With RF sine signals the video signal is a DC voltage With AM signals the video sig nal contains a DC component whose amplitude corresponds to the carrier power and an AC component whose frequency is equal to the modulation frequency provided the modulation frequency is inside the resolution bandwidth Amplitude Amplitude TUN A Time IF signal AM d Envelope signal The video filter comes after the envelope detector The filter is a lowpass with an adjustable cutoff frequency which limits the bandwidth of the video signal It is particu How a Spectrum Analyzer Works larly useful when sine signals are to be measured in the vicinity of the spectrum ana lyzer s intrinsic noise The sine signal produces a video signal that is a DC voltage At the IF however the noise is distributed over the whole bandwidth or in the case of the video signal over half the bandwidth of the resolution filter By selecting a narrow video bandwidth relative to the resolution bandwidth the noise can be suppressed while the sine
173. e selecting a limit line you need to decide if you want to use it as an upper or lower limit line In case of upper limit lines the R amp S Spectrum Rider checks if the sig nal is above the limit line In case of lower limit lines the R amp S Spectrum Rider checks if the signal is below the limit line You also have to make sure that the limit line is compatible to the scale of the horizon tal axis 1 Press the LINES key 2 Depending on the application press the Upper Limit or Lower Limit softkey 3 Select the Load From File menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens the File Manager dialog to select the limit line A Select one of the available limit lines 5 Press the Load softkey User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 129 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode The R amp S Spectrum Rider activates the limit line In the diagram the limit line is dis played as a red line See figure 5 2 If you have already selected a limit line you can turn the limit line on and off with the Show Limit Lines softkey Alternatively you can define a threshold that works like a limit line A threshold is a simple horizontal limit line 1 Press the Upper Limit or Lower Limit softkey 2 Select the Set Threshold menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens a input field to define the threshold 3 Enter the threshold you need The R amp S Spectrum Rider displays the line and performs a limit check for that
174. eatures several indicators that the limit check has failed e A general message in the diagram header that indicates if the signal violates the limit line including the trace that violates the limit e An audio signal that sounds every time a limit is violated Ee User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 128 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Spectrum i M1 Frequency Count 9 7 2015 17 42 M1 1 192998752 GHz 393 067927 MHz D3 241 594937 MHz 4 676 791228 MHz A7 dem M5 1023362168 GHz 6 192 983063 MHz Upper Limit Threshold 67 dBm Trace 1 0dB Lower Limit Threshold 125 dBm Trace 1 574 ON EZ ot TT 3 MHz 107 4 3 MHz 117 4 127 4 497 4 RENTE 47 dm 20 ms Center 850 MHz ace1 Clear Detect Auto Peak Trig Free Span 821 772452 MHz 88 Ref Level Range RefPos Unit Ref Offset Att Amp Imp Transducer Fig 5 2 Upper and lower Limit Lines You can create and edit limit lines with the R amp S Instrument View software and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S Spectrum Rider The number of limit lines you can store in the memory depends on other datasets available on the R amp S Spectrum Rider or if you are using an external storage device e g memory stick For more information on limit lines see chapter 4 8 Managing Datasets on page 88 o Selecting a Limit E E 129 e Performing Limit Checks ss 130 5 1 8 1 Selecting a Limit Line Befor
175. ecimalValue gt This command control the Positive TRansition part of the QUEStionable register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 General Functions 10 Menu and Softkey Overview This chapter shows an overview of all instrument functions in the form of softkey and menu overview General FOO an na edie ae en nn 255 e Functions of the Spectrum Analvzer 259 e Functions of the Power Meter 264 10 1 General Functions e General R amp S Spectrum Rider Setup 255 o File ne CT een neigen 258 e Operating Mode Gelechon nenne nenne nenne nennen 259 10 1 1 General R amp S Spectrum Rider Setup The SETUP key opens the setup menu that contains functionality to set up the R amp S Spectrum Rider in general and functionality to set up the measurement Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Config Input RF Impe 50 75 Q RAM 75 Q RAZ 75 Q FSH Z38 Overview dance Power Sen sor Att Mode Manual Auto Low Distortion Auto Low Noise RF Attenua tion RF Preampli On Off fier Manual Span Full Span Zero Span Last Span Bandwidth RBW Manual 1 Hz 3 Hz 10 Hz 30 Hz 100Hz 300 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz 10 kHz 30 kHz 100 kHz 300 kHz 1 MHz 3 MHz Auto General Functions Softkey Menu or Dial
176. ectrum Rider lt can be used for instance to compensate for frequency dependent loss and gain at the input of the R amp S Spectrum Rider The units dBuV m and dBuA m convert the output power of an antenna into electric or magnetic field strength The unit W m2 is used to calculate and display the power flux density For example to compensate for the cable loss between the transducer and the RF input the R amp S Spectrum Rider can use two transducers at the same time One of them must have the unit dB however e it must correspond to one loss or gain value 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Press the Transducer softkey Transducer factor availability Transducer factors are not available for measurements with the Power Sensors The Transducer softkey is therefore inactive You can select two transducer factors a primary transducer and a secondary trans ducer If a transducer factor is active the checkbox next to the Primary or Secon dary menu will be enabled 1 Select the Select Primary menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens the File Manager to select the transducer factor 2 Select the transducer factor you need 3 Confirm the selection with the Load softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the name of the active transducer on the display e g Sec Tran PreAmp Pri Tran HE200A 20 200 See figure 5 3 An example would be the transducer factor of the R amp S HE200 A antenna that is defined between
177. ectrum Rider automatically repeats the sweep in the defined range of the hori zontal axis frequency or time and updates the trace accordingly after it has finished with one sweep In some cases it may be sufficient to get the results over a single sweep only e g if a particular trigger condition is met In single sweep mode the R amp S Spectrum Rider per forms the sweep a certain number of times depending on the number of averages you have set over the defined range of the horizontal axis frequency or time and then stops measuring It performs another sweep only after you tell it to For more informa tion on setting the number of sweeps included in a single sweep see chapter 5 1 6 1 Selecting the Trace Mode on page 114 1 Press the SWEEP key 2 Press the Single Sweep softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider activates single sweep mode 3 Press the Cont Sweep softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider again starts to measure continuously AAA User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 112 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode 5 1 5 3 Working with Trigger Functionality If you have to perform measurements according to certain signal conditions you can use a trigger A trigger responds to certain events If a trigger is active the R amp S Spec trum Rider starts to measure if the trigger conditions are met The trigger can be gener ated either externally or internally The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides the following tri
178. ee ee ee 220 MINE Mar NAME oct cea ee ee ee see 223 MMEMSNER DIREC ee oa 220 MIIENOTV STORE SR Aaa n Ee i a Ee AEA REENE AE 221 STATUS OP RANION NOI os nern 249 Oo nn O EEEE a AA ESERE T AE E A EREE ESE 249 STATUS OF Gre le gl Be nee ee nee en 250 ER elle AE sauna ae 250 STATUS OPER OH E CO 249 STATUS PRESSE ea ee ee een ee 249 STATUS QUE Stionable CONDON na a es 251 STATUE QUE Stionable E NABE euere seele 251 STATus QUE Stionable FRE Quener CONDINON Fa ee an 251 STATUus QUE Stionable FREQueNEYV ENABE a a events tsipussawinktedansuaivesneniwsgaeeiartenieaateerts 251 STATus QUE Stionable FRE QUeney NTRansition unssn anne 252 STATus QUE Shonable FREQueney PTRansilon iia a 253 STATus QUE Stionable FREQuencyl EVENT a 250 STATUS QUE Stionable LIMIT CONDItioN uu u nn nina an 251 STATUS QUE Stiomable LIME NA CT 252 STATus QUEStionable LIMIt NTRAMNSItION cccccsseececesseeeceasseeeseassesceaaseeeceauseececaseesscasessaceseessaceseensoes 253 STATUS OLUESIONabIEEIMEPTR ansilon E 253 STATUS QUE Stionable LINI EVENTO E 250 STATus QUE Stionable N TRANS HOM en a u 252 STATUS OLESIoNablEPOWErBONDIION Fur 251 STATUS QUE StOnable POWernENABDIO nn ae ann 252 STATUS QUEStionable POWer NTRansition nennen nennen 253 STATUS QUE Slionable POW er PT TRANSOM ea 254 STATUS QUE Sti nable POWEer A E ae 250 STATUS QUE Stionable P TRANS MON EE 253 STATUS e Ee EE EE 250 STATUS OUE ue NEXT E 249 SYSTE
179. een damage during operation The touchscreen may be damaged by inappropriate tools or excessive force Observe the following instructions when operating or cleaning the touchscreen e Never touch the screen with ball point pens or other pointed objects with sharp edges e tis recommended that you operate the touchscreen by finger only As an alterna tive you may use a stylus pen with a smooth soft tip e Never apply excessive force to the screen Touch it gently e Never scratch the screen surface e g with a finger nail Never rub it strongly for example with a dust cloth Spectrum SO rn 13 5 2015 Frequency Count ees M1 798 591549 MHz D2 443 661972 MHz D3 187 323944 MHz D4 116 901408 MHz 30 dBm D5 81 690141 MHz D6 135 211268 MHz 40 0 0 dB 50 0 60 0 e 200 F Eih 3 MHz 90 0 100 0 3 MHz 110 0 120 0 20 ms CDe Center 500 MHz Trace1 Max Detect Max Peak Trig Free Fig 3 6 R amp S Spectrum Rider touchscreen element The touchscreen display can be divided into several sections 1 Title Bar Measurement Result View 2 3 Measurement Trace Window A Parameter View A touchscreen is a screen that is touch sensitive i e it reacts in a specified way when a particular element on the screen is tapped by a finger User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 35 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started Touchscreen gesture Special touchscreen features are provided to enhance user experience in using t
180. een the n dB down markers You can then adjust the distance of the temporary markers 4 Press the Marker Function key 5 Select the n dB Down menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field 6 Enter a different distance of 6 dB The R amp S Spectrum Rider again shows the temporary markers this time with a broader bandwidth User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 126 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Demodulating Signals The R amp S Spectrum Rider features an AM and FM demodulator to demodulate and monitor audio signals It demodulates the signal at the marker frequency You can listen to the demodulated signal with the internal speaker or headphones that you can connect to the 3 5 mm headphone jack on the top of the R amp S Spectrum Rider See chapter 3 2 2 3 Headphone Jack on page 32 When demodulating an AM modulated signal the R amp S Spectrum Rider turns the video voltage into an audible sound You should therefore set the reference level to about the level of the signal that you are demodulating If you perform measurements in the time domain the R amp S Spectrum Rider demodu lates continuously In the frequency domain you can define a time period the R amp S Spectrum Rider demodulates the signal at the marker frequency The frequency sweep then stops at the marker frequency for that time before finishing the sweep 1 Press the MARKER key 2 Press the Marker Function key 3 Sele
181. el at the marker position are assigned the unit of the transducer If dBuV m is selected as the transducer unit a switch to absolute level indication in V m is possible 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Press the Unit softkey 3 Select the V menu item If you are using a transducer with the unit dBuA m it is not possible to select another unit Level indication is entirely in dBuA m Setting the Reference Level The transducer shifts the trace by its value as a function of frequency Positive trans ducer values increase the level negative values reduce it To ensure that the trace is always within the diagram the R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the reference level accord ingly The reference level is shifted by the maximum transducer value in the positive or negative direction Frequency Range of Transducer If the set frequency range is wider than the span in which a transducer is defined the R amp S Spectrum Rider assumes the transducer values outside the defined range to be Zero Data Sets Containing Transducer Factors The R amp S Spectrum Rider stores data sets together with any transducer factors that may have been active for the measurement in question When such a dataset is recal led the associated transducer factor s are switched on as well Transducer factors recalled as part of a data set do however not appear in the list of transducer factors EE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 134 6 1 Using a Power Sensor
182. elevant for this command Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns off all delta markers Usage Event CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions a delta marker on the current trace maximum If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at DELTamarker selects the deltamarker Example CALC DELT3 MAX Moves delta marker 3 to the maximum peak Usage Event Remote Control Commands CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions a delta marker on the next smaller trace maximum If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at DELTamarker selects the deltamarker Example CALC DELT2 MAX NEXT Moves delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum peak Usage Event CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt MINimum PEAK This command positions a delta marker on the current trace minimum If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at DELTamarker selects the deltamarker
183. ement results observed depends on the pass band of a resolution filter The resolution bandwidth RBW has several effects on measurements To be able to display two or more signals whose frequencies are close together separately you need a resolution filter whose bandwidth is small enough The frequency difference between two sinusoidal carriers can not be less than the selected resolution bandwidth if the carriers are to be resolved for example The bandwidth of the resolution filter also affects the noise that is displayed by the R amp S Spectrum Rider The smaller the bandwidth the less noisy the results are The rule is that if you increase or decrease the bandwidth by a factor of 3 the noise goes down or up by 5 dB If you change the bandwidth by a factor of 10 the displayed noise changes by 10 dB The resolution bandwidth affects the speed of the measurement If you want to dis play the true spectrum the resolution filters have to settle at all frequencies that are of interest Narrow bandfilters have a longer settling time compared to wide ones Therefore the sweep time increases the smaller the resolution bandwidth gets The rule is that if you reduce the bandwidth by a factor of 3 the sweep time goes up by a factor of 9 If you reduce the bandwidth by a factor of 10 the sweep time goes up by a factor of 100 The R amp S Spectrum Rider has resolution bandwidths from 1 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1 3 10 sequence In the R amp S Spec
184. en F llen die Haut oder Augen sofort gr ndlich mit Wasser aussp len und einen Arzt konsultieren 2 Zellen oder Batterien weder Hitze noch Feuer aussetzen Nicht im direkten Sonnenlicht lagern Bei berhitzung besteht die Gefahr einer Explosion oder eines Brandes was zu schweren Verletzungen bei Personen f hren kann 3 Batterien sauber und trocken halten Falls die Anschl sse verschmutzt sind mit einem trockenen sauberen Tuch reinigen 4 Batterien vor dem Gebrauch laden Die Batterie darf ausschlie lich mit dem entsprechenden Rohde amp Schwarz Ladeger t geladen werden Siehe Handbuch oder Datenblatt des Ger tes f r die genaue Bezeichnung des Ladegerates Wenn Batterien unsachgem geladen werden besteht Explosionsgefahr was zu schweren Verletzungen bei Personen f hren kann 5 Die Ladetemperatur muss zwischen 0 C und 45 C betragen f r m gliche Einschr nkungen siehe Handbuch 6 Ein Entladen darf nur zwischen 0 C und 50 C erfolgen f r m gliche Einschr nkungen siehe Handbuch 7 Batterien nur so lange laden bis sie vollst ndig aufgeladen sind Ein h ufiges berladen f hrt zu einer geringeren Lebensdauer der Batterie 8 Die Batterie aus dem Ger t entfernen wenn sie nicht benutzt wird Nach l ngerer Lagerzeit kann es erforderlich sein die Batterie mehrmals zu laden und zu entladen um die volle Leistungsf higkeit zu erlangen 9 Die Batterie nur mit daf r vorgesehenen Rohde amp Schwarz Ger
185. ency Reference Meas Time Set the frequency To get the best results enter the frequency of the signal under test 1 Press the Freq softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an entry box to enter the frequency 2 Enter the frequency of the signal 3 Confirm the entry with one of the unit keys The R amp S Spectrum Rider transfers the new frequency to the power sensor which then corrects the measured power readings 3 3 3 Saving and Recalling Results and Settings The R amp S Spectrum Rider can store measurement results and settings in the internal memory on a removable SD memory card or on a memory stick via the USB interface Results and settings are always stored together allowing them to be interpreted in context when recalled The R amp S Spectrum Rider can store at least 100 data records in the internal memory which are differentiated by their names The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides two USB ports and a SD card slot For more infor mation see chapter 3 2 2 4 USB Port on page 32 and chapter 3 2 2 8 SD Card Slot on page 34 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 71 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started 3 3 3 1 Saving Measurement Results 1 Press the SAVE RECALL key 2 Select the Save softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens the file manager dialog box The file manager provides file navigation function in the internal storage SD card and USB Spectrum Save Recall gt Save Dataset ef
186. ency span and bandwidths Triggering Measurements The following commands set up trigger conditions if you are using a trigger for the measurement List of commands o SENSe SWEep EGATe on page 185 SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff on page 185 e SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth on page 186 eo SENSe SWEep EGATe TIME on page 186 e TRIGger SEQuence CLOCk FREQuency on page 186 e TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 186 e TRIGger SEQuence LEVel VIDeo on page 186 e TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 187 e TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 187 SENSe SWEep EGATe lt GateTrigger gt This command turns a gated trigger on and off Parameters lt GateTrigger gt ON OFF ROT OFF Example SWE EGAT ON Activates the gated trigger SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff lt GateTriggerHoldOff gt This command defines the length of the gate delay Parameters lt GateTriggerHoldOff gt Range Os to 100s ROT Os Default unit s Example SWE EGAT HOLD 2 5 Sets a gate delay of 2 5 seconds Remote Control Commands SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth lt GateTriggerLength gt This command defines the gate length Parameters lt GateTriggerLength gt Range 10 us to 100 s ROT 400 us Default unit s Example SWE EGAT LENG 2 5 Sets a gate length of 2 5 seconds SENSe SWEep EGATe TIME lt GateTriggerLength gt This command defines the sweep time for the gated trigger Par
187. enen Steckdosen buchsen Missachtung dieser Ma nahmen kann zu Funken Feuer und oder Verletzungen f hren berlasten Sie keine Steckdosen Verl ngerungskabel oder Steckdosenleisten dies kann Feuer oder elektrische Schl ge verursachen Bei Messungen in Stromkreisen mit Spannungen Uer gt 30 V ist mit geeigneten Ma nahmen Vorsorge zu treffen dass jegliche Gef hrdung ausgeschlossen wird z B geeignete Messmittel Absicherung Strombegrenzung Schutztrennung Isolierung usw Bei Verbindungen mit informationstechnischen Ger ten z B PC oder Industrierechner ist darauf zu achten dass diese der jeweils g ltigen IEC 60950 1 EN 60950 1 oder IEC 61010 1 EN 61010 1 entsprechen Sofern nicht ausdr cklich erlaubt darf der Deckel oder ein Teil des Geh uses niemals entfernt werden wenn das Produkt betrieben wird Dies macht elektrische Leitungen und Komponenten zug nglich und kann zu Verletzungen Feuer oder Schaden am Produkt f hren 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Wird ein Produkt ortsfest angeschlossen ist die Verbindung zwischen dem Schutzleiteranschluss vor Ort und dem Gerateschutzleiter vor jeglicher anderer Verbindung herzustellen Aufstellung und Anschluss darf nur durch eine Elektrofachkraft erfolgen Bei ortsfesten Geraten ohne eingebaute Sicherung Selbstschalter oder ahnliche Schutzeinrichtung muss der Versorgungskreis so abgesichert sein
188. ent status of the options are displayed Install Option Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed Ian mt A Config Overview Instrument Setup User Preference HW SW Info Installed Options 3 Check the availability of the installed options as indicated in the delivery note 4 Check the availability of the hardware options as indicated in the delivery note 5 Press the HW SW Info softkey A list with hardware and firmware information is displayed AAA User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 27 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started FPH 101053 1320 8841 02 02 00 100581 1320 8993 02 05 03 100977 V4 0 0 0 X0 09 1097 Config Overview Instrument Setup User Preference HW SW Info Installed Options 3 2 Instrument Tour This chapter describes the front panel including all function keys and connectors It also contains general system configuration on the R amp S Spectrum Rider as well as the connectivity of the instrument to PC E ne EE 29 e Connectors of the R amp S Spectrum Rider 30 e Jet ASIS curia nie 34 o CSCS yt DE 41 e FIN ranei KOy e 42 e Managing OO sise EE EE nia 45 e Configuring the R amp S Spectrum Rider 48 e Connecting the R amp S Spectrum Rider to a PC 56 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 28 3 2 1 Overview Control EE a Fig 3 5 Front Panel of R amp S Spectrum Rider RF Input N connector BNC connectors Headphone
189. enu 3 Select the Ref Position 10 menu item The R S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the reference position 4 Enter the number of the grid line you want the reference level to position at The range is from 0 to 10 0 corresponds to the lowest grid line 10 corresponds to highest grid line 5 1 3 2 Setting a Display Range The display range determines the scaling or resolution of the vertical axis In the default state the display range is a logarithmic scaling over a 100 dB This corre sponds to 10 dB per grid division The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides other display ranges that either increase or decrease the resolution of the vertical axis However increasing resolution does not increase the accuracy of for example the marker level readout but only makes it easier to read values off the trace You can also select a linear scale for the vertical axis In that case the power levels are expressed as a percentage of the reference level Linear scaling is useful to dis play AM modulated carriers in the time domain for example 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Press the Range Ref Pos softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens a submenu to select the display range 3 Select the display range you need The R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the vertical axis accordingly 5 1 3 3 Selecting the Display Unit By default the vertical axis and therefore the reference level is scaled in dBm How ever the unit
190. eparing for Use When laid out horizontally for operation from above the R amp S Spectrum Rider is tilted slightly due to the micro stand at the back This position provides the optimum viewing angle for the display To allow easy operation from the front and still be able to read the display you can swing out the support on the back of the R amp S Spectrum Rider For use on site or service measurements it is best to hold the instrument in both hands Allthe controls are easy to reach It is also recommended to use the shoulder strap R amp S HA Z323 order number 1321 1363 00 while working on the device under test DUT as it provides the ease of work during transport Before you turn on the R amp S Spectrum Rider you should insert the lithium ion battery included in the delivery into the battery compartment located at the back of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Insert Battery 1 Unscrew the two thumb screws located on the battery compartment 2 Open the cover 3 Insert the battery into the R amp S Spectrum Rider 4 Close the cover and screw back the thumb screws You can operate the R amp S Spectrum Rider with the AC adapter or the battery Both are included in the delivery Preparing for Use 3 1 1 4 Using the AC Adapter Risk of instrument damage To avoid instrument damage e Only use the power supply included in the delivery R amp S HA Z301 only e Make sure that the AC supply voltage is compatible to the vol
191. er ON RF Attenuation RF Attenuation lt 40 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 39 dm to 35 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 5 dB 34 dm to 30 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 29 dBm to 25 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 24 dBm to 20 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 19 dBm to 15 dBm 0 dB 5 dB 5 dB 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Press the Att Amp Imp softkey 3 Select either the Auto Low Distortion or the Auto Low Noise menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider sets the attenuation according to the table above 4 Select the Manual Att for manual entry of the RF attenuation Alternatively you can select the ATT softkey on the Parameter View to enter manually for the RF attenuation The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an entry box to set the RF attenuation You can set the attenuation from O dB to 40 dB in 5 dB steps To indicate a manual attenuation the R amp S Spectrum Rider puts a blue dot at the ATT displays on the Parameter View User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 107 9 1 3 6 9 1 3 7 9 1 3 8 9 1 4 9 1 4 1 Common Measurement Settings Using the Preamplifier R amp S FPH B22 To increase the input sensitivity the R amp S Spectrum Rider provides an integrated 20 dB preamplifier after the input mixer In the default state of the R amp S Spectrum Rider the preamplifier is turned off If you want to measure signals with low powers you can turn it on 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Press the Att Amp Imp softkey 3 Enable or disable the checkbo
192. er application measures the power of the whole signal in the frequency range of the wideband power sensor e Connecting the power sensor e Numerical result display e Graphical result display Power vs Time 1 Press the MODE key 2 Press the Power Meter softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider activates the mode for power measurements Connecting the power sensor You can connect the wideband power sensors to the USB port of the R amp S Spectrum Rider For more information see chapter 6 1 1 Connecting a Power Sensor on page 137 The measurement starts as soon as the power sensor is connected Numerical result display 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Press the Meas Mode softkey 3 Select the Average menu item The layout and contents of the numerical result display are the same as those descri bed in Using a Power Sensor Graphical result display Power vs Time The graphical representation of the results is a special feature only available with the firmware option R amp S FPH K29 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Press the Meas mode softkey 3 Select the Power vs Time menu item R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Performing Pulse Power Measurements R amp S FPH K29 Power Sensor NRP Z81 Histogram SC Pluse Width 5 432 ms Duty Cycle 99 23 Trace Avg 36 4 dBm 01 04 2015 Pulse Period 4 361 ms Start Time 2 281 ms Trace Peak 34 5 dBm 19 32 Pulse Sep 20 450 ys Stop Time 2 431 ms Trace Min 31 5 dBm Rise Time 16 534 us Pulse Top 36
193. er behind a protective cap See chapter 3 2 2 7 Mini USB and LAN Port on page 33 You can set up the LAN connection in the Instrument Settings dialog box See chap ter 3 2 7 Configuring the R amp S Spectrum Rider on page 48 00 0a 35 00 01 22 Off 172 147 751 For a direct connection between a PC and the R amp S Spectrum Rider DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol has to be turned off which is the default state 1 In the Instrument Settings dialog box select the DHCP item A drop down menu opens to select the DHCP state 2 Select DHCP to on or off as required Setting an IP address and subnet mask To establish a connection the PC and the R amp S Spectrum Rider have to be in the same subnet Subnet mask 1 Identify the subnet mask of your PC i e in the Microsoft Windows TCP IP Proper ties User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 57 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started Internet Protocol Version A TCP TPv4 Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings 5 Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 1 10 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 2 Inthe Instrument Settings dialog box select the Subnet Mask item 3 Enter the subnet mask of the PC with the numeric keys
194. er is assigned to the level axis When field strength measurements are performed with the aid of antennas for instance the electrical field strength is directly indicated in dBuV m on the R amp S Spectrum Rider A transducer factor can also be used to correct a fre quency dependent attenuation e g of a cable between DUT and RF input of the R amp S Spectrum Rider an OOO IESO IESO ee IES IE E Sec Tran PreAmp Fig 5 3 Transducer factors dispalyed You can create and edit transducer factor with the R amp S Instrument View software package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Each transducer factor may consist of up to 1000 reference values For more information on transducer factors see chapter 4 8 Managing Datasets on page 88 Interpolation between the values is performed with the aid of a modified spline algo rithm Even if only relatively few values such as maxima minima and turning points are available this algorithm can easily simulate the correction factors of common transduc ers Two transducers can be switched on at a time The second transducer must be assigned the unit dB The R amp S Spectrum Rider adds the two transducers to a total transducer Units supported for transducer factors e dB e dBuV m User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 132 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode e dBuA m e W m2 The unit dB does not change the unit set on the R amp S Sp
195. er lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion DEModulation SELect lt DemodType gt This command selects the type of demodulation type for the audio demodulator The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Parameters lt DemodType gt AM FM RST AM Example CALC MARK FUNC DEM SEL FM Selects FM demodulation CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown lt MarkerDistance gt This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Parameters lt MarkerDistance gt Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in dB RST 3 dB Default unit dB Example See CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe on page 204 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency This command queries the horizontal position of the n dB down markers The numeric suffix at CAL Culate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Remote Control Commands Parameters lt Return values gt lt frequency1 gt Absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the refer ence marker in Hz lt frequency2 gt Absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the refer ence marker in Hz Example See CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe on page 20
196. er sensors Not available Parameters lt Unit gt DBM DB WATT VSWR W Note on the parameter DB when applied to UNIT1 the power is relative to the reference level when applied to UNIT2 the return loss is displayed Note on the parameter VSWR the parameter is only available if applied to UNIT2 Example UNIT1 PMET POW DBM When measuring with the R amp S FSH Z1 R amp S FSH Z18 or USB power sensors sets unit to dBm Defining the Measurement Time The following chapter describes commands to define the measurement time of the power sensor List of commands e SENSe PMETer MTIMe on page 213 SENSe PMETer MTIMe lt MeasTime gt This command sets the duration of measurements Available for measurements with a power sensor Parameters lt MeasTime gt SHORt NORMal LONG Example PMET MTIMe SHOR Sets a short measurement time for power measurements 9 6 3 4 9 6 3 5 Remote Control Commands Zeroing of the Power Sensor List of commands e CALibration lt l1 2 gt PMETer ZERO AUTO on page 214 CALibration lt 1 2 gt PMETer ZERO AUTO lt ONCE gt This commands starts to zero the power sensor This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CALibration is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt ONCE gt ONCE Example CAL PMET ZERO AUTO ONCE Starts to zero the power meter Defining the Video Bandwidth Selecting a video bandwidth
197. erden angemessene Ma nahmen durchzuf hren Ger t der Klasse B Ein Ger t das sich f r den Betrieb im Wohnbereich sowie in solchen Bereichen eignet die direkt an ein Niederspannungs Versorgungsnetz angeschlossen sind das Wohngeb ude versorgt Reparatur und Service 1 Das Produkt darf nur von daf r autorisiertem Fachpersonal ge ffnet werden Vor Arbeiten am Produkt oder ffnen des Produkts ist dieses von der Versorgungsspannung zu trennen sonst besteht das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages Abgleich Auswechseln von Teilen Wartung und Reparatur darf nur von R amp S autorisierten Elektrofachkr ften ausgef hrt werden Werden sicherheitsrelevante Teile z B Netzschalter Netztrafos oder Sicherungen ausgewechselt so d rfen diese nur durch Originalteile ersetzt werden Nach jedem Austausch von sicherheitsrelevanten Teilen ist eine Sicherheitspr fung durchzuf hren Sichtpr fung Schutzleitertest Isolationswiderstand Ableitstrommessung Funktionstest Damit wird sichergestellt dass die Sicherheit des Produkts erhalten bleibt Batterien und Akkumulatoren Zellen Werden die Hinweise zu Batterien und Akkumulatoren Zellen nicht oder unzureichend beachtet kann dies Explosion Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen Die Handhabung von Batterien und Akkumulatoren mit alkalischen Elektrolyten z B Lithiumzellen muss der EN 62133 entsprechen 1 Zellen d rfen nicht ze
198. erence signal to it for frequency synchronization The external reference label BEN is displayed at the top right corner of the trace window to indicate that the reference signal is supplied via external signal input The label turns green when the reference signal is detected The level of the reference signal must be larger than O dBm If there is no reference signal present at the BNC connector the R amp S Spectrum Rider displays an appropriate message Thus measurements without a valid reference can be avoided 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 4 3 2 2 5 Instrument Tour For more information on configuring the BNC connector for the appropriate signal see Configuring the BNC connector on page 49 Headphone Jack The 3 5 mm connector for headphones is located on the top of the R amp S Spectrum Rider The internal impedance of the connector is approximately 10 Ohm USB Port The two USB ports are located on top of the R amp S Spectrum Rider You can use the USB interface to connect a memory stick and store data sets or screenshots The USB connector can also be used to control the operation of the power sensor See chapter 3 3 2 Using a Power Sensor on page 69 DC Port The DC port is located on the left side of the R amp S Spectrum Rider behind a protective cap 3 2 2 6 3 2 2 7 Instrument Tour The R amp S Spectrum Rider is supplied with power by the AC DC transformer power sup ply via the DC connector
199. ers The FREQ key opens a menu that contains the functionality to set the frequency Table 10 3 Power Meter Channel Power Meter Pulse Power Measurement Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Functions of the Power Meter Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Select Downlink Select Uplink Sie a zeen ooo If Freq Mode is set to Channel the softkey will display Channel 2 If Freq Mode is previously configured to Channnel the menu item will display Frequency 10 3 3 BW Parameters The BW key contains functionality to configure bandwidth parameters Table 10 4 Channel Power Meter Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Table 10 5 Pulse Measurement Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection 10 3 4 Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key contains functionality to configure level parameters Table 10 6 Power Meter Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection CSS Functions of the Power Meter Table 10 7 Channel Power Meter Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Manual Att Table 10 8 Pulse Power Measurement Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Ref Level 70 to 30 dBm SR EE SR 10 3 5 Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains functionality to configure the sweep Table 10 9 Power Meter Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Functions of the P
200. es de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o elevacion utilizado Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehiculo recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la responsabilidad de conducir el veh culo de manera segura y adecuada El fabricante no asumir ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un veh culo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Asegure el producto dentro del veh culo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente lesiones u otra clase de da os Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente 1 Los dispositivos marcados contienen una bater a o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que debe ser recogido por separado La eliminaci n se debe efectuar exclusivamente a trav s de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Los dispositivos el ctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que deben ser recogidos por separado Rohde Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminaci n de residuos y asume plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminaci n para los fabricantes dentro de la UE Para desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente dir jase a su servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Si se trabaja de manera mec nica y o t rmica cualquier producto o co
201. es et ou des blessures graves pouvant ventuellement entra ner la mort Pour tous les travaux les r gles locales et ou nationales de s curit et de pr vention des accidents doivent tre respect es 1 Sauf stipulations contraires les produits Rohde amp Schwarz r pondent aux exigences ci apr s faire fonctionner le produit avec le fond du bo tier toujours en bas degr de protection IP 2X degr de pollution 2 cat gorie de surtension 2 utilisation uniquement l int rieur fonctionnement une altitude max de 2000 m au dessus du niveau de la mer transport une altitude max de 4500 m au dessus du niveau de la mer tol rance de 10 pour la tension nominale et de 5 pour la fr quence nominale 2 Ne jamais placer le produit sur des surfaces v hicules d p ts ou tables non appropri s pour raisons de stabilit ou de poids Suivre toujours strictement les indications d installation du fabricant pour le montage et la fixation du produit sur des objets ou des structures par exemple parois et tag res En cas d installation non conforme la documentation produit il y a risque de blessures voire de mort 3 Ne jamais placer le produit sur des dispositifs g n rant de la chaleur par exemple radiateurs et appareils de chauffage soufflants La temp rature ambiante ne doit pas d passer la temp rature maximale sp cifi e dans la documentation produit ou dans la fiche technique Une surchauffe du produit peut prov
202. es leves o moderadas Indica informacion que se considera importante pero no en relacion con situaciones de peligro p ej avisos sobre posibles danos materiales En la documentacion del producto se emplea de forma sinonima el termino CUIDADO ATENCI N Indica una situacion de peligro que si no se evita puede causar Las palabras de senal corresponden a la definicion habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el area econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n en otras areas econ micas O en aplicaciones militares Por eso se deber tener en cuenta que las palabras de se al aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de se al en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones equivocadas y tener por consecuencia da os en personas u objetos Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento El producto solamente debe ser utilizado seg n lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte En todos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacional
203. es y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevenci n de accidentes 1171 0000 42 08 Page 9 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Si no se convino de otra manera es para los productos Rohde amp Schwarz v lido lo que sigue como posicion de funcionamiento se define por principio la posicion con el suelo de la caja para abajo modo de proteccion IP 2X uso solamente en estancias interiores utilizacion hasta 2000 m sobre el nivel del mar transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar Se aplicara una tolerancia de 10 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 sobre la frecuencia nominal Categoria de sobrecarga el ctrica 2 indice de suciedad 2 No sit e el producto encima de superficies veh culos estantes o mesas que por sus caracter sticas de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para l Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalaci n del fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras p ej paredes y estantes Si se realiza la instalaci n de modo distinto al indicado en la documentaci n del producto se pueden causar lesiones o en determinadas circunstancias incluso la muerte No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor p ej radiadores o calefactores La temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la documentaci n del producto o en la hoja de datos En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves
204. espu s de un periodo de almacenamiento prolongado puede ser necesario cargar y descargar varias veces la bater a para recuperar su capacidad completa 9 Utilice la bater a exclusivamente con los equipos Rohde amp Schwarz correspondientes Consulte para ello el manual del equipo 10 No elimine las bater as junto con los residuos urbanos sin clasificar sino por separado Para eliminar la bater a una vez finalizada su vida til dir jase a un punto de recogida de residuos adecuado o a una oficina de representaci n de Rohde Schwarz Etiquetado de la UE para bater as y acumuladores 11 Conserve estas instrucciones de seguridad para fines de informaci n y consulta posterior 1171 1507 71 01 2 1171150771 01 00 man_1_de en fr _001 0 Sicherheitshinweise f r wiederaufladbare Li lon Batterien M gliche schwere Verletzungen unter Umst nden mit A WARNUNG Todestolge Beachten Sie die folgenden Hinweise vollstandig um schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umstanden mit Todesfolge durch Explosion und oder Brand zu verhindern 1 Batterien nicht zerlegen ffnen zerkleinern oder aus gro er Hohe fallen lassen Bei mechanischer Besch digung besteht die Gefahr des Austritts von Chemikalien Austretende Gase k nnen zu Atembeschwerden f hren Sofort l ften in schweren F llen einen Arzt konsultieren Bei Haut oder Augenkontakt mit austretenden Chemikalien k nnen Hautirritationen und Reizungen auftreten In dies
205. etector in combination with a high sweep time However the bandwidth occupied by the signal to be measured should at least equal the frequency covered by a trace pixel or the selected resolution bandwidth whichever is larger Otherwise the power the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows is too low because there are spectral components within the frequency range covered by the pixel that do not originate from the signal you want to observe e g noise To get the true power the video bandwidth VBW should also be greater than the resolution bandwidth RBW Otherwise an averaging effect caused by video bandlimiting comes into play before the RMS value is calculated The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides automatic selection of the detector In that case the R amp S Spectrum Rider selects the detector that is most suitable for the current trace mode Table 5 1 Auto selection of trace detector Clear Write Auto Peak If you select the detector manually the detector is independent of the trace mode and will not change 5 1 6 3 Working with a Second Trace In spectrum mode you can use up to two traces All two traces are based on the same settings except the trace settings like the trace mode or the detector You can use the second trace to compare for example fout different detector settings Inthe default state only trace 1 is active 1 Press the TRACE key 2 Press the Show softkey 3 Select the Enable Trace 2 menu item Th
206. eu s r et transmettez ces documents aux autres utilisateurs du produit La stricte observation des consignes de s curit a pour but d exclure des blessures ou dommages caus s par des dangers de toutes sortes A cet effet il est n cessaire de lire avec soin et de bien comprendre les consignes de s curit ci dessous avant l utilisation du produit et de les respecter lors de l utilisation du produit Toutes les autres consignes de s curit pr sent es l emplacement correspondant de la documentation produit par exemple celles concernant la protection des personnes doivent galement tre imp rativement respect es Dans les pr sentes consignes de s curit toutes les marchandises commercialis es par le groupe Rohde amp Schwarz notamment les appareils les syst mes ainsi que les accessoires sont denommes produit 1171 0000 43 08 Page 1 Consignes de securite fondamentales Symboles et marquages de s curit L A A A A a a Avis source generale de danger Se r f rer a la documentation produit Attention lors de la manipulation d appareils ayant un poids eleve Risque de choc lectrique Avertissement surface chaude Borne de conducteur de protection Borne de mise a la terre Borne de mise a la masse du bati ou du boitier Avis prudence lors de la manipulation de composants sensibles aux decharges lectrostatiques Avertissement rayon laser Les produits laser sont munis d
207. f sine sig nals may be lower than their true value How a Spectrum Analyzer Works List of Commands ISENSe JBANDwWIdthERESOlION EE 181 ISENSEe BANDWIdth RE Solution AUTO oem cuis 181 SENSETBWIDIA VIDEO nee ee een eo ete aari 182 SENSE JBWIDIR VIDEO AUTO EE 182 ISENSe ICORRection TRANsducer lt l E an 180 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer lt 1 2 gt UNITA 180 SENSe JCORRection TRAhNsducer 22GTATel nenn 180 SENSe IDE Tector l 27 FUNGHON Jean en 190 IGENZe DE Tecthorc 2SfEUNGCnontAUtO seen 190 SENSO ee AE 172 SENSO IPREQuencr CENTE STEP sas also 173 SENSeJFREGQu ney CENTER STEP BT TEEN 173 SENSO ee Te RE 173 SENS FRE EE 174 SENSEITFREGOUENENOFFSER EE 174 a FREQUENCY A a 175 PS SRE eri oe CR HR KA E 175 ISENSEITFREOUENEY SPAN FULL ran ee een 175 SENSO JFRE QUENCY STAR Este antenne an seen ande erstehen serien asien E een ae nenne 175 SENSE FREQUENCY OTOR nen ee ee ee 176 e LE METE UY EE 211 ais maso ser tds cer omis 213 EEN EE 232 SENSE Eeer a E E 184 as e 185 SENSe JS WEep EGA FE HOLD Misa u es 185 SENSe JSWEep EGATe LENGth een 186 SENSE EE ee E a H E 186 SENSE P WEep POI E ERS 184 SENSe TS WEeb RTE 184 BENSE SWEER TIMEAUTO nannten teens an sent ne seinen ardillas canastas 184 OS EE E A E A A EA N A E E 169 EE eebe 169 PP a EUEREGPRR 169 EE 170 A e o o o A E UE lu o E o TT 170 A o oo A nn A 170 KE PA A ee ee TAE eee see 170 RE A E AE PE ETEA E E AOE O NAATA
208. f test query Initiates self tests of the instrument and returns an error code in decimal form Return values 0 No error Usage Query only WAI Wait to continue 9 6 2 9 6 2 1 Remote Control Commands Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled see also command synchronization and OBO Usage Event Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer This section provides a detailed description of all remote control commands required to configure and perform measurements with the spectrum analyzer These commands are available in spectrum analyzer mode only Contents e chapter 9 6 2 1 Configuring the Horizontal Axis on page 172 e chapter 9 6 2 2 Configuring the Vertical Axis on page 176 e chapter 9 6 2 3 Setting the Bandwidths on page 181 e chapter 9 6 2 4 Performing and Triggering Measurements on page 182 e chapter 9 6 2 5 Working with Traces on page 187 e chapter 9 6 2 6 Using Markers on page 192 e chapter 9 6 2 7 Using Display Lines and Limit Lines on page 206 Configuring the Horizontal Axis The following commands configure the horizontal frequency axis of the active display List of commands eo SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 172 e SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 173 e SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 173 e SENSe FREQuency INPut MODE on page 173 SENSe FREQuency MODE on pa
209. f the QUEStionable register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to bere ported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 251 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 STATus QUEStionable LIMit ENABle lt DecimalValue gt This command controls the ENABle part of the QUEStionable register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to bere ported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle lt DecimalValue gt This command controls the ENABle part of the QUEStionable register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to bere ported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt DecimalValue gt This command control
210. f the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits should be set to 1 in enable registers SRE and ESE Example Use of the command OPC to generate an SRQ at the end of a sweep e CALL InstrWrite analyzer ESE 1 Set bit O in the ESE Operation Complete e CALL InstrWrite analyzer SRE 32 Set bit 5 in the SRE ESB Au a ASA Am After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument in a way that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Serial Poll In a serial poll just as with command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method has already been defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works with instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The VISUAL BASIC command for executing a serial poll is IBRSP Serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the controller Query by Means of Commands Each part of any status register can be read by means of queries The individual com mande are listed in the description of the
211. fault setup of the currently active operating mode This allows you to define the instrument with a new configuration based on a defined measurement parameters without using parameters from a previous measurement unintentionally still being active gt Press the PRESET ES key Resetting the R amp S Spectrum Rider A Reset to Factory Settings resets the R amp S Spectrum Rider to the factory defaults During a reset the R amp S Spectrum Rider restores the original configuration It also deletes all customized datasets limit lines standards channel tables transducer tables etc Instead it will reinstall all the datasets that have been available after deliv ery EEE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 55 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started Risk of data loss All datasets you have saved will be deleted during a factory reset 1 In the Instrument Setup dialog box select the Reset to Factory Settings item 2 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob Factory Reset The R amp S Spectrum Rider initiates the reset procedure and shows a warning mes sage box Warning Reset to factory defaults All saved datasets will be lost Press YES to continue NO to cancel NO 3 A corresponding dialog box opens for selection Selecting Yes performs the reset During the reboot it shows a corresponding message Selecting No cancels the reset 3 2 8 Connecting the R amp S Spectrum Rider to a PC
212. filename at the User Preference dialog box Select the Default Dataset Name and enter the filename in the entry box Once the Default Dataset Name item is selected the virtual keyboard is loaded for entry Alterna tively you can enter the filename with the alphanumeric keypad see chapter 4 3 1 Using the Alphanumeric keys on page 81 Instead of entering a file name character by character you can also put aname together using the quick naming feature For more information see chapter 4 8 1 3 Quick Naming of Datasets on page 93 4 Press the rotary knob to confirm the entry The R amp S Spectrum Rider saves the dataset e Alternative Ways to Save Datasets 91 kenraming File NOMOS EE 92 Quick Naming of Datasets ss 93 Alternative Ways to Save Datasets The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides alternative and more convenient ways to save data sets Using the screenshot key You can configure the lj screenshot key to take a screenshot as well as saving a dataset 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the User Preference softkey 4 8 1 2 3 Managing Datasets Select the Capture Dataset item and set it on If on pressing the MEN key saves a dataset of the current measurement Pressing the J key saves the selected data of the current measurement Saving events You can configure the R amp S Spectrum Rider to save a dataset when an event occurs 1 2 Press the SET
213. fix at DISPlay is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at TRACe selects the number of the trace Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ROT ON for TRACe1 OFF for TRACe2 Example DISP TRAC2 ON Turns the trace 2 on DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt MEMory STATe lt State gt This command turns the memory trace on and off The numeric suffix at DISPlay is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at TRACe selects the number of the trace Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP TRAC MEM ON Activates the memory trace DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 2 gt MODE lt DisplayMode gt This command selects the trace mode If you are using the average max hold or min hold trace mode you can set the number of measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 184 Note that synchroniza tion to the end of the average count is possible only in single sweep mode The numeric suffix at DISPlay is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at TRACe selects the number of the trace Parameters lt DisplayMode gt Example Remote Control Commands WRITe AVERage MINHold MAXHold VIEW FREeze INFinite RST WRITe You can turn off the trace with DISPlay lt 1 2 gt WINDow TRACe lt 1 4 gt STATe on page 189 For more information see chapter Trace Mode SWE CONT OFF SWE COUN 16 Turn on single sweep mode and sets the number of measure
214. fixed to 172 16 10 10 Refer chapter 3 2 8 Connecting the R amp S Spectrum Rider to a PC on page 56 for instructions on how to change the IP address e Connect the instrument to the LAN or directly to the controller via USB e Switch on the instruments e Write and start the following program on the controller 9 3 Instrument Model and Command Processing status viOpenDefaultRM defaultRM open default resource manager status viOpen DefaultRM TCPIP 172 16 10 10 0 O vi in case of USB connection status viopen DefaultRM TCPIP XXX XXX XXX XXX 0 0 vi in case of a LAN connection with xxx xxx xxx xxx IP address cmd ARST CLO status viWrite vi Cmd Len Cmd retCount reset instrument and clear status registers cmd FREQ CENT 100MHz status viWrite vi Cmd Len Cmd retCount set center frequency to 100 MHz cmd FREQ SPAN 10MHz status viWrite vi Cmd Len Cmd retCount set span to 10 MHz cmd DISPETRAC Y RLEV LOdBm status viWrite vi Cmd Len Cmd retCount set reference level to 10 dBm viclose vi viclose default RM The instrument now performs a sweep in the frequency range of 95 MHz to 105 MHz Changing the IP Address In order to operate the instrument via remote control it must be accessed via LAN IP address or USB fixed IP address If the factory set remote control address does not fit in th
215. for information on possible restrictions 7 Only charge batteries until they are fully charged Frequent overcharging can reduce the battery lifetime 8 Remove the battery from the device when the battery is not being used Following a longer period of storage it may be necessary to charge and discharge the battery several times in order to obtain the full capacity 9 Only use the battery with designated Rohde amp Schwarz devices See the device manual for details 10 Do not dispose of the batteries with unsorted municipal waste The batteries must be collected separately After the end of their life dispose of the batteries at a suitable collection point or via a Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center EU labeling for batteries and secondary cells 11 Keep this safety information for future reference 1171 1507 71 01 1 Instrucciones de seguridad para baterias recargables de ion litio CA ADVERTENCIA Posibilidad de lesiones graves que en determinadas circunstancias puede causar la muerte Tenga en cuenta los siguientes avisos en caso de explosi n y o incendio para impedir lesiones graves en personas que en determinadas circunstancias podr an incluso causar la muerte 1 No desarme las bater as no las abra no las triture ni las deje caer desde una gran altura En caso de da os mec nicos existe el riesgo de salida de sustancias qu micas En caso de salida de gases pueden producirse dificultades respiratorias
216. fy Configuring the Hardware sn 49 Configuring Date and TIS EE 50 Selecting Regional SONGS esieggegieeeuEAeeg de einen 51 Configuring the KEE 52 Configuring the Audio UIs EE 53 C niguring ET A O 54 Resetting the R amp S Spectrum Rider 55 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started 3 2 7 1 Configuring the Hardware The hardware settings contain settings that control the internal and connected hard ware Reference Input Using auto accessory detection If you are using any accessories while working with the R amp S Spectrum Rider the instrument is able to identify the connected hardware To enable this setting 1 In the Instrument Setup dialog box select the Auto Accessory Detection item 2 Select Auto Accessory Detection to On When this feature is on the name of the connected accessory is displayed in the Detected Accessory field Configuring the BNC connector You can use the BNC connectors for various applications For more information on the supported applications see chapter 3 2 2 2 BNC Connector on page 31 1 Inthe Instrument Setup dialog box select the BNC item A drop down menu to select the BNC connector application opens Reference Input User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 49 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started REESEN 2 Select the required application 3 2 7 2 Configuring Date and Time The R amp S Spectrum Rider has an internal clock that can apply
217. g ger functions Selecting the trigger source 1 Press the SWEEP key 2 Press the Trigger softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens a submenu to select the trigger source 3 Select the trigger source you need The R amp S Spectrum Rider activates the trigger The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides the following trigger functions e Free Run A new sweep starts on completion of the previous sweep This is the default state of the R amp S Spectrum Rider e Video Trigger A sweep starts when the video voltage exceeds a particular level The video trigger is available only in the time domain span 0 In the frequency domain the R amp S Spectrum Rider would never start a measure ment with the video trigger because there is no guarantee that there is a signal that generates video voltage present at the start frequency e External Trigger rising or falling slope A sweep starts on the rising edge RISE or on the falling edge FALL of an exter nal trigger signal The external trigger signal is fed in via the BNC connector Ext Trigger See details of connector in chapter 3 2 2 2 BNC Connector on page 31 The switching threshold is 1 4 V i e a TTL signal level Including a Delay Time When you are using a video trigger in the time domain or an external trigger you can delay the start of the measurement with respect to the trigger event by entering a delay time In this way you can include time differences between the trigge
218. g the actual instrument function signal generation measurement etc The controller is not included The term data base denotes a database that manages all the parame ters and associated settings required for setting the instrument hardware Setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set The data set management enters the new values e g frequency into the data set however only passes them on to the hardware when requested by the command recognition This only takes place at the end of a program message The data are checked for compatibility with the current instrument settings before they are transmitted to the instrument hardware If the execution is not possible an execu tion error is signaled to the status reporting system The corresponding settings are discarded Before passing on the data to the hardware the settling bit in the STATus OPERation register is set refer to section STATus OPERation Register on page 243 The hard ware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has set tled This fact can be used to synchronize command servicing Queries induce the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit Status Reporting System For detailed information refer to Status Reporting System Output Unit The output unit collects the information requested by the controller which it receives from the data base management It processes it according to the SCPI ru
219. g Measurements 172 Setting the Bandwidths een 172 Using Display Lines and Limit Lines 172 lafe Ee Sn nent 172 Working with Traces unserer 172 SCEE E 102 Start Stop frequency E 102 Status byte Remote A 169 171 Status Reporting System ccccooonoccccccconnoccnncnnnnnnnos 238 247 Application of the Status Reporting Systems 238 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE J ME 238 Overview of the Status Register un nn 238 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System 238 Status Byte STB amp Service Request Enable Register e ee 238 Structure of an SCPI Status Register 238 SION SI ee eu 101 SUP DINGO Beer ee aan ee tee 2r WEB E AEE E A LEERE A E E 111 115 SWEED MOIE ems 112 Sweep NUMBER sins 111 114 A st 111 Switching on and off the instrument ne 25 Synchronization e A A 88 Syse KOVE A e a en Ga ee 42 T Time domains 104 113 Ee ener 34 Configuration overview u 39 Measurement result view o oococccccnccncncnncnncnnnns 36 37 Parameter VW seen 37 RE 36 Touchscreen gesture u a ae a a 34 Add VAR CY ee ee en 77 Change center frequency ccccccccccnoccnnccccnnnccnncnnnnancnnss 77 Change reference level ooccccccccoonnccncccnnnonccnncnnnns 77 Change Pilsen ee ee 77 Delete all markers nase nennen 77 TR A E A 114 Trace 000 0 A Rs 117 Trace VOA E 114 Trace MAMeMATE
220. ge 174 e SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 174 eo SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 175 o SENSe FREQuency SPAN AUTO on page 175 e SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL on page 175 e SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 175 eo SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 1 6 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt CenterFrequency gt This command defines the center frequency of the R amp S Spectrum Rider In spectrum analyzer mode the command also defines the measuring frequency for time domain measurements span 0 Remote Control Commandes Parameters lt CenterFrequency gt Range Depends on the operating mode and is specified in the data sheet RST fmax 2 with fmax maximum frequency Default unit MHz Example FREQ CENT 100MHz Defines a center frequency of 100 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt Stepsize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt Stepsize gt Range 1Hz to fmax RST AUTO 0 1 SPAN is switched on Default unit MHz Example FREQ CENT STEP 120MHz Defines a CF step size of 120 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingState gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span For time domain measurements the command couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingState gt CENTerf DIVTen OFF CENTerf Sets the step size equal to the center frequency DIV Ten Couples the step size to the span 10 O
221. ge 221 e chapter 9 6 6 Configuring Data Capture on page 223 e chapter 9 6 7 Saving Events on page 224 e chapter 9 6 8 Configuring the Instrument on page 227 e chapter 9 6 9 Status Reporting System on page 238 All chapters begin with a list of commands available in the context of that chapter Fol lowing that list you will find a detailed description of all the commands All individual descriptions contain e complete notation and syntax of the command e description of the effects of the command e alist of all parameters available for that command or the type of data the command returns in case of query commands e an example of how a program message would look like e the RST value An alphabetical list of all available commands is provided at the end of this manual Common Commands The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard A par ticular command has the same effect on different devices The headers of these com Remote Control Commande mands consist of an asterisk followed by three letters Some of the common com mands refer to the chapter 9 6 9 Status Reporting System on page 238 List of Common Commands e CLS on page 169 e ESE on page 169 ESR on page 169 e _ IDN on page 170 e IST on page 170 e OPC on page 170 e _ OPT on page 170 e RST on page 170 e SRE on page 171 e STB on page 171 e TRGON page 171 e TST on page 171 e WAI on page 171
222. ge device depends on which devices are connected to the R amp S Spec trum Rider lf an SD card is connected datasets are always stored there first If a memory stick is connected datasets are stored there only if no SD card is con nected The internal memory is used only if neither SD card or memory stick are connec ted Ee User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 90 4 8 1 1 Managing Datasets The internal memory provides approximately 20 MB of data therefore the number of datasets you save on the R amp S Spectrum Rider is limited Each dataset needs about 100 kB of memory but this value can vary If you are using an external storage device the number of datasets you can save is limited only by the size of the storage device R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the remaining memory on the storage device in the dialog box 1 Select the storage device you want to save the data 2 Select the folder you want to save the data 3 Enter a filename in the corresponding input field The default filename for datasets is Dataset set with a new number in ascending order for each new dataset The file extension for datasets is set If you enter another name the R amp S Spectrum Rider uses that name and assigns a new number to the filename if you save the data set the next time This function allows you to assign consecutive dataset file names without entering a new name every time you want to save a dataset You can define the dataset
223. h FORMat DATA on page 191 command you can set the data format The numeric suffix at TRACe selects the number of the trace Parameters lt arg0 gt TRACe1 TRACe2 LIST TRACe1 Queries the data of trace 1 TRACe2 Queries the data of trace 2 LIST Queries the peak list of the measurement The R amp S Spectrum Rider returns 711 values Each value corre sponds to one pixel of a trace The unit depends on the measurement and the unit you have set with UNIT lt 1 2 gt POWer on page 181 Note If you use the auto peak detector the command reads out positive peak values only Example TRAC DATA TRACE1 Reads out the data for trace 1 Usage Query only FORMat DATA lt Format gt lt gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S Spectrum Rider to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S Spectrum Rider The R amp S Spectrum Rider automatically recognizes the data it receives regard less of the format Parameters lt Format gt ASCii REAL Remote Control Commande lt gt ASCii Returns the data in ASCII format separated by commas REAL Returns the data as 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format RST ASCii In REAL 32 format a string of return values would look like 42424 lt value 1 gt lt value 2 gt lt value n gt with 4 representi
224. he instrument e Swipe horizontally in the trace window the gesture is used to change the center frequency e Swipe vertically in the trace window the gesture is used to change reference level e Pinch and stretch to change the span parameter e Double tap in the trace window to add a new marker e Draw a x to delete all markers 3 2 3 1 Title Bar The Title bar is located on top of the layout Spectrum It is used to display static content e Basic information such as R amp S logo measurement mode name i e Spectrum Power Meter and battery status e Accessories name connected to the instrument i e power sensor e Standard information such as measurement standard name channel table name etc 3 2 3 2 Measurement Result View The Measurement result view is located below the Title bar Frequency Count M1 798 591549 MHz D2 443 661972 MHz D3 187 323944 MHz D4 116 901408 MHz D5 81 690141 MHz D6 135 211268 MHz It displays measurement results of the followings e Marker values Including marker function such as marker noise measurement frequency coun ter and N dB down bandwidth measurement when activated e Display line e Limit lines When the marker measurement is enabled and selected in the Measurement result view an entry box for marker positioning is displayed On the selected marker you can also see the function measurement result is displayed in the Measurement result view e g
225. he Ee Ee EE 211 Configuring Power Level Headout ss 212 Defining the Measurement Tue 213 Zeroing of the Power Sensor 214 Defining the Video Bandwidth 214 Reading Out Measurement Results ss 215 Selecting a Telecommunication Gtoandard nenne nennen 215 File Man age MEN E 216 Making and Storing Screenshots 221 Configuring Dala Capl re er unse nee nee 223 Saving EVENTS E 224 Configuring the IS THUG ende 227 Mode Sole CUO DE 227 BIEVER Me UI len EEN 228 AUdIO SONOS ee 229 Setting up a Network Connechon ss 230 SYSLEH gt A re E ee ee 231 Status Eege Mee 238 Structure of an SCPI Status Register 239 Overview of the Status Register 240 Status Byte STB amp Service Request Enable Register SRE 241 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE 242 Application of the Status Reporting Gvstems 245 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System 247 Remote Commands of the Status Reporting Gvsiem nennen 247 Menu and Softkey Overview uuuuanunnanennanunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 255 General PUNCH ONS nn en ernennen 255 General R amp S Spectrum Rider Getunp 255 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 9 10 1 2 10 1 3 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 2 3 10 2 4 10 2 5 10 2 6 10 2 7 10 2 8 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 3 6 10 3 7 10 3 8 11 11 1 PIE Manage PR ES PO PS USE O 258 Operating Mode Gelec
226. he core channel pro gram response and low level control messages The abort channel is used for imme diate abort of the core channel the interrupt channel transmits spontaneous service requests of the instrument Link setup itself is very complex For more details refer to the VXI 11 specification 9 2 9 2 1 Setting Up the Remote Control Connection Instrument a Abort channel abort er Controller Interrupt channel service request Fig 9 2 VXI 11 channels between instrument and controller The number of controllers that can address an instrument is practically unlimited in the network In the instrument the individual controllers are clearly distinguished This dis tinction continues up to the application level in the controller i e two applications on a computer are identified by the instrument as two different controllers Controller Instrument Controller Controller Fig 9 3 Remote control via LAN from several controllers The controllers can lock and unlock the instrument for exclusive access This regulates access to the instrument of several controllers Setting Up the Remote Control Connection Preparing for Remote Control The short and simple operating sequence below shows how to put the instrument into operation and quickly set its basic functions The current IP address for LAN operation is shown in the SETUP Instrument Setup Menu In case of USB connection the IP address is
227. he file does not exist the R amp S Spectrum Rider creates a new transducer factor Example CORR TRAN2 SEL FSH 238 sectra Selects the FSH Z38 secondary transducer factor SENSe CORRection TRANsducer lt 1 2 gt UNIT This command queries the unit of the current transducer factor 9 6 2 3 Remote Control Commands The numeric suffix at TRANsducer specifies the primary or secondary transducer Example CORR TRAN2 UNIT Queries the unit of the primary transducer Usage Query only UNIT lt 1 2 gt POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the vertical axis The availability of units depends on the operating mode and type of measurement The numeric suffix at UNIT is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt Unit gt DBM DBMV DBUV VOLT WATT DUVM DUAM V W V_M W_M2 RHO MRHO Note that the availability of units depends on the operating mode RST DBM Example UNIT POW DBUV Sets the power unit to dBuV Setting the Bandwidths The following commands configure the filter bandwidths of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Note that both groups of commands BANDwidth and BWIDth are the same List of commands SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 181 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO on page 181 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo on page 182 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 182 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution lt ResolutionBW gt This command defines the resolution bandwi
228. he return value depends on UNIT lt 1 2 gt POWer on page 181 The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Parameters lt MarkerPosition gt numeric value of the marker position Remote Control Commande Example INIT CONF OFF CALC MARK2 ON Turns on single sweep mode and marker 2 INIT WAIL Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Queries the position of marker 2 Usage Query only Marker Functions The following commands perform various kinds of analysis at the marker position List of commands e CALCulate lt 1l1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt COUNt FREQuency on page 200 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt COUNt STATe on page 201 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FREQuency MODE on page 201 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion CENTer on page 202 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion DEModulation STATe on page 202 e CALCulate lt 1l 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion DEModulation HOLD on page 203 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion DEModulation SELect on page 203 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1l 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown on page 203 e cCALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency on page 203 e cCALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult on page 204 e CAlCulate lt l 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion ND
229. he same as is described in Using a Power Sensor Performing and configuring channel power measurements The configuration of channel power measurements without a power sensor is similar to measurements with a power meter The following features are available e Defining the frequency e Zeroing the measurement e Selecting the unit e Defining the reference level e Taking additional loss or gain into account For more information see chapter 6 1 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements on page 138 Defining the channel bandwidth In addition you can select the channel bandwidth 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Press the Channel BW softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the channel bandwidth 3 Enter the required channel bandwidth The R amp S Spectrum Rider performs a measurement on the selected channel Note that it is not possible to change the measurement time resolution bandwidth and frequency span Performing Pulse Power Measurements R amp S FPH K29 When you equip the R amp S Spectrum Rider with firmware option R amp S FPH K29 and connect one of the wideband power sensors available from Rohde amp Schwarz R amp S NRP Z81 Z85 or Z86 you can perform pulse power measurements with your R amp S Spectrum Rider Pulse measurement with power sensor can only be used if option R amp S FPH K9 power meter is installed as well Like the normal power meter application the pulse pow
230. hon is 259 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer uuur02u000n n0nnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnn 259 Frequency EN 260 SPAN ES CICR EE 260 AMP EP LE NN 260 OWEEP ln 261 Bandwidth SelECHOR asiatica 262 Trace HEGER a te oi cia 262 Display and Limit BE 263 VW AP e E e OS O ee 263 Functions of the Power Metet cccssssecsssseeesseseesesseeesnseesseneeeseeseeseeneessneessannees 264 Power Meter Measurements ss 265 Frequency SEN 266 BW AS ES UNIES Se 267 Amplitude Paramelers n seseis lee 267 SWEEB elle e A E E A 268 Limits Line le E 269 erg NEE 269 Marker E rn 270 poo p Lo TE 271 How a Spectrum Analyzer WorkS ooooccconnccccocccococococonanononnnnonananennnnnrrnananrnnannrenananens 271 Bel Un le D 277 Li 10 5 Re O TEEN 282 1 1 Documentation Overview Preface Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S Spectrum Rider is divided as follows e Getting Started e User Manual e Service Manual e Release Notes e Internet Site Getting Started The Getting Started provides basic information on the instrument s functions It covers the following topics e Overview of all elements of the front and rear panels e Basic information on how to set up the R amp S Spectrum Rider e Information on how to operate the R amp S Spectrum Rider in a network e Instructions on how to perform measurements User Manual The User Manual provides a detailed descri
231. hot and lets you take a quick look at that measurement and its settings The R amp S Spectrum Rider does not yet activate the measurement settings of that dataset 1 Browse through the available datasets and select the one you want 2 Press the Preview softkey The R S Spectrum Rider shows a preview of the measurement contained in the selected dataset The preview shows the measurement results as well as the mea surement settings 3 Press the forward or reverse softkey to browse the previews of all datasets availa ble in the selected folder 4 Press the Exit softkey to return to the Recall Dataset dialog box BEES User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 96 4 8 2 2 4 8 3 4 9 4 10 Updating the Firmware Loading a Dataset If you find a dataset whose settings you need for your current measurement task you can load it gt Press the Load softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider loads the dataset in question and adjusts its measure ment settings to those of the dataset Deleting Datasets If you have to delete a dataset you can do so with the file manager 1 Press the SAVE RECALL key 2 Press the File Manager softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens the file manager 3 Mark the selected files or file directories in the File Manager dialog 4 Press Edit softkey A list of Edit menu is displayed for selection 5 Select Delete to delete the files or file directories Before deleting the da
232. hren oder Betriebsstoffe und die regional g ltigen Entsorgungsvorschriften einzuhalten Beachten Sie ggf auch die zugeh rigen speziellen Sicherheitshinweise in der Produktdokumentation Die unsachgem e Entsorgung von Gefahren oder Betriebsstoffen kann zu Gesundheitssch den von Personen und Umweltsch den f hren Weitere Informationen zu Umweltschutz finden Sie auf der Rohde amp Schwarz Home Page 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 8 Consignes de s curit fondamentales Lisez et respectez imperativement les instructions et consignes de s curit suivantes Les usines et sites du groupe Rohde amp Schwarz veillent a la conformite des produits du groupe avec les normes de securite en vigueur dans un souci constant de garantir aux clients le plus haut niveau de securite possible Nos produits ainsi que les accessoires necessaires sont fabriques et testes conformement aux regles de s curit en vigueur Le respect de ces regles est v rifi regulierement par notre systeme d assurance qualit Le present produit a ete fabriqu et contr l conform ment au certificat de conformit CE ci joint et a quitt lusine dans un parfait tat de s curit Pour le maintenir dans cet tat et en garantir une utilisation sans danger l utilisateur doit respecter l ensemble des consignes remarques de securite et avertissements qui se trouvent dans ce manuel Le groupe Rohde amp Schwarz se tient a votre disposition pour toutes questions relatives aux pr
233. hwarz Vous disposez donc d un produit fabriqu d apr s les m thodes les plus avanc es Le d velop pement la fabrication et les tests de ce produit ont t effec tu s selon nos syst mes de management de qualit et de management environnemental La soci t Rohde amp Schwarz a t homologu e entre autres conform ment aux syst mes de management ISO 9001 et ISO 14001 Engagement cologique Produits efficience nerg tique Am lioration continue de la durabilite environnementale Systeme de management environnemental certifie selon ISO 14001 1171 0200 11 V 05 01 1171020011 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 4 3 1 1 9 3 1 1 6 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 2 3 2 1 3 22 3 221 32 22 3223 3 2 2 4 3229 3228 3227 3 2 2 8 323 3 2 3 1 Contents Eege 11 Documentation Overview nn ae 11 Conventions Used in the Documentation ss 12 Typographical Conventions sisi 12 Conventions for Procedure Uescrptons Benno nnnnonnnn nennen 12 Other Convent ONS ane ee ans D en it 13 Welcome to the R amp S Spectrum Rider ss 15 Getting En d nun nun nnnnnnnnnnnun nun nun nnnnn nun nun 17 Prepalrina te 17 Putting into CSA OI EE 17 Unpacking and Checking the Instrument 18 ojo 10 CIST E 19 Setting up the R amp S Spectrum Rider ss 19 Using the AC Adapnter nenne nnennennnnnnnnnnnnennn 21 Battery ODS Le DEE 22 Battery Maintenance siens 24 Switching the Ins
234. ia ete 154 Instrument Model and Command Processing 155 A a 156 Command e elle EN 156 Data Base and Instrument Hardware 157 Status Reporting SV StS IN vecinita aiii 157 so A 157 SCPI Command Structure and SyNtAX cccococccconcccccococcconancnnnnnnonnnanonnnancenanarenananenannns 158 Str ct re of a COMMANA euere cami a nee eee ae den ce 158 Common ena e 158 Device Specific Commande 159 Overview of Syntax Elements 162 Sien 163 cas A o PE PE O Poo A nee 163 Special Numeric Valles suicida ea 163 Boolean EE 164 a E A T ECO 164 te 165 BLOCK D ee ee E UE A 165 Structure of a Program Message 165 Responses to QUEME ee eegend een 166 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization 167 Remote Control CoOMmMandS vicio 167 COMMON Rent ne 168 Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analvzer nennen nenne nennen 172 Configuring the Horizontal Avis 172 ei ie leeden RE 176 Sud Lebrun He nee een 181 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH 9 6 2 4 9 6 2 5 9 6 2 6 9 6 2 7 9 6 3 9 6 3 1 9 6 3 2 9 0 3 3 9 6 3 4 9 6 3 5 9 6 3 6 9 6 3 7 9 6 4 9 6 9 9 6 6 9 6 7 9 6 8 9 6 8 1 9 6 8 2 9 6 8 3 9 6 8 4 9 6 8 5 9 6 9 9 6 9 1 9 6 9 2 9 6 9 3 9 6 9 4 9 6 9 5 9 6 9 6 9 6 9 7 10 10 1 10 1 1 Contents Performing and Triggering Measuremente 000000 nnnnn en nnnnn nn 182 Working with Eer 187 Using ET 192 Using Display Lines and Limit Lines 206 Remote Commands of the Power Meter 211 Setting t
235. iately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or stress 4 Before you start processing the product mechanically and or thermally or before you take it apart be sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 5 Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn babies require increased protection pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation The employer operator must evaluate workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the potential danger 6 Should a fire occur the product may release hazardous substances gases fluids etc that can cause health problems Therefore suitable measures must be taken e g protective masks and protective clothing must be worn 7 Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class Lasers can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely concentrated electromagnetic power If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated into a Rohde amp Schwarz product absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the product documentation The objective is to prevent per
236. import The same way you can also export a quick naming table 1 Inthe Quick Naming softkey menu press the Export softkey 2 Select the Export Quick Naming Table menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens a dialog box to select a file for export Restoring Datasets You can preview and load previously saved measurement results with the recall func tion of the R amp S Spectrum Rider This function also provides easy access to previous measurement settings so that you do not have to set up the R amp S Spectrum Rider again R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions EE SII 4 8 2 1 Spectrum Save Recall gt Recall Dataset Free 13 37 MB ef Publica Storage Card USB M Channel Tables M Datasets B Limit Lines S Quick Naming Tables Bi Screen Shots Wl Standards Retresh 1 Press the SAVE RECALL key 2 Press the Recall Dataset softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens the Recall Dataset dialog box 3 Select the storage device and folder structure you want to load the dataset The R amp S Spectrum Rider restores the configuration that the dataset contains By default the most recently saved dataset is highlighted If you need another dataset navigate to the folder or storage device that contains the dataset you need e Previewing a KT EE 96 e LATINA DOS een rec 97 Previewing a Dataset The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides a preview of datasets The preview is like a screen s
237. in Zusammenhang mit nicht zugeh rigen Produkten oder nicht zugeh rigen Dokumentationen kann zu Fehlinterpretationen f hren und damit zu Personen oder Sachsch den f hren Betriebszust nde und Betriebslagen Das Produkt darf nur in den vom Hersteller angegebenen Betriebszust nden und Betriebslagen ohne Behinderung der Bel ftung betrieben werden Werden die Herstellerangaben nicht eingehalten kann dies elektrischen Schlag Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen Bei allen Arbeiten sind die rtlichen bzw landesspezifischen Sicherheits und Unfallverh tungsvorschriften zu beachten 1 Sofern nicht anders vereinbart gilt f r R amp S Produkte folgendes als vorgeschriebene Betriebslage grunds tzlich Geh useboden unten IP Schutzart 2X Verschmutzungsgrad 2 berspannungskategorie 2 nur in Innenr umen verwenden Betrieb bis 2000 m NN Transport bis 4500 m NN f r die Nennspannung gilt eine Toleranz von 10 f r die Nennfrequenz eine Toleranz von 5 N Stellen Sie das Produkt nicht auf Oberfl chen Fahrzeuge Ablagen oder Tische die aus Gewichts oder Stabilitatsgrunden nicht daf r geeignet sind Folgen Sie bei Aufbau und Befestigung des Produkts an Gegenst nden oder Strukturen z B W nde und Regale immer den Installations hinweisen des Herstellers Bei Installation abweichend von der Produktdokumentation k nnen Personen verletzt unter Umst nden sogar get tet
238. ine 1 Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 2 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt DEFine lt Name gt lt Description gt lt X unit gt lt X scale gt lt Y unit gt lt X0 X99 gt lt Y0 Y99 gt This command defines the shape of a limit line Remote Control Commands After you have defined the shape of the limit line you still have to activate it with CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt UPPer SELect on page 210 before it takes effect The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Parameters lt Name gt String containing the name of the limit line Note if a limit line with the same name already exists it will be overwritten lt Description gt String containing a comment for the limit line lt X unit gt HZ S M Unit of the x axis lt X scale gt ABSolute RELative Scale of the x axis lt Y unit gt DB DBM DBMV DBUV V VOLT W WATT DBUVM DBUAM V_M W_M2 VSWR Unit of the y axis lt X0 X99 gt Data points on the x axis Note a limit line may consist of up to 100 horizontal data points lt Y0 Y99 gt Data points on the y axis Example CALC LIN DEN Line Example HZ ABS DBM 10000000 10 10000000 0 20000000 0 Defines a limit line with three data points Usage Setting only CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt DELete This command deletes a limit line This command is an event and therefore has no RST value
239. inesfalls chemische Reinigungsmittel wie z B Alkohol Aceton Nitroverd nnung Betrieb 1 Die Benutzung des Produkts erfordert spezielle Einweisung und hohe Konzentration w hrend der Benutzung Es muss sichergestellt sein dass Personen die das Produkt bedienen bez glich ihrer k rperlichen geistigen und seelischen Verfassung den Anforderungen gewachsen sind da andernfalls Verletzungen oder Sachsch den nicht auszuschlie en sind Es liegt in der Verantwortung des Arbeitsgebers Betreibers geeignetes Personal f r die Benutzung des Produkts auszuw hlen Bevor Sie das Produkt bewegen oder transportieren lesen und beachten Sie den Abschnitt Transport Wie bei allen industriell gefertigten G tern kann die Verwendung von Stoffen die Allergien hervorrufen so genannte Allergene z B Nickel nicht generell ausgeschlossen werden Sollten beim Umgang mit R amp S Produkten allergische Reaktionen z B Hautausschlag h ufiges Niesen Bindehautr tung oder Atembeschwerden auftreten ist umgehend ein Arzt aufzusuchen um die Ursachen zu kl ren und Gesundheitssch den bzw belastungen zu vermeiden Vor der mechanischen und oder thermischen Bearbeitung oder Zerlegung des Produkts beachten Sie unbedingt Abschnitt Entsorgung Punkt 1 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 5 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Bei bestimmten Produkten z B HF Funkanlagen k nnen funktionsbedingt erh hte elektromag netische Strahlungen auftreten Unter Ber ck
240. ion qui alimente des batiments residentiels Remarque ces appareils peuvent provoquer des perturbations radioelectriques dans l environnement r sidentiel en raison de perturbations conduites ou rayonn es Dans ce cas on peut exiger que l exploitant mette en uvre de mesures appropri es pour liminer ces perturbations Appareil de la classe B Appareil appropri un usage dans l environnement r sidentiel ainsi que dans les environnements raccord s directement a un r seau d alimentation basse tension qui alimente des b timents r sidentiels R paration et service apr s vente 1 Le produit ne doit tre ouvert que par un personnel qualifi et autoris Avant de travailler sur le produit ou de l ouvrir il faut le couper de la tension d alimentation sinon il y a risque de choc lectrique Les travaux d ajustement le remplacement des pieces la maintenance et la r paration ne doivent tre effectu s que par des lectroniciens qualifi s et autoris s par Rohde amp Schwarz En cas de remplacement de pi ces concernant la s curit notamment interrupteur d alimentation transformateur d alimentation r seau ou fusibles celles ci ne doivent tre remplac es que par des pi ces d origine Apr s chaque remplacement de pi ces concernant la s curit une v rification de s curit doit tre effectu e contr le visuel v rification du conducteur de protection mesure de la r sistance d isolement et du courant de
241. ion scheme 5 1 8 Using Limit Lines Limit lines help you to identify if a signal complies with certain level characteristics A limit line is made up out of two or more points that are connected to a line Each of the points that define the shape of the limit line consists of two coordinates One coor dinate defines the horizontal position e g frequency the other one the vertical posi tion With the R amp S Spectrum Rider you can build limit lines that consist of up to 1000 points Values that define the horizontal characteristics of the limit line can be either absolute values e g frequency in MHz or relative values whose reference is the center of the measurement trace e g the center frequency Relative values are of advantage if you for example measure modulated output signals and you change the center fre quency but need the limit line to remain the same Absolute limit lines have the file extension abslim while relative limit lines have the file extension rellim Values that define the vertical characteristics are always level values in dB If the scal ing of the vertical axis is currently a linear one units V or W the R amp S Spectrum Rider automatically switches to a logarithmic scaling after you turn on the limit line After turning on a limit line the R amp S Spectrum Rider checks if the signal violates the shape of the limit line If one or more signal levels exceed the limit value the R amp S Spectrum Rider f
242. ions User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 167 9 6 1 Remote Control Commands Each section describes the commands for one of the operating modes available in the R amp S Spectrum Rider beginning with the description of common commands required to operate the instrument The structure is based on that ofthe R amp S Spectrum Rider user manual e chapter 9 6 1 Common Commands on page 168 e chapter 9 6 2 Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer on page 172 e chapter 9 6 3 Remote Commands of the Power Meter on page 211 Each section is subdivided into various tasks required to perform measurements with the R amp S Spectrum Rider also based on the structure of the R amp S Spectrum Rider user manual Some commands like those for controlling markers or configuring the fre quency axis are available for all operating modes In that case you will find a list of these commands in the corresponding section Availability of commands The spectrum modes are implemented in the basic unit For the other modes the cor responding options are required Following the remote control commands required to perform specific measurements you will find a description of general commands used to set up and control basic instru ment functions These commands are independent of the operating mode Therefore they are listed separately e chapter 9 6 4 File Management on page 216 e chapter 9 6 5 Making and Storing Screenshots on pa
243. irection button between the PC to instrument and vice versa a x DB File Transfer X Public Limit Lines tt v C w oo Public ez CA l D SR le Bi Channel Tables gt gt Recycle Bin gt drv Datasets ae Templates gt Intel Limit Lines En MSOCach Quick Naming Tables gt ele DI Delete H lock gt Refresh QQ W Delete H Leck O view Q Name Date Time Name Date Time GSM Lowerrellim 6 2 2015 438PM gi GSM _Upperrellim 6 2 2015 4 38PM gi R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions REESEN le 90 ASA E O O A 95 Riewe 97 4 8 1 Saving datasets The R amp S Spectrum Rider allows you to save the data that is currently analyzed at any time Press the SAVE RECALL key Press the Save Dataset softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens the Save Dataset dialog box Spectrum Save Recall gt Save Dataset 1 Free 13 16 MB a 2 EECH Public Storage Card USB H Dataset001 set 26 08 15 11 31 O Save As On screen KB ES Exit 1 Remaining memory on selected data storage device 2 Currently selected data storage 3 Available data storage 4 Currently folder structure of the selected data storage 5 Dataset name input field 6 On screen Keyboard 7 File manager softkey menu The folder structure shows all the available data storage devices Possible storage devices are the internal memory of the R amp S Spectrum Rider an SD card or a memory Stick The default stora
244. is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC CENT Matches the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2 Usage Event CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion DEModulation STATe lt State gt This command turns the audio demodulator on and off when the measurement hits a marker position With span gt 0 you can define a hold time at the marker position with CALCulate lt 1l 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion DEModulation HOLD on page 203 In zero span the demodulation is on permanently The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Suffix lt 1 2 gt eg lt 1 6 gt 1 6 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 FUNC DEM ON Switches on the demodulation for marker 3 Remote Control Commands CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion DEModulation HOLD lt HoldTime gt This command defines the hold time at the marker position for the demodulation with span gt 0 The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Parameters lt HoldTime gt Range 10 ms to 500s RST 0 5 DEModulation is set to OFF Default unit s Example CALC MARK FUNC DEM HOLD 3s Sets a hold time of 3 seconds CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARK
245. item has a blue background and the selected parameters is indicated with a blue dot in the menu item Spectrum 18 6 2015 200 13 54 40 0 20 dBm nn Mi Preamp 0 dB 600 Manual Att OdB O Auto Low Distortion Auto Low Noise Imp 50 Q O p 750RAM 750RAZ ADA 2 GHz Clear Auto Peak Free 750 FSH Z38 GHz Ref Level Range RefPos Unit Ref Offset Att Amp Imp You can also set the attenuation manually TheR amp S Spectrum Rider provides attenuation in the range from 0 to 40 dB in 5 dB steps 4 Press the AMPT key 5 Select the Att Amp Imp softkey 6 Select the Manual Att menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an entry box to define the attenuation Two meth ods are provided to fill in the input fields e Directly with the number keys e Using rotary knob While you can enter any number you want with the number keys using the rotary knob is coupled to a certain step size in most cases If you use the rotary knob to change the attenuation i e the step size is 5 dB 7 Enter the attenuation you need The R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the current attenuation level in the Parameter View User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 63 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started 3 3 1 2 Using the Preamplifier The R amp S Spectrum Rider has an optional preamplifier R amp S FPH B22 order number 1321 0680 02 to increase sensitivity Depending on the frequency the gain of the amplifier is in the
246. ith an oscilloscope for example Measurements in the frequency domain show the frequency components of a signal To perform measurements in the frequency domain you can use a spectrum analyzer Both modes are essentially equivalent because applying the Fourier transform to any signal converts it into its spectral components Depending on the signal characteristic to be measured one method is usually more appropriate than the other With an oscil loscope it is possible to tell whether a signal is a sine wave a square wave with a cer tain on off ratio or a sawtooth wave However detecting superimposed low level sig nals or monitoring the harmonic content of the signal is easier with a spectrum or sig nal analyzer figure 11 1 shows the theoretical basis of the two measurement methods In the time domain an oscilloscope would for example show a section of the signal that is a square wave The same signal when viewed with a spectrum analyzer would show a line spectrum the fundamental and its harmonics Frequency Amplitude Do N LY A I d ancy domain Time domain Time Fig 11 1 Visualization of time domain and frequency domain R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Appendix Applying the Fourier transform to the periodic square wave transforms it into the fre quency domain The spectrum analyzer would show the fundamental or frequency of the square wave and its harmonics The spectrum analyzer uses a narrow bandpas
247. itif de protection similaire integres le circuit d alimentation doit tre s curis de sorte que toutes les personnes ayant acces au produit et le produit lui m me soient suffisamment proteges contre tout dommage Chaque produit doit tre protege de maniere appropriee contre les eventuelles surtensions par exemple dues a un coup de foudre Sinon les utilisateurs sont expos s a des risques de choc lectrique Ne jamais introduire d objets non prevus a cet effet dans les ouvertures du boitier etant donne que cela peut entrainer des courts circuits dans le produit et ou des chocs lectriques incendies ou blessures Sauf sp cification contraire les produits ne sont pas prot g s contre l infiltration de liquides voir aussi la section Etats et positions de fonctionnement point 1 II faut donc prot ger les produits contre Pinfiltration de liquides La non observation de cette consigne entraine le risque de choc lectrique pour l utilisateur ou dendommagement du produit ce qui peut galement mettre les personnes en danger Ne pas utiliser le produit dans des conditions pouvant occasionner ou ayant deja occasionne le cas echeant des condensations dans ou sur le produit par exemple lorsque celui ci est deplace d un environnement froid dans un environnement chaud L infiltration d eau augmente le risque de choc lectrique Avant le nettoyage d brancher le produit de l alimentation par exemple r seau lectrique ou b
248. k e Every sweep Saves the data of all measurement sweeps that are performed Storage device To use the Save on Event functionality you need an USB stick to store the data on The internal memory would probably not be sufficient 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the User Preference softkey 3 Select the Recording Storage menu item 4 From the drop down menu select the storage device as the storage device SD card or USB device Managing Datasets The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides functionality to manage save restore etc data sets available in its internal memory or an external storage device Datasets The R amp S Spectrum Rider supports various types of datasets The instructions below primarily describe managing datasets that you create on the R amp S Spectrum Rider dur ing measurements for example measurement results and configurations Note that these datasets have the file extension set Datasets with the file extension set are an image of measurement results and configu rations Thus you can subsequently reproduce the context of the measurement You can use datasets for documentation for example or use them for a more detailed analysis later on for example with the R amp S Instrument View software Note that data sets also contain calibration data if calibration has been performed Templates The R amp S Spectrum Rider also supports various other types of datasets or templates Such templates
249. kes the maximum and minimum and displays them together The two values are joined by a vertical line segment This gives a good indication of the level variation over the measured values represented by a single pixel The RMS detector is How a Spectrum Analyzer Works used by the spectrum analyzer to determine the RMS value of the measured values It is therefore a measure of the spectral power represented by a pixel The sample detec tor takes an arbitrary measurement value and displays it in the Fig above the first The other measured values are ignored On the basis of the operating principles of detectors a few recommendations can be made as to their use e tis best to use the Auto Peak detector or the peak detector for spectrum analysis over large frequency ranges This ensures that all signals are displayed e The RMS detector is recommended for power measurements on modulated sig nals However the display range should be chosen so as not to exceed 100 times the bandwidth of the signal or the resolution bandwidth whichever is larger e The sample detector or the RMS detector preferred should be used for noise measurements Only these two detectors are capable of measuring noise power correctly e When measurements are made on sine signals the level display does not depend on the detector However if you use the RMS detector or the sample detector ensure that the span is not too great Otherwise the displayed levels o
250. l command length must be recognized by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional key words Example SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO This command couples the resolution bandwidth of the instrument to other parameters The following command has the same effect BANDwidth AUTO Optional keywords with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional keyword if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize lt Boolean gt Command DISP MAX ON refers to window 1 In order to refer to a window other than 1 you must include the optional WINDow parameter with the suffix for the required window DISP WIND2 MAX ON refers to window 2 Long and Short Form The key words feature a long form and a short form Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands Example STATus QUEStionable ENABle 1 is equivalent to STAT QUES ENAB 1 Upper and lower case notation of commands Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual the instrument itself does not distinguish upper case and lower case letters Parameter The parameter must be separated from the header by a white space If several parameters are specified in a command they are separated
251. languages for the user interface 1 Inthe Instrument Setup dialog box select the Language item A drop down menu opens to select the language French German Spanish Italian Portuguese A A E 2 Select one of the languages from the drop down menu 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob 4 Reboot the device in order to activate the choice of selected language Setting the date format The R S Spectrum Rider provides 2 different formats to display the date 1 In the Instrument Setup dialog box select the Date Format item A drop down menu opens to select the date format mmdd yyyy Ee User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 51 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started 2 Select the required date format from the drop down menu 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob 3 2 7 4 Configuring the Display The display settings configure display characteristics The display of the R amp S Spectrum Rider is a TFT color LCD display The ideal brightness of the display depends on the intensity of the backlight To strike a balance between battery operating time and screen display quality set the backlight intensity to the minimum brightness needed The intensity of the keyboard backlight is adjustable with a time delay setting to turn off the backlight The keyboard backlight remains on until the time specified by the Key board Backlight Delay or a subsequent key is pressed
252. lank space or an underscore After having added a term press the _ softkey or the Space softkey if you want to add a separator between the terms To add a separator automatically upon adding a term press Auto Insert softkey to select the space from the menu list User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 94 4 8 2 Managing Datasets a Select the Off menu item to add no separator b Select the _ menu item to add an underscore c Select the Space menu item to add a blank space Designing a quick naming table The firmware of the R amp S Spectrum Rider already has some basic mobile communica tion terms in the table However you can add up to 120 terms to the table 1 Press the SAVE RECALL key 2 Press the Save Dataset softkey 3 Press the Quick Naming softkey 4 Select one of the table cells from the Quick Naming table 5 Press the Change Table Item softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input entry box to define a term for the cell 6 Confirm the entry with rotary knob The R amp S Spectrum Rider adds the term to the Quick Naming table You can also create and edit quick naming tables with the R amp S Instrument View soft ware package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S Spectrum Rider 1 Inthe Quick Naming softkey menu press the Import softkey 2 Select the Import Quick Naming Table menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens a dialog box to select a file to
253. lects the limit check condition that must occur in order to save a coor dinate Parameters lt arg0 gt STARtonfail STOPonfail FAlLonly STARtonfail Starts to save all sweeps from the moment a limit check fails STOPonfail Saves all sweeps until a limit check fails FAlLonly Saves only sweeps that contain a limit check violation RST STAR Example SYST SOEV SOUR LIM SYST SOEV LIM MODE FALL Saves all sweeps that contain a violation of a limit check SYSTem SOEVent RECording STORage lt arg0 gt This command selects the storage device to save the coordinates to Remote Control Commande Parameters lt arg0 gt SDCard USB SDCard Saves coordinates to an SD card USB Saves coordinates to a USB device RST SDCard Example See SYSTem SOEVent DISTance INTerval on page 225 SYSTem SOEVent SOURce lt arg0 gt This command selects the type of event that triggers saving the coordinates of your current location Parameters lt arg0 gt TIMeinterval LIMitsfail DISTanceint ALLSweeps TIMeinterval Saves coordinates after a certain length of time has passed LIMitsfail Saves coordinates when a limit check has failed DISTanceint Saves coordinates after a certain distance has been covered ALLSweeps Saves coordinates after each sweep ROT TlMeinterval Example See SYSTem SOEVent DISTance INTerval on page 225 SYSTem SOEVent TIME INTerval lt Seconds gt This command defines a time interv
254. les and makes it available in the output buffer If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from the data base management the output unit sends error message EE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 157 9 4 9 4 1 9 4 1 1 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Query UNTERMINATED to the status reporting system No data are sent to the con troller the controller waits until it has reached its time limit This behavior is defined by IEEE 488 2 and SCPI SCPI Command Structure and Syntax SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments describes a standard command set for programming instruments irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer The goal of the SCPI consortium is to standardize the device specific commands to a large extent For this purpose a model was developed which defines the same functions inside a device or for different devices Command systems were generated which are assigned to these functions Thus it is possible to address the same functions with identical commands The command systems are of a hierarchical structure SCPI is based on standard IEEE 488 2 i e it uses the same syntactic basic elements as well as the common commands defined in this standard Part of the syntax of the device responses is defined with greater restrictions than in standard IEEE 488 2 see chapter 9 4 4 Responses to Queries on page 166 Remote comm
255. llect es s par ment Recycler les batteries en fin de vie en les confiant un point de collecte comp tent ou un point de service apr s vente Rohde amp Schwarz Marquage UE pour batteries et accumulateurs 11 Conserver ces consignes de s curit de sorte pouvoir vous y reporter ou v rifier ult rieurement certains points 1171 1507 71 01 4 1171150771 01 00 man_1_de en fr_ 001 0 Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up to date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde schwarz com Latin America Phone 1 410 910 7988 customersupport la rohde schwarz com Asia Pacific Phone 6565 13 04 88 customersupport asia rohde schwarz com China Phone 86 800 810 8228 86 400 65
256. m select may refer to any ofthe described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard Other Conventions Remote commands may include abbreviations to simplify input In the description of such commands all parts that have to be entered are written in capital letters Addi tional text in lower case characters is for information only Conventions Used in the Documentation 2 Welcome to the R amp S Spectrum Rider The R amp S Spectrum Rider is a new generation Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzer developed to meet demanding customer requirements Offering touchscreen input the analyzer enhances user experience in making measurements fast and easy This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the instrument pro vides The latest version is available for download at the product homepage hitp www2 rohde schwarz com product FPH html Preparing for Use 3 Getting Started 3 1 The following chapters are identical to those in the printed R amp S Spectrum RiderGetting Started manual e Propanng Tor LEE eege ENEE 17 rie in EEN 28 o Trying Out the IS EE dees eege Edge 62 Preparing for Use Puting into OSO DEE 17 e Switching the Instrument On and Off 25 e Checking the Supplied Options nennen 27 Putting into Operation This chapter assists you in using the R amp S Spectrum Rider for the first time It describes the basic steps
257. m measurement Note When the optional preamplifier R amp S FPH B22 is absent this menu is not available User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 38 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started REESEN RBW Select RBW to display an entry box to configure the resolution bandwidth of the spectrum measure ment VBW Select VBW to display an entry box to configure the video bandwidth of the spectrum measurement SWT Select SWT to display an entry box to configure the sweep time of the spectrum measurement Config Overview Select Config Overview to display the configura tion overview window for more configuration options for the spectrum measurement See Configuration Overview on page 39 Configuration Overview This is a dedicated button located at the bottom of the Parameter View it is operation mode dependent See figure 3 6 When you select this button it opens the Config Overview window Accessing it with out the touchscreen input is possible via the SETUP key See chapter 3 2 5 4 System Keys on page 42 The Config Overview illustrates the flow of spectrum measurement at different stages and the relevant parameters which have impact on the measurement at each stage E Ref Level 30 dBm Center Freq 2 GHz RF Impedance 500 Ref Offset OdB Span 4 GHz Power Sensor AttMode Manual Start Freq 0 Hz Att dB Stop Freq 4GHz x A D Trace Mode ClearWnte Source External Rise REW 3 MHz Aut
258. mainly contain additional requirements for a particular measurement like limit lines or channel tables Creating and editing these templates is only possible with the functionality provided by the R amp S Instrument View software package Note that the file extension depends on the application of the template For example a template containing a channel table has the extension chntab EE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 88 A InstrumentView Connected Get Trace Open Trace Instrument Editors Application Le gt Managing Datasets For more information on working with templates refer to the documentation of the R amp S Instrument View software package Data synchronization The R amp S Instrument View features a data synchronization that matches the data avail able on the R amp S Spectrum Rider and that on the computer with the R amp S Instrument View installation 1 Select File Transfer from the Instrument menu The software opens the File Transfer dialog box Select the Template amp Result synchronization button to process data synchro nization between the computer and the instrument This updates all files that have been created or edited with the R amp S Instrument View software package to the instrument and vice versa Note that template can only be created and edited in the PC see Templates on page 88 Alternatively data can be transferred in a single direction using the d
259. ments to 16 DISP TRAC MODE MAXH Activates MAXHold mode for the trace INIT WAIL Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps FORMat BORDer lt TransferOrder gt This command selects the format of binary data Parameters lt TransferOrder gt Example NORMal SWAPped NORMal The most significant byte is transferred first big endian SWAPped The least significant byte is transferred first little endian RST SWAPped FORM BORD NORM Changes the byte order to normal mode SENSe DETector lt 1 2 gt FUNCtion lt Detector gt This command selects a detector function The numeric suffix at DETector specifies the primary or secondary detector Parameters lt Detector gt Example POSitive NEGative SAMPle RMS AVERage APEak RST APE For more information see chapter Detectors DET POS Sets the primary detector to positive peak SENSe DETector lt 1 2 gt FUNCtion AUTO lt State gt This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode The numeric suffix at DETector specifies the primary or secondary detector Remote Control Commands Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example DET AUTO OFF Turns off automatic detector selection for the primary detector TRACe lt 1 2 gt DATA lt arg0 gt This command queries the trace data of the current measurement It also transfers data from a file to a particular trace Wit
260. mmands Example CALC MARK1 FUNC REF Matches the reference level to the power level of marker 1 Usage Event Using Display Lines and Limit Lines The following commands control the display lines and limit lines functionality Display Lines The following commands define the position of the display line List of commands e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DLINe on page 206 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DLINe STATe on page 206 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DLINe lt LinePosition gt This command defines the position of a display line The numeric suffix at CAL Culate is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt LinePosition gt Numeric value with a variable range and unit You can use any unit you want the R amp S Spectrum Rider then converts the unit to the currently selected unit If you omit a unit the R amp S Spectrum Rider uses the currently selected unit RSI STATe to OFF Default unit dBm Example CALC DLIN 20dBm Sets the display line threshold to 20 dBm CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DLINe STATe lt State gt This command turns display lines on and off The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DLIN STAT OFF Turns on the display line Limit Lines The following commands define limit lines and perform the corresponding limit checks Remote Control Commande List of commands e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt BEEP STATe o
261. monic levels or harmonic ratios because it can resolve different signals in the frequency domain With marker functions you can speed up measurement tasks like that A signal generator e g R amp S SMBV provides the signal source Test setup Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Signal generator settings e Frequency 100 MHz User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 67 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started e Level 20 dBm Detecting harmonics 1 Press the PRESET key The R amp S Spectrum Rider is reset to its default state After the preset the R amp S Spectrum Rider displays the frequency spectrum over its full frequency span At 100 MHz the generator signal is displayed as a vertical line In addition you can see the harmonics as smaller vertical lines at frequencies that are multiples of 100 MHz To measure the second harmonic ratio decrease the span 2 Press the FREQ key 3 Select the Start softkey at the Measurement footer bar The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an entry box to enter the start frequency 4 Enter a start frequency of 50 MHz 5 Confirm the entry with one of the unit keys 6 Select the Stop softkey at the Measurement footer bar The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an entry box to enter the stop frequency 7 Enter a stop frequency of 250 MHz 8 Confirm the entry with one of the unit keys The R amp S Spectrum Rider displays the fre
262. mpleted Event types To use the Save on Event functionality you have to select an event type that triggers the capture of the selected data The R amp S Spectrum Rider supports several event types Single sweeps and sweep time It is not possible to save measurement data every lt x gt seconds in single sweep mode because the R amp S Spectrum Rider only performs one sweep and then stops The time interval must be longer than the sweep time If the time interval would be shorter the R amp S Spectrum Rider would not be able to save data because a sweep has to be complete before the R amp S Spectrum Rider is able to save the data 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the User Preference softkey 3 Select the Event Source menu item and select an event type from the drop down menu e Time Interval Saves measurement data every lt x gt seconds You can define the duration of the time interval via the Time Interval menu item e Limit failure Saves measurement data if a limit line is violated R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions ES A SS 4 8 The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides different modes for handling limit check fail ures You can select one via the Limits Save Mode Start on failure starts to save measurement data if a limit line is violated Stop on failure stops to save measurement data if a limit line is violated Save only failure saves only the sweeps that actually fail a limit chec
263. mponente m s all del funcionamiento previsto pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas polvos con contenido de metales pesados como p ej plomo berilio o n quel Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por personal especializado con formaci n adecuada Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar da os para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminaci n de residuos En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que deban tratarse como residuos especiales p ej refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de cambio definidos deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminaci n de residuos Tenga en cuenta tambi n en caso necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentaci n del producto La eliminaci n incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar da os a la salud o da os al medio ambiente Se puede encontrar m s informaci n sobre la protecci n del medio ambiente en la p gina web de Rohde 8 Schwarz 1171 0000 42 08 Page 14 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Lesen und beachten Sie unbedingt die nachfolgenden Anweisungen und Sicherheitshinweise Alle Werke und Standorte der Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe sind st ndig bem ht den Sicherheitsstandard unserer Produkte auf dem aktuellsten Stand zu halten und unseren
264. n For mat Default Data set Name Dataset HW SW Hardware Instrument info Model Instrument Serial Num ber Softkey Menu or Dialog items Mainboard Part Number Mainboard Revision Mainboard Serial Num ber Frontboad Part Number Frontboard Revision Frontboard Serial Num ber Controller Version Software Installed Options Software Version Option Administration nn Install Option Zn Installation Status 10 1 2 File Management Parameters selection General Functions The SAVE RECALL key opens the file manager that contains functionality to manage datasets and other files Softkey Menu or Dialog items Recall Save COS ES Virtual Keyboard see chapter 3 2 4 On screen Keyboard on page 41 Quick Naming see chapter 4 8 1 3 Quick Naming of Datasets on page 93 Import Export Change Item Auto Insert OK Parameters selection Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters Parameters selection CS Preview SR EE 10 1 3 Operating Mode Selection The MODE key opens the mode menu that contains functionality to select the operat ing mode of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Spectrum See chapter 5 Spec trum Analyzer Mode on page 99 Power Meter See chapter 6 Power Meter R amp S FPH K9 on page 135 10 2 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer This
265. n Measurement Settings Time domain measurements You can also activate time domain measurements without having to enter the value manually When measuring in the time domain the span is 0 Hz In that state the R amp S Spectrum Rider measures the signal at the current center frequency only Instead of displaying the spectrum the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the signal power over a cer tain time period The horizontal axis becomes the time axis The display always starts at O s and stops after the currently set sweep time 1 Press the SPAN key 2 Press the Zero Span softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider sets a span of 0 Hz and performs the measurement in the time domain Configuring the Vertical Axis All relevant settings to configure the vertical axis are available in the amplitude menu You can access it via the AMPT key e Setting the Reference Level ss 104 e Setting a Display Range ss 105 e Selecting the Display D E 105 e Setting a Reference Offset 106 e Setting the RF Attenuaton ses 106 e Using the Preamplifier R amp S EH BZ 108 e Setting the Input Impedance nenne nennen 108 e Tee Transducer Face enden 108 Setting the Reference Level The reference level is represented graphically by the grid line at the top of the diagram The reference level sets the input signal gain up to the display stage If the reference level is low the gain is high That means that even weak signals are displayed clearly If
266. n oder Steckdosenleisten ist sicher zustellen dass diese regelm ig auf ihren sicherheitstechnischen Zustand berpr ft werden Sofern das Produkt nicht mit einem Netzschalter zur Netztrennung ausger stet ist beziehungsweise der vorhandene Netzschalter zu Netztrennung nicht geeignet ist so ist der Stecker des Anschlusskabels als Trennvorrichtung anzusehen Die Trennvorrichtung muss jederzeit leicht erreichbar und gut zug nglich sein Ist z B der Netzstecker die Trennvorrichtung darf die L nge des Anschlusskabels 3 m nicht berschreiten Funktionsschalter oder elektronische Schalter sind zur Netztrennung nicht geeignet Werden Produkte ohne Netzschalter in Gestelle oder Anlagen integriert so ist die Trennvorrichtung auf Anlagenebene zu verlagern Benutzen Sie das Produkt niemals wenn das Netzkabel besch digt ist berpr fen Sie regelm ig den einwandfreien Zustand der Netzkabel Stellen Sie durch geeignete Schutzma nahmen und Verlegearten sicher dass das Netzkabel nicht besch digt werden kann und niemand z B durch Stolperfallen oder elektrischen Schlag zu Schaden kommen kann Der Betrieb ist nur an TN TT Versorgungsnetzen gestattet die mit h chstens 16 A abgesichert sind h here Absicherung nur nach R cksprache mit der Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe Stecken Sie den Stecker nicht in verstaubte oder verschmutzte Steckdosen buchsen Stecken Sie die Steckverbindung vorrichtung fest und vollst ndig in die daf r vorgeseh
267. n or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells can cause explosions Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see parts list in order to ensure the safety of the product Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste Rechargeable batteries and normal batteries that contain lead mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste Observe the national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling Transport 1 The product may be very heavy Therefore the product must be handled with care In some cases the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product e g with a lift truck to avoid back or other physical injuries Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport or lifting Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport or lifting Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely and
268. n page 207 e CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt COMMent on page 207 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt DEFine on page 207 e CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt DELete on page 208 e CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt FAIL on page 208 e CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt LOWer SELect on page 209 e CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt LOWer THReshold on page 209 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt STATe on page 209 e CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt UNIT X on page 210 e CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt UNIT Y on page 210 e CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt UPPer SELect on page 210 e CAlLCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt UPPer THReshold on page 210 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt BEEP STATe lt State gt This command turns the beeper that beeps if a limit line is violated on and off The numeric suffix at CAL Culate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM BEEP ON Activates the audio beep CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt COMMent This command queries the description of a limit line This command is a query and therefore has no RST value The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Example CALC LIM COMM Queries the description of limit l
269. n status register 9 6 9 4 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI register The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE is the associated ENABle part It can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ESE Table 9 6 Meaning of the bits in the event status register Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 242 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue Command Error This bit is set if a command
270. name specified there This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Parameters lt SourceFile gt String containing the path and file name of the source file lt Destination gt String containing the path and name of the destination file Example MMEM MOVE Public Screen Shots Screen0002 png Public Screen Shots Screen0001 png Renames Screen0002 png to Screen0001 png MMEM MOVE Public Screen Shots Screen0001 png Public Test Picl png Moves file Screen0006 png to the Test folder and renames the file Pic1 png Usage Setting only MMEMory RDIRectory lt DirectoryName gt This command deletes the indicated directory The directory name includes the path and may also include the drive name The path name complies with DOS conventions This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Parameters lt DirectoryName gt String containing the path of the directory to delete 9 6 5 Remote Control Commands Example MMEM RDIR Public Screen Shots Deletes the directory Screen Shots Usage Setting only MMEMory STORe STATe lt 1 gt lt TargetFile gt This command stores the current device settings in a set file This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Parameters lt 1 gt lt TargetFile gt Example MMEM STOR STAT 1 DATASETO01 SET Saves the current device settings in the file DATASET001 SET Usage Setting only
271. nd Protocols 9 1 3 Protocols VXI 11 Basics The VXI 11 standard is based on the ONC RPC protocol which in turn relies on TCP IP as the network transport layer The TCP IP network protocol and the associated net work services are preconfigured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this protocol messages cannot be lost Remote control of an instrument via a network is based on standardized protocols which follow the OSI reference model see Fig below Presentation XDR VXI 11 ONC RPC TCP UDP Fig 9 1 Example for LAN remote control based on the OSI reference model Based on TCP UDP messages between the controller and the instrument are exchanged via open network computing ONC remote procedure calls RPC With XDR VXI 11 legal RPC messages are known as VXI 11 standard Based on this standard messages are exchanged between the controller and the instrument The messages are identical with SCPI commands They can be organized in four groups e program messages control command to the instrument e response messages values returned by the instrument e service request spontaneous queries of the instrument e low level control messages interface messages A VXI 11 link between a controller and an instrument uses three channels core abort and interrupt channel Instrument control is mainly performed on t
272. ng a block data parameter has the following structure Example HEADer HEADer 45168xxxxxxxx ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmis sion of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted Structure of aProgram Message A program message may consist of one or several commande It is terminated by the program message terminator which is the NL New Line character for LAN and USB connections Several commands in a program message must be separated by a semicolon Ifthe next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon A colon at the beginning of a command marks the root node of the command tree Example CALL InstrWrite analyzer SENSe FREQuency CENTer 100MHz INPut ATTenuation 10 This program message contains two commands The first one is part of the SENSe command system and is used to determine the center frequency of the instrument The second one is part of the INPut command system and sets the input signal attenuation If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several levels in common the program message can be abbreviated For that purpose the second command after the semicolon starts wi
273. ng the number of digits of the following number of data bytes 4 in this example 2524 representing the number of following data bytes 2524 corresponds to the 631 sweep points of the R amp S Spectrum Rider lt value gt representing 4 byte floating point value Example FORM ASC Selects the ASCii data format 9 6 2 6 Using Markers The following commands control the operation of marker delta markers and marker functions Markers and Delta Markers The following commands are for setting and controlling markers and deltamarkers List of commands e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt STATe on page 193 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt A0OFF on page 193 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt MAXimum PEAK on page 193 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1l 6 gt MAXimum NEXT on page 194 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt MINimum PEAK on page 194 e CALCulate lt 1l1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt X on page 194 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt X RELative on page 195 e CALCulate lt 1 4 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt Y on page 195 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt STATe on page 196 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt AOFF on page 196 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt l 6 gt MAXimum PEAK on page 196 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt MAXimum NEXT on page 197 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt MINim
274. nicht in den Restm ll gelangen Akkumulatoren oder Batterien die Blei Quecksilber oder Cadmium enthalten sind Sonderabfall Beachten Sie hierzu die landesspezifischen Entsorgungs und Recycling Bestimmungen Transport 1 Das Produkt kann ein hohes Gewicht aufweisen Daher muss es vorsichtig und ggf unter Verwendung eines geeigneten Hebemittels z B Hubwagen bewegt bzw transportiert werden um R ckensch den oder Verletzungen zu vermeiden Griffe an den Produkten sind eine Handhabungshilfe die ausschlie lich f r den Transport des Produkts durch Personen vorgesehen ist Es ist daher nicht zul ssig Griffe zur Befestigung an bzw auf Transportmitteln z B Kr nen Gabelstaplern Karren etc zu verwenden Es liegt in Ihrer Verantwortung die Produkte sicher an bzw auf geeigneten Transport oder Hebemitteln zu befestigen Beachten Sie die Sicherheitsvorschriften des jeweiligen Herstellers eingesetzter Transport oder Hebemittel um Personensch den und Sch den am Produkt zu vermeiden Falls Sie das Produkt in einem Fahrzeug benutzen liegt es in der alleinigen Verantwortung des Fahrers das Fahrzeug in sicherer und angemessener Weise zu f hren Der Hersteller bernimmt keine Verantwortung f r Unf lle oder Kollisionen Verwenden Sie das Produkt niemals in einem sich bewegenden Fahrzeug sofern dies den Fahrzeugf hrer ablenken k nnte Sichern Sie das Produkt im Fahrzeug ausreichend ab um im Falle eines Unfalls Verletzungen oder Sch
275. not used QUE Stionable LIMit Fig 9 7 Overview of the status registers 9 6 9 3 Status Byte STB amp Service Request Enable Register SRE The STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough overview of the instru ment status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers It can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STATUS BYTE is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STB is linked to the SRE The latter corresponds to the ENABle part of the SCPI registers in its function Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a service request SRQ is generated which triggers an interrupt in the controller if this is appropriately configured and can be further processed there The SRE can be set using the command SRE and read using the command SRE R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands Table 9 5 Meaning of the bits used in the Status Byte Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a service request Thus an error can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue
276. nstru ment settings Table 9 12 Resetting the status reporting system Event Switching DCL SDC on supply voltage Power On Device RST or STA CLS Status Clear Clear SYS Tus PRESet Selected Tem PRE Device Effect Clear STB ESR Clear SRE ESE Clear PPE Clear EVENt parts of the registers Clear ENABle parts of all OPERation and QUEStionable regis ters Fill ENABle parts of all other reg isters with 1 Fill PT Ransition parts with 1 Clear NTRansition parts Clear command pro cessing and input buffer 1 Every command being the first in a program message i e immediately following a lt PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR clears the output buffer Remote Commands of the Status Reporting System The following commands control the status reporting system RST does not influence the status registers Remote Control Commande The OPERation status register contains information about the calibration status of the instrument The QUEStionable status register contains information about the status of the refer ence and local oscillator possible overloads of the instrument and the status of limit checks and limit margins The commands are independent from the operating mode List of commands e STATus PRESet on page 249 e STATus QUEue NEXT on page 249 e STATus OPERation EVENt on page 249 e STATus OPERation CONDition on page 249 e STATus OPERation ENABle on page 249 e STATus OPERation NTR
277. ntra sobretensi n debida p ej a una ca da del rayo mediante los correspondientes sistemas de protecci n Si no el personal que lo utilice quedar expuesto al peligro de choque el ctrico No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y o puede causar choques el ctricos fuego o lesiones Salvo indicaci n contraria los productos no est n impermeabilizados ver tambi n el cap tulo Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento punto 1 Por eso es necesario tomar las medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de l quidos En caso contrario existe peligro de choque el ctrico para el usuario o de da os en el producto que tambi n pueden redundar en peligro para las personas No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de ste como p ej al desplazarlo de un lugar fr o a otro caliente La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque el ctrico Antes de la limpieza desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentaci n de tensi n p ej red de alimentaci n o bater a Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un pa o suave que no se deshilache No utilice bajo ning n concepto productos de limpieza qu micos como alcohol acetona o diluyentes para lacas nitrocelul sicas 1171 0000 42 08 Page 11 Instrucciones
278. ntries e g in dB or dimensionless values all units have the value 1 as multiplying factor Thus they also act like a enter key function CANCEL key Closes all kinds of dialog boxes if the edit mode is not active Quits the edit mode if the edit mode is active In dialog boxes that contain a Cancel button it activates that button For Edit dialog boxes the following mechanism is used e Ifdata entry has been started it retains the original value and closes the dialog box e If data entry has not been started or has been completed it closes the dialog box BACK key If an alphanumeric entry has already been started this key deletes the character to the left of the cursor Note If an entry is confirmed with enter the back key restores the value entered before This can be used to toggle for example between two frequencies 3 2 5 7 Navigation Controls The rotary knob provides navigation controls in the display or within dialog boxes The rotary knob has several functions e Increments clockwise direction or decrements counter clockwise direction the instrument parameters at a defined step width in the case of a numeric entry e Shifts markers limit lines and display lines on the screen e Moves the scroll bar vertically if the scroll bar is in focused e Acts as the enter key when pressed 3 2 6 Managing Options For special measurement tasks you can equip the R amp S Spectrum Rider with various firmware o
279. o VBW 3 MHz Auto Delay SWT 50 ms Auto Detector Mode Manual The Config Overview window is divided into six categories EE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 39 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started Table 3 3 Corresponding dialog box of Config Overview window Config Overview Block Corresponding Dialog Box Select Input to configure RF impedance and the USB con nector for the power sensor input RF Impedance 500 Power Sensor Select Amplitude to configure reference level reference offset preamplifier R amp S FPH B22 Ref Level 30 dBm order number 1321 0680 02 Ref Offset Ode RF attenuation level and mode Att Mode Manual LE It also provides configuration to set the transducer table used in Att 0 dB the signal measurement Note When the optional pream plifier R amp S FPH B22 is absent the menu item RF Preamplifier is not available D Select Frequency to configure the center frequency frequency offset and span of the spectrum Center Freq 2 GHz measurement Span 4 GHz Start Freq 0 Hz Stop Freq 4 GHz Select Bandwidth to configure Al D resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and sweep time for RBW 3 MHz Manual eem the spectrum measurement VBW 300 kHz Manual SWT 102 ms Manual Auto Manual EE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 40 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started Select Analysis to configure trace mode trace detector and
280. o 100 with 100 being the loud est 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob Setting the system beeper volume The system beeper volume sets the volume of the system beeper of the R amp S Spec trum Rider used i e if a message box pops up 1 Inthe Instrument Setup dialog box select the System Beeper Volume item 2 Enter the volume you want with the numeric keys User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 93 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started REESEN The system beeper volume is a percentage from 0 to 100 with 100 being the loudest 3 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob Activating Deactivating audio alert in case of a power overload on and off In case the R amp S Spectrum Rider detects an overload at one of its inputs you can con figure it to make a sound 1 Inthe Instrument Setup dialog box select the Beep on Power Overload item 2 Select Beep on Power Overload to On When this beeper is turned on the R amp S Spectrum Rider will make a sound every time it detects an overload 3 2 7 6 Configuring Power Supply The Current Power Source shows the source the R amp S Spectrum Rider is currently powered by When you are using the battery to supply the R amp S Spectrum Rider with power the remaining Battery Level is displayed as a percentage with 100 representing a full charge The power sets the low power indicator on the power supply of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Power Supply
281. of the first limit line Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt UPPer SELect lt LimitLine gt This command selects the upper limit line This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Parameters lt LimitLine gt String containing the file name of the upper limit line Example CALC LIM UPP SEL GSM Upper rellim Selects the upper limit line Usage Setting only CALCulate lt 1 4 gt LIMit lt 1 2 gt UPPer THReshold lt Threshold gt This command defines the level of an upper threshold limit line 9 6 3 9 6 3 1 Remote Control Commands The numeric suffix at CALCulate is irrelevant for this command The numeric suffix at LIMit selects the limit line Parameters lt Threshold gt Numeric value whose unit depends on the unit you have cur rently selected for the vertical axis Default unit dBm Example CALC LIM UPP THR 10DBM Defines a threshold of 10 dBm Remote Commands of the Power Meter The chapter provides information on remote commands that configure and perform power measurements with the power sensor These commands are available in power meter mode only Availability of remote commands for Power Sensor measurements Note that the listed remote commands take effect only if a power sensor is connected Contents e chapter 9 6 3
282. of the horizontal axis Default unit GHz Example CALC DELT3 X REL 5 kHz Sets the delta marker at a distance of 5 kHz to the reference position CALCulate lt 1 4 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt Y This command queries the vertical position of a delta marker The result is always a relative value in relation marker 1 If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end between activating the delta marker and reading out the result this is only possible in single sweep mode In spectrum analyzer mode the unit depends on the unit you have set and the scaling of the vertical axis Parameter or measuring functions Output unit DBM DBPW DBUV DBMV DBUA dB lin log WATT VOLT AMPere dB lin log The numeric suffix at CAL Culate selects the trace The numeric suffix at DELTamarker selects the deltamarker Parameters lt MarkerPosition gt Remote Control Commands Example INIT CONT OFF CALC DELT2 ON Turns on single sweep mode and delta marker 2 INIT WAIL Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALCEDELT2 Y gt Queries the position of delta marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt STATe lt State gt This command turns markers on and off If you do not use a suffix at MARKer marker 1 is selected If one or more delta mark ers 2 to 6 are already ac
283. og items Parameters selection VBW Manual 1 Hz 3 Hz 10 Hz 30 Hz 100Hz 300 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz 10 kHz 30 kHz 100 kHz 300 kHz 1 MHz 3 MHz Analysis Analysis for Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold Average T1 Average Count Trace Math Off Trace Memory Memory Trace Manual Auto Peak Max Peak Min Peak Sample RMS Trigger Trigger Mode Free Run Video External Rise External Fall Trigger Level 0 100 Delay Trigger Input Reference Input LAN Setup Address e Seel COR Date and Time Regional Language English French German Spanish Italian Por tuguese Japanese Chinese Korean Russian Hungarian Traditional Chinese Date Format dd mm yyyy mm dd yyyy Display Display 0 50 Backlight Keyboard 0 50 Backlight Keyboard 1 10s Backlight Analysis for 12 Delay General Functions Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters Parameters selection Audio Key Click 0 100 Volume System 0 100 Beeper Vol ume Beep on On Off Power Over board Power Current Power Source Battery Level Battery Low Level Battery Low Repetitive Once Off Level Beep Reset Reset Fac Factory Reset tory Settings User Pref Site Name erence Preset Key Preset Mode User Defined Default Preset Data set On Off Working Directory User working directory Working directory Default File name Capture Filename Counter Starts at Capture PNG JPG Scree
284. ommand defines a frequency offset Parameters lt FreqOffset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Default unit GHz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Defines a frequency offset of 1 GHz Remote Control Commands SENSe FREQuency SPAN lt FrequencySpan gt This command defines the frequency span If you set a span of 0 Hz the R amp S Spectrum Rider starts a measurement in the time domain Parameters lt FrequencySpan gt Range Specified in the data sheet Rol fmax with fmax maximum frequency Default unit GHz Example FREQ SPAN 10MHz Defines a span of 10 MHz SENSe FREQuency SPAN AUTO lt State gt This command turns the automatic calculation of the ideal span on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FREQ SPAN AUTO ON Turns automatic span determination on and off SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL This command restores the full span This command is an event and therefore has no query and no RST value Example FREO SPAN FULL Restores full span Usage Event SENSe FREQuency STARt lt StartFrequency gt This command defines the start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain span gt 0 Parameters lt StartFrequency gt Range Depends on the operating mode and is specified in the datasheet RST O Hz Default unit GHz Example FREQ STAR 20MHz Defines a start frequency of 20 MHz 9 6 2 2 Remote Control Commands SENSe FREQuency
285. on page 230 e sySTem COMMunicate LAN GATeway on page 230 e sySTem COMMunicate LAN SUBMask on page 231 e SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet ADDRess on page 231 e SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet DHCP STATe on page 231 e SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet PORT on page 231 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ETHernet This command queries the MAC address of the R amp S Spectrum Rider This command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example SYST COMM LAN ETH Returns the MAC address SYSTem COMMunicate LAN GATeway lt Gateway gt This command sets the gateway in the LAN Parameters lt Gateway gt String containing the identifier of the gateway 9 6 8 5 Remote Control Commands SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SUBMask lt Submask gt This command sets the subnet mask of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Parameters lt Submask gt String containing the subnet mask x x x x RST 255 255 255 0 Example SYST COMMFTLANSSUBM 255255425950 Sets the subnet mask address to 255 255 255 0 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet ADDRess lt IPAddress gt This command sets the IP address of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Parameters lt PAddress gt String containing the IP address x x x x RST 172 76 68 24 Example SYST COMMsSOCK ADDR 172 710 08 30 Sets the IP address of theR amp S Spectrum Rider to 172 76 68 30 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet DHCP S
286. oned on one of these measurement points The R amp S Spectrum Rider cal culates the marker frequency from the frequency of the measurement point the center frequency and the frequency span that have been set The measurement point resolu A A AAA User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 66 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started tion and consequently the accuracy of the marker frequency readout therefore depend on the frequency span that has been selected The R amp S Spectrum Rider has a frequency counter to increase the accuracy of the marker frequency readout It completes the sweep then counts the frequency at the marker position 1 Press the Marker Function softkey at the Parameter view 2 Select the Frequency Count from the menu item The measurement result of the frequency counter is displayed at the Measurement result view When the frequency counter is active the resolution of the frequency readout is always 0 1 Hz regardless of the span The accuracy is determined by the internal reference frequency which is far more exact than that of the pixel oriented marker readout Spectrum za ee 18 6 2015 Frequency Count CH M1 500 MHz 20 dBm 10 dB ON 3 MHz 3 MHz uhh 110 0 20 ms Ge Center 500 MHz Tracei Clear Detect Auto Peak Trig Free Span 20 MHz New Marker Delete Marker Select Marker Marker Function Set Marker 3 3 1 4 Measuring Harmonics A spectrum analyzer is ideal to measure har
287. oquer des chocs lectriques des incendies et ou des blessures graves pouvant ventuellement entra ner la mort 1171 0000 43 08 Page 3 Consignes de securite fondamentales Securite electrique Si les consignes relatives a la s curit lectrique ne sont pas ou sont insuffisamment respect es il peut s ensuivre des chocs electriques des incendies et ou des blessures graves pouvant eventuellement entrainer la mort 1 10 11 Avant chaque mise sous tension du produit il faut s assurer que la tension nominale r gl e sur le produit correspond la tension nominale du r seau lectrique S il est n cessaire de modifier le reglage de la tension il faut remplacer le fusible du produit le cas echeant L utilisation des produits du degr de protection pourvus d un cable d alimentation mobile et d un connecteur n est autoris e qu avec des prises munies d un contact de protection et d un conducteur de protection raccorde Toute deconnexion intentionnelle du conducteur de protection dans le cable ou dans le produit lui m me est interdite Elle entraine un risque de choc lectrique au niveau du produit En cas d utilisation de cables prolongateurs ou de multiprises ceux ci doivent tre examin s r guli rement quant a leur etat de securite technique Si le produit n est pas dot d un interrupteur d alimentation pour le couper du r seau lectrique ou Si l interrupteur d alimentation disponible n est pas appropri
288. ory stick or SD card If both are connected the R amp S Spectrum Rider uses the SD card If no external device is available the R amp S Spectrum Rider stores the screenshot in its internal memory until the internal memory is full In that case you can transfer the screenshots with the R amp S Instrument View software to your computer Saving screenshot and dataset at the same time Depending on the Capture settings available in the User Preference menu using the key also saves a dataset in addition to the screenshot For more information see chapter 4 8 Managing Datasets on page 88 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 85 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions ASE En 4 7 Screenshot file name and file format All screenshots get a default filename Screenshot The files also get numbers HH in ascending order beginning with 0000 You can select a default filename and a starting number in the User Preference menu The file format of screenshots is either png or jpg depending on your configuration in the User Preference menu 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the User Preference softkey 3 Select the Default Filename and Filename Counter Starts At items and assign a filename and number as you wish 4 Select the Capture Screen Format items to select the screenshot file format Measurement 0096 Previewing screenshots The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides functionality
289. ot dispose it in fire Switching the Instrument On and Off Switching the instrument on The instrument can be powered with an AC or DC battery operated or via car adapter input See chapter 3 1 1 4 Using the AC Adapter on page 21 Press the POWER key to switch on the instrument A green LED shows that the instrument is in operation mode See details in chapter 3 1 1 5 Battery Operation on page 22 During booting the R amp S Spectrum Rider displays a splash screen to indicate the oper able frequency range of the instrument If frequency upgrade option has been installed the splash screen will show 5 kHz to 3 GHz for R amp S FPH B3 option or 5 kHz to 4 GHz for R amp S FPH B4 option The spalsh screen shows 5kHz to 2 GHz by default Depending on the frequency upgrade option installed the respective splash screen is loaded Refer to the instrument brochure for the list of options available After booting the instrument is ready for operation AA User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 25 Preparing for Use R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Handheld Spectrum Analyzer 9 KHz to 4 GHz Booting please wait Switching the instrument off Press the POWER key to switch off the instrument A blue LED RW button indicates that the battery is fully charged a blinking blue LED shows that the battery charging is in process See chapter 3 1 1 5 Battery Operation on page 22 In case the battery is not inserted into
290. other than the Spectrum application be sure to check the specific application or mode description for settings that may deviate from these com mon settings e Configuration CVervlew ii isienesreneseenesreneseeneseeneseeeeseennes 99 e Configuring the Horizontal Axis 100 e Configuring the Vertical Avis 104 e Seting Bandwidihs coincidente iii 108 e Configuring and Triggering the Sweep 111 SENTIER Eed reesen EAR E DE Ee eege 114 e Pona PIKO eege 119 A A 128 Configuration Overview The Configuration Overview provides an overview on the most important currently defined settings for the spectrum measurement See Configuration Overview on page 39 It is displayed when you select the Config Overview icon which is availa ble at the bottom of Parameter View See chapter 3 2 3 4 Parameter View on page 37 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode H A Ref Level 20 dBm Center Freq 2 GHz RF Impedance 500 Ref Offset OdB Span 4 GHz Power Sensor AttMode Manual Start Freq 0 Hz Att 0 dB Stop Freg 4GHz X A D Trace Mode Clear Wnte Source External Rise REW 3 MHz Auto VEW 3 MHz Auto Delay Os SWT 50 ms Auto Detector Mode Manual The Configuration Overview provides quick access and allows easy configuration on the parameters that affect the spectrum measurement from input to signal processing to output and signal analysis by stepping through each of the following dialog boxes
291. ower Meter Table 10 10 Pulse Power Measurement nn Tee eme EN zo Trigger Hysteresis 0 1 to 10 dB Dropout Time O to 10s 10 3 6 Limits Line Parameters SS BEE BE BEE IO Trigger Free Run The LINES key opens a menu that contains functionality to configure the limits line Table 10 11 Power Meter Channel Power Meter Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Upper Limit Set Threshold Lower Limit Set Threshold 10 3 7 Trace Parameteres The TRACE key opens a menu that contains functionality to configure the trace Table 10 12 Pulse Power Measurement Trace Mode Functions of the Power Meter Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection ES 10 3 8 Marker Parameters The MARKER key opens a menu that contains functionality to configure the marker on the trace Table 10 13 Pulse Power Measurement with trace mode Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection CCS ES Delete Marker Delete Selected Delete All Delta Delete All BEE IEA BEE IS BEE BE Set Marke Center Marker Freq Ref Level Marker Level 11 11 1 How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Appendix In this appendix additional information on how a spectrum analyzer works is given How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Basically it is possible to measure and analyze RF signals either in the time domain or the frequency domain Measurements in the time domain show signal variations over time You can perform these w
292. oyens de transport ou de levage utilis s pour viter des dommages corporels et des d g ts sur le produit L utilisation du produit dans un v hicule se fait sous l unique responsabilit du conducteur qui doit piloter le v hicule de mani re sure et appropri e Le fabricant d cline toute responsabilit en cas d accidents ou de collisions Ne jamais utiliser le produit dans un v hicule en mouvement si cela pouvait d tourner l attention du conducteur S curiser suffisamment le produit dans le v hicule pour emp cher des blessures ou dommages de tout type en cas d accident limination des d chets 1 Au terme de leur dur e de vie les batteries ou accumulateurs qui ne peuvent pas tre limin s avec les d chets m nagers peuvent uniquement tre limin s par des points de collecte appropri s ou par un centre de service apr s vente Rohde amp Schwarz 1171 0000 43 08 Page Consignes de securite fondamentales 2 Auterme de sa dur e de vie un produit ne peut pas tre limin avec les d chets m nagers normaux mais doit tre collect s par ment Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG a d velopp un concept d elimination des d chets et assume toutes les obligations en mati re de reprise et d limination valables pour les fabricants au sein de PUE Veuillez vous adresser a votre centre de service apres vente Rohde amp Schwarz pour liminer le produit de maniere cologique 3 Siles produits ou leurs
293. p S FPH K29 8 2 4 8 2 5 while the Max Peak detector displays the highest values that have been measured on each pixel 1 Press the Detect softkey 2 Select the detector you prefer Triggering Measurements In its default state the R amp S Spectrum Rider starts a measurement on completion of the previous measurement Free Run measurements However you can also perform triggered measurements with the power sensor When you choose to do so the trigger event the moment when the actual measurement starts is either a rising slope in the signal or a falling slope Positive or Negative trigger 1 Press the SWEEP key 2 Press the Trigger softkey 3 Select either the Positive or Negative menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider stops measuring the signal until a trigger event occurs In case of triggered measurements you have to define a trigger level by which the sig nal must rise or fall in order to be recognized 1 Press the SWEEP softkey 2 Press the Trigger softkey 3 Select either the Trigger Level menu item and define a trigger level In addition you can define a trigger delay time The trigger delay time defines a time that must pass after the trigger event has occurred before the measurement starts A negative trigger delay time is called a pre trigger 1 Press the SWEEP softkey 2 Press the Trigger softkey 3 Select either the Trigger Delay menu item and define a delay tim
294. pectrum Rider recognizes a power sensor it sets up a connection via the interface and after a few seconds shows the measured power If no power sensor has been connected or is not connected appropriately the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows nothing If there are communication problems between the R amp S Spectrum Rider and the power sensor the R amp S Spectrum Rider displays an error message that indicates a possible cause For more information see the R amp S Spectrum Rider user manual Zeroing the power sensor To compensate internal offsets of the power meter it needs to be compensated for before starting the measurement 1 Press the Zero softkey Do not to apply any signals to the power sensor while zeroing is active A popup message box is displayed to provide instructions during the zeroing of the power sensor Disconnect the power sensor from any signal sources Press the Continue softkey to start zeroing The R amp S Spectrum Rider starts the zeroing process Wait for the zeroing process to finish R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started After zeroing is done the R amp S Spectrum Rider displays the message Power Sen sor Zero OK and again shows the power sensor softkey menu 5 Connect the DUT to the power sensor The R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the measured power level in dBm Power Meter NRP 71 sam 01 04 2015 1932 20 0 dBm 9 0 dB a d B m Normal 3 96 70 dBm Freq 2 GHz oS Frequ
295. ple SYST LANG english Sets the system language to English SYSTem LANGuage CATalog This command lists all languages available for the user interface This command is a query and therefore no RST value Example SYST LANG CAT Usage Query only SYSTem POWer SOURce This command queries the current R amp S Spectrum Rider power source This command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example SYST POW SOUR Usage Query only SYSTem POWer STATus This command queries the remaining power of the battery This command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example SYST POW STAT Usage Query only SYSTem PRESet Resets the R amp S Spectrum Rider to its default state or a state defined by the user depending on SYSTem PRESet MODE This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Example SYST PRES Usage Event Remote Control Commands SYSTem PRESet FACTory This command initiates an instrument reset back to factory settings This command is an event and therefore has no query and no RST value Example SYST PRES FACT Resets the R amp S Spectrum Rider to its factory settings Usage Event SYSTem PRESet MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the preset mode Parameters lt Mode gt DEFault USER DEFault Default preset state USER User defined preset state Example SYST PRES MODE USER Selects a user defined preset SYSTem PRESet USER lt PathName gt
296. properly The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident 1171 0000 42 08 Page 6 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Waste disposal Environmental protection 1 Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection point or via a Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center 2 Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for take back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product 3 If products or their components are mechanically and or thermally processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal
297. ption on the instrument s functions In this manual a detailed description on the instrument s functions are provided Fur thermore it provides a detailed description of the instrument s remote control com mands and information on the instrument s status reporting system It covers the following topics e Instructions on how to set up and operate the R amp S Spectrum Rider in its various operating modes e Instructions on how to perform measurements with the R amp S Spectrum Rider e Instructions on how to work with the available software options and applications Service Manual The Service Manual provides information on maintenance It covers the following topics e Instructions on how to perform a performance test e Instructions on how to repair the R amp S Spectrum Rider including a spare parts list e Mechanical drawings R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Preface Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The cur rent release notes are provided on the Internet Internet Site The internet site at hitp www rohde schwarz com product fph html provides the most up to date information on the R amp S Spectrum Rider The most recent manuals are avail able as printable PDF files in the download area Also provided
298. ptions 3 2 6 1 3 2 6 2 3 2 6 3 Instrument Tour Enabling Options To enable options you have to enter akey code The key code is based on the unique serial number of the R amp S Spectrum Rider 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Select the Installed Options softkey A list of all available options and the current status of the options is displayed See chapter 3 1 3 Checking the Supplied Options on page 27 3 Select the Install Option button from the dialog box The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an entry field to enter the option key 4 Enter in the appropriate option key 5 Confirm the entry with the rotary knob If you have entered the correct code the instrument displays a message installa tion successful If you have entered an incorrect code the instrument displays message invalid key code 6 Enter the correct code again Checking Options In the Setup menu the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows all options that are currently installed 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Select the Installed Options softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider shows a list of all available options and the current status of the option e Installed This means that the option is installed and working e Demo This means that the option is for demo purposes and it has an expiry date e Removed lt option key gt This indicates that a portable license has been removed from the R amp S Spectrum Rider and is ready to be tr
299. quency spectrum in the range from 50 MHz to 250 MHz This frequency range visualizes the signal itself at 100 MHz and the second harmonic at 200 MHz Spectrum 111 M1 100 MHz 100 MHz 18 6 2015 15 46 30 0 20 dBm 40 0 50 0 10 dB 60 0 ON 30 kHz 30 kHz 1 113 e Le 90 MHz Clear Auto Peak Free 290 MHz New Marker Marker Type Delete Marker Select Marker Marker Function Set Marker To measure the harmonic ratio set the marker on the signal and a delta marker on the second harmonic 9 Press the MARKER key BESSE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 68 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 Trying Out the Instrument The R amp S Spectrum Rider sets a marker on the trace maximum The trace maxi mum corresponds to the signal 10 Select the New Marker softkey at the Measurement footer bar The R amp S Spectrum Rider activates a delta marker and places it on the next trace maximum This corresponds to the second harmonic The harmonic ratio is the vertical distance of the marker and the delta marker The R amp S Spectrum Rider displays this value in the Measurement result view Using a Power Sensor For highly accurate power measurements you can connect one of the power sensors that are supported by the R amp S Spectrum Rider R amp S Spectrum Rider option R amp S FPH K9 order number 1321 0709 02 option is required to operate the R amp S Spectrum Rider in power sensor mode For a list of R amp S Spectrum Rider suppo
300. r event and the measurement The range of the trigger delay is from O s to 100 s The resolution depends on the sub range 1 ms to 10 ms 100 u S 10 ms to 100 ms 1m User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 113 5 1 6 1 Common Measurement Settings Press the SWEEP key 4 Press the Trigger softkey Select the Trigger Delay menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the trigger delay Enter the delay time you need Defining the Trigger Level When you are using the video trigger you have to define a trigger level The trigger level is a percentage of the reference level A trigger level of 100 is the same as the reference level A trigger level of e g 50 corresponds to the middle of the vertical axis The R amp S Spectrum Rider indicates the video trigger level with a triangle 1 2 Press the SWEEP key Press the Trigger softkey Select the Video menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the trigger level Enter the trigger level The R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the trigger level by adding a horizontal line to the diagram area Working with Traces The trace menu contains all functions available to customize the trace display Selecting the Trace e EE 114 Selecting the ee EE 115 Working with a Second TAE reiten E e Seed ng 117 Working with Memory TACOS coi ann aa 118 Using Trace MATMEMADOS coin ii da aida 119 Selecting the
301. r the 1 is returned This is only the command whose processing case after the Operation Com should be terminated before other plete bit has been set in the ESR commands can be executed This bit indicates that the previous setting has been completed WAI Stops further command process Sending WAI directly after the ing until all commands sent command whose processing before zwa have been executed should be terminated before other commands are executed For a couple of commands the synchronization to the end of command execution is mandatory in order to obtain the desired result The affected commands require either more than one measurement in order to accomplish the desired instrument setting e g auto range functions or they require a longer period of time for execution If a new command is received during execution of the corresponding function this may either lead to either to an aborted measurement or to incorrect measurement data The following list includes the commands for which a synchronization via OPC OPC or WAI is mandatory Table 9 3 Commands with mandatory synchronization overlapping commands INIT start measurement sweep INIT CONT OFF Set to single sweep CALC MARK FUNC xx All Marker function queries Remote Control Commands The following chapters provide a detailed description of all the remote control com mands currently available for the R amp S Spectrum Rider and its firmware opt
302. range from 15 to 20 dB and increases the sensitivity by 10 to 15 dB In the signal path the preamplifier comes after the input protection circuit and before the RF attenuator of the R amp S Spectrum Rider to provide excellent sensitivity when the preamplifier is switched on 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Select the Att Amp Imp softkey 3 Enable or disable the Preamp checkbox to turn on or off the preamplifier of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Spectrum za 18 6 2015 30 0 13 54 40 0 20 dBm Pream 50 0 E p 60 0 E Manual Att 0dB 0 dB O Auto Low Distortion OFF Auto Low Noise Imp 50 Q O D EN 750RAM 750RAZ CG A 2 GHz Clear Auto Peak Free 750 FSH Z38 GHz Ref Level Range RefPos Unit Ref Offset Att Amp Imp The magnitude of amplification depends on the reference level This coupling to the reference level makes sure that the dynamic range is at an optimum 3 3 1 3 Measuring CW Signals A basic task for spectrum analyzers is to measure the level and frequency of sinewave signals The following examples illustrate an effective way of performing these mea surements A signal generator e g R amp S SMBV provides the signal source Test setup Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S Spectrum Rider EE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 64 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started Signal generator settings e Frequency 500 MHz e Level 25 dBm
303. rating mode or measurement are provided in the corre sponding sections of this manual Spectrum 1 ou 29 6 2015 Frequency Count ang 16 04 M1 300 MHz D2 4 126761 MHz M Noise M3 496 267606 MHz f9 5 dBm 102 9 dBm D4 630 986 kHz 20 dBm D5 1 630986 MHz M6 496 633803 MHz Frequency Count 6 Q 0 dB 30 0 M N dB Down 10 40 0 k 50 0 6 1 2 ON EE 300 KHz 800 90 0 300 kHz LE HOAN 1410 0 20 21 T RF Attenuation 20 ms 5 18 Lin SO a Center 500 MHz A acel Clear Detect Max Peak Trig Free Volume MHz 23 60 0 Demodulation Off Marker Type Delete Marker Select Marker Marker Function amp Set Marker Fig 4 1 Screen layout and elements User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 75 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions AA EEE EEE Title Bar Battery status Measurement Result View Date and time Reference position Currently selected menu item Available menu item Unavailable menu item 9 Active menu item 10 Invalid trace indicator and overload information 11 Currently selected button 12 Selectable toggle button 13 Blue dot implies setting not coupled to another hardware setting 14 Measurement Trace Window 15 Trace 1 16 Trace 2 17 Horizontal axis labeling 18 Vertical axis labeling 19 Currently selected maker oOo YO O1 PS h gt 20 Marker 21 Delta marker 22 Entry box 23 Configuration O
304. remains at the top level ON This is the time between the first positive edge and the subsequent negative edge of the pulse in sec onds where the edges occur at crossings of the mid threshold Time that is elapsing from the beginning of one pulse to the beginning of the next pulse Time in the displayed trace that is not occupied by the pulse Time required for the pulse to transition from the base to the top level This is the difference between the time at which the pulse exceeds the lower and upper thresholds Time required for the pulse to transition from the top to the base level This is the difference between the time at which the pulse drops below the upper and lower thresholds Ratio of the Pulse Width to Pulse Repetition Inter val expressed as a percentage requires at least two measured pulses Time offset relative to the beginning of the trace 0 sec where the pulse begins start of the rise time Configuring the Numerical Result Display Stop Time Time offset relative to the beginning of the trace 0 sec where the pulse stops end of the fall time Pulse Top Median pulse ON power The value of this parameter is used as a reference 100 to determine other parameter values such as the rising falling thresholds Pulse Base Median pulse OFF power The value of this parameter is used as a reference 0 to determine other parameter values such as the rising falling thresholds Tr
305. requency of the pixel the marker is on As the trace only has 711 pixels the marker position is just an approximation especially if the span is very wide With the frequency counter however you can get a more accurate result of the hori zontal marker position If the frequency counter is active the R amp S Spectrum Rider stops the measurement at the marker position for a short time and measures the fre quency using the internal reference frequency The accuracy of the results therefore depends only on the accuracy of the internal ref erence frequency TCXO The frequency counter has a resolution of 0 1 Hz and there fore provides far more accurate results Despite the accuracy the measurement is still fast because of a special algorithm for the l Q baseband signal The frequency counter only gives completely accurate readings for sine signals that are at least 20 dB above the noise floor If the S N ratio is less noise affects the results Spectrum sdu 24 7 2015 Frequency Count 15 56 M1 500 MHz 40 dBm 20 0 0 dE OFF 3 MHz 3 MHz 50 ms 6 a Center 500 MHz Trace1 Avg Jetect Sample Trig Rise Span 100 MHz New Marker Delete Marker Select Marker Marker Function Set Marker 1 Press the MARKER key 2 Press the Marker Function softkey 3 Select the Frequency Count checkbox menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider displays the counted marker frequency with a resolution of 0 1 Hz AAA User Manual
306. rlegt ge ffnet oder zerkleinert werden 2 Zellen oder Batterien d rfen weder Hitze noch Feuer ausgesetzt werden Die Lagerung im direkten Sonnenlicht ist zu vermeiden Zellen und Batterien sauber und trocken halten Verschmutzte Anschl sse mit einem trockenen sauberen Tuch reinigen 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 6 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Zellen oder Batterien d rfen nicht kurzgeschlossen werden Zellen oder Batterien d rfen nicht gefahrbringend in einer Schachtel oder in einem Schubfach gelagert werden wo sie sich gegenseitig kurzschlie en oder durch andere leitende Werkstoffe kurzgeschlossen werden k nnen Eine Zelle oder Batterie darf erst aus ihrer Originalverpackung entnommen werden wenn sie verwendet werden soll Zellen oder Batterien d rfen keinen unzul ssig starken mechanischen St en ausgesetzt werden Bei Undichtheit einer Zelle darf die Fl ssigkeit nicht mit der Haut in Ber hrung kommen oder in die Augen gelangen Falls es zu einer Ber hrung gekommen ist den betroffenen Bereich mit reichlich Wasser waschen und rztliche Hilfe in Anspruch nehmen Werden Zellen oder Batterien die alkalische Elektrolyte enthalten z B Lithiumzellen unsachgem ausgewechselt oder geladen besteht Explosionsgefahr Zellen oder Batterien nur durch den ent sprechenden R amp S Typ ersetzen siehe Ersatzteilliste um die Sicherheit des Produkts zu erhalten Zellen oder Batterien m ssen wiederverwertet werden und d rfen
307. ros el usuario debera atenerse a todas las indicaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta El grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz est siempre a su disposici n en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida Este producto est destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o si ha sido expresamente autorizado para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona cosa pueda sufrir da o El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto 1171 0000 42 08 Page Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentacion del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentacion informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos tecnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma ingles Por eso se debe tener en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes Si fuera
308. rted power sensor refer to chapter 6 1 Using a Power Sensor on page 135 You can connect the power sensors available for R amp S Spectrum Rider to the USB port of R amp S Spectrum Rider This connector allows you to control the power sensor and supplies it with power For more information see chapter 3 2 2 4 USB Port on page 32 Measuring the Power with a Power Sensor For more information about the characteristics of the supported power sensors refers to their datasheet Risk of damaging the power sensor Because of high input power e The continuous power applied to the power sensor s input must not exceed 400 mW 26 dBm e Use an attenuator for measurements on high power transmitters However brief power peaks lt 10 us up to 1 W 30 dBm are permissible Test setup Connect the power sensor cable to the USB port of R amp S Spectrum Rider If the power sensor is having the binder connector i e R amp S FSH Z1 R amp S FSH Z18 the FSH Z144 adaptor cable is needed 1 Supported power sensor e g R amp S FSH Z1 R amp S NRP Z11 Trying Out the Instrument 2 Power sensor connector DUT 3 USB binder adaptor R amp S FSH Z144 4 USB port connector see chapter 3 2 2 4 USB Port on page 32 Measuring the power 1 2 Press the MODE key Press the Power Meter softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider switches its operating mode See R amp S Spectrum Rider option on page 69 If the R amp S S
309. s E Quick Naming Tables M Screen Shots O O O Bf Standards Edit Refresh 4 Select the dataset with the settings you want and press Load softkey 5 In the User Preferences dialog box select the Preset Mode item A drop down menu opens to select the preset mode 6 Select the User Defined to load the dataset defined in the Preset Dataset The R amp S Spectrum Rider now loads the settings of the dataset after you press PRESET Ee User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 84 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions Sse User Defined Public Upplow_limit set 4 5 Configuring Measurements The Config Overview dialog box provides an overview of the current configuration of the R amp S Spectrum Rider In addition you can also change the configuration in this dia log box 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the Config Overview softkey 3 Select one of the dialog box and change the settings as you like Note that the contents of the Config Overview dialog box are customized for each operating mode of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Therefore the order and number of dis played settings is different in each mode 4 6 Taking Screenshots You can take and store a screenshot of the current screen anytime with the screenshot key gt Press the key The R amp S Spectrum Rider takes the screenshot If available the R amp S Spectrum Rider stores the screenshot on an external storage device USB mem
310. s dBmV dBV Watt and Volt are also available Selecting the right unit is EEE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 105 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode 9 1 3 4 9 1 3 5 relevant for the marker level display because the unit of the marker level is the same as that of the reference level 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Press the Unit softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens a submenu to select the display unit 3 Select one of the available units The R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the vertical axis accordingly Setting a Reference Offset You can define a reference offset for the reference level With a reference offset you can increase the reference level by a certain amount This is useful for example if an attenuator or amplifier has been inserted before the RF input The R amp S Spectrum Rider automatically takes the loss or gain into account when the level is displayed and no manual calculations are necessary A loss introduced at the RF input must be entered as a positive number and a gain as a negative number 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Press the Ref Offset softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider open an entry box to define input field 3 Enter the offset you need The R S Spectrum Rider includes the offset in puts in the measurement To indicate an offset other than 0 the R amp S Spectrum Rider puts a blue dot at the REF field displays in the Parameter View Setting the RF Attenuation RF a
311. s filter for measurements in the fre quency domain Only at frequencies containing a signal there is a reading that gives the amplitude of the frequency component figure 11 2 shows the basic principle of how a spectrum analyzer works Input attenuator Envelope Video el IF filter dtsch filter _ Detector RF input oscillator x deflection sawtooth generator for sweep Fig 11 2 Block diagram showing the basic functionality of a spectrum analyzer The precision attenuator at the R amp S Spectrum Rider input attenuates the signal to a level that the mixer can handle without overdriving the mixer The attenuator is directly coupled to the reference level You can attenuate the signal in the range from O dB to 40 dB in steps of 5 dB The mixer converts the RF signal to a fixed intermediate frequency IF This process usually involves several stages It lasts until you get an IF for which good narrowband filters are available The R amp S Spectrum Rider needs three mixing stages to get an IF that the filter can handle Figure 11 3 graphically shows the mixing process For models with a frequency limit of 3 6 GHz the IFs are 4892 8 MHz 860 8 MHz and 54 4 MHz The conversion from a specific input frequency to the first IF is done by a local oscillator LO This LO can be tuned from 4 8 GHz to 8 4 GHz All other conver sions are handled by single frequency oscillators In case of models with a frequency limit of
312. s numerical values Example SENSE FREQuency o POP MAX Response 3 5E9 e Numerical values are output without a unit Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command Example SENSE FREQuencyY CENTer Response 1E6 for 1 MHz e Truth values lt Boolean values gt are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON Example SENSe BANDwidth AUTO Response 1 for ON e Text character data is returned in a short form Example SYsTem COMMun1icatesSER1ial CONTrol RTS Response STAN for standard R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands 9 5 9 6 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization What has been said above makes clear that all commande can potentially be carried out overlapping In order to prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI must be used All three commands cause a cer tain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set By suitable program ming the controller can be forced to wait for the respective action to occur For more information see table 9 2 Table 9 2 Synchronization using OPC OPC and WAI Command Programming the controller OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit e Setting bit O in the ESE in the ESR after all previous com Setting bit 5 in the SRE mands have been executed e Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until Sending OPC directly afte
313. s the Negative TRansition part of the QUEStionable register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range D to 65535 Example STAT OUES NIR 65535 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition lt DecimalValue gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of the QUEStionable register Setting a bit causes a 1 to O transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 Example STAT QUES NTR 65535 User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 252 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands STATus QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition lt DecimalValue gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of the QUEStionable register Setting a bit causes a 1 to O transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 Example STAT QUES NIR 65535 STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition lt DecimalValue gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part ofthe QUEStionable register Setting a bit causes a 1 to O transition in the corresponding bit of
314. s the permit input ted power 23 dBm 200 mW Power sensor hardware error Communication error between the Unscrew the sensor from the R amp S R amp S Spectrum Rider and the Spectrum Rider and check the power sensor connectors If the problem persists contact a Rohde amp Schwarz service center Power sensor error The power sensor signals an Contact a Rohde amp Schwarz ser error to the R amp S Spectrum Rider vice center Unknown power sensor model The R amp S Spectrum Rider cannot connected identify the device connected to the power sensor interface User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 137 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Power Meter R amp S FPH K9 6 1 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements After you have connected a power sensor the R amp S Spectrum Rider immediately starts to measure the signal power Defining the center frequency Power sensors have a memory containing correction values that are dependent on the frequency Hence measurement results are the most accurate for signals whose fre quency you Know Note that the R amp S Spectrum Rider maintains the center frequency that you have set in another operating mode In that case it uses that frequency as the power sensor fre quency If you want to perform measurements on another known signal you can change the power sensor frequency manually 1 Press the Freq softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the frequency opens
315. sconexi n El dispositivo de desconexi n se debe poder alcanzar f cilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible Si p ej el enchufe de conexi n a la red es el dispositivo de desconexi n la longitud del cable de conexi n no debe superar 3 m Los interruptores selectores o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el ctrica Si se integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones se deber colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalaci n No utilice nunca el producto si est da ado el cable de conexi n a red Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexi n a red Aseg rese mediante las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de que el cable de conexi n a red no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser da ado por l p ej al tropezar o por un choque el ctrico 1171 0000 42 08 Page 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentaci n TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de 16 A como m ximo utilizaci n de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente La no observaci n de estas medidas puede provocar chispas fuego y o lesiones No sobrecargue las tom
316. se If the video bandwidth is reduced the high frequency noise components above the cutoff frequency of the video filter will be rejected The smaller the video bandwidth the smaller the noise amplitude at the video filter output The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides video bandwidths from 1 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1 3 10 sequence In its default state the video bandwidth is coupled to the resolution band m ee User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 110 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode width and is the same as the resolution bandwidth If you change the resolution band width the R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the video bandwidth accordingly The effects of the video bandwidth on measurements are as follows e if you are performing measurements on modulated signals the video bandwidth must be sufficiently large so that significant modulation components are not rejec ted 2 RBW e if you want to keep signals free of noise you should select the smallest video bandwidth possible lt 0 1 x RBW e if you are performing measurements on pulsed signals the video bandwidth should be at least three times greater than the resolution bandwidth so that the pulse edges are not distorted Like the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth has an effect on sweep speed Before each measurement the video filter has to settle 1 Press the BW key 2 Press the Manual VBW softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define
317. se damage to the instrument and to connected devices Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the instrument e The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation e The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections e The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet e Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges e Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded EMI impact on measurement results Electromagnetic interference EMI may affect the measurement results To suppress generated electromagnetic interference EMI e Use suitable shielded cables of high quality For example use double shielded RF and LAN cables e Always terminate open cable ends e Note the EMC classification in the data sheet e Unpacking and Checking the Instrument 18 E E 19 e Setting up the R amp S Spectrum Rider RL 19 e Using the AC Adapter nenne nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnenn 21 o SS ae ad ed ed ce ne oi 22 Battery EEN e EE 24 Unpacking and Checking the Instrument Check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory lists for the various items Check the instrument for any damage If there is damage imme diately contact the carrier who delivered the instrument 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 3 Preparing for Use Packing Material Retain the original packing material If the instrument needs
318. section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in spectrum analyzer mode e Frequency Parameters ii EE REENEN 260 SPAN Selecion en a a ie dei 260 ne eeeeiniri eoa a aa e ea a aa i a E e i a 260 e SWEEP TE 261 o Bandwidth Ed rreren nenne 262 Tace E e EE 262 e Display and Bir ui 263 XA 263 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer 10 2 1 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the hori zontal axis of the measurement diagram ES IS ES ee Step Center sare CS AOS AE rom E i A EN NEN Select Downlink Refresh Select Uplink Sie ooo zeen ES 10 2 2 SPAN Selection The SPAN key opens the span menu that contains functionality to set the span Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection Manual Span Zero Span Last Span 10 2 3 AMPT Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the verti cal axis of the measurement diagram Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer Softkey Menu or Dialog items Parameters selection The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep Ref Position Ref Offset 75 Q FSH Z38 Transducer Select Primary Refresh Select Secondary EEE SE Att Amp Imp EEE EEE EN 10 2 4 SWEEP Parameters Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer Menu or Dialog items Parameters IS A A
319. sequent binary data bytes Contents of the file store 20 binary bytes characters to the file MMEM DATA Public User Testfile txt Transfers the contents of the file Testfile txt to the control com puter MMEMory DELete lt File gt This command deletes a file Parameters lt File gt String containing the path and file name of the file to delete Example MMEM DEL Public Screen Shots Screen0001 png Deletes the file Screen0001 png Usage Setting only MMEMory FILE lt FileName gt lt Block gt This command creates a file Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the file name lt Block gt lt block_data gt Example MMEM FILE TEST TXT Creates the file TEST TXT MMEMory FILE DATE lt FileName gt lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt This command sets the date of a file Remote Control Commande Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and file name lt Year gt Range 1980 to 2099 lt Month gt Range 1 to 12 lt Day gt Range 1 to 31 Example MMEM FILE DATE Public Screen Shots Screen0001 png 2006 04 01 Sets the date to April 1st 2006 MMEM FILE DATE Public Screen Shots Screen0001 png Returns the modification date of the file Screen0001 png MMEMory FILE TIME lt FileName gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt This command sets the time of a file The sequence of entry is hour minute second Parameters lt FileName g
320. ses 85 Taking SereensHh ls u nennen anne 85 SAVINO ME A5 2 LEE E 86 Managing Data Se Sussie semence a 88 Saving datasets sssaaa aE een 90 Alternative Ways to Save Datasets A 91 Renam ng PIG NAMESS ns irren teen 92 Quick Naming of Dalasels nn essen een 93 Restoring 9 AU E 95 Previewing SD AS A nenne 96 Loading a DataS a o ii lens 97 Deleting RE 97 Updating the Firmware u u0040000n0nnBnennannnnannnn nenn nun nnnannnnanennnnnnnnnnnn nenn nenn nnnnnnnnn 97 4 10 9 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 2 1 5 1 2 2 5 1 2 3 5 1 2 4 3 1 2 9 5 1 3 5 1 3 1 3 1 9 2 5 13 39 5 1 3 4 SE 5 1 3 6 SE 5 1 3 8 5 1 4 5 1 4 1 5 1 4 2 5 1 5 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 2 5 14 5 3 5 1 6 5 1 6 1 5 1 6 2 5 1 6 3 5 1 6 4 5 1 6 5 5 1 7 Installing Firmware Options nee ee 97 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 99 Common Measurement Settings uurusnenuunnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn anne 99 Configuration OVOPVISNS ace cesse memss het esse ete leon 99 Configuring the Horizontal ss nnemunsedenes ses clicar laa 100 Defining the Center Freouency ss 101 Defining a Frequency Step Size ss 101 Setting a Frequency OMSOL E 102 Defining a Start and Stop Frequency ss 102 A eo ER oe ea 103 Configuring due EE 104 Setting the Reference Level 104 Setting a Display Range oil 105 Selecting the Display Rn u endende 105 Setting a Reference Cftset iii 106 Setting the RF Atenual OM annehmen 106 Using the Preamplifier
321. set up Spectrum M1 500 MHz D2 3 239437 MHz 24 7 2015 D3 4647887 MHz D4 13 802817 MHz 10 37 D5 23 380282 MHz D6 16 619718 MHz e 0 dem 0dB OFF 3 MHz 3 MHz o 2 Po T 9 OU Center 500 MHz Trace Avg Detect Sample Trig Rise Span 100 MHz 8 Marker Type Delete Marker select Marker Marker Function Set Marker Fig 5 1 Screen Layout with Active Markers 1 Measurement Result View 2 Marker solid line 3 Delta marker dotted line 4 Active marker label see highlighted line on the marker list as well as the marker label 5 Marker label M x 6 Delta marker label D x 7 Marker input field 8 Marker menu 5 1 7 2 Positioning Markers 1 Press the MARKER key The marker menu opens If as yet no marker has been activated the R amp S Spectrum Rider automatically activates the main marker and positions it on the maximum level that has been measured In addition the marker frequency input field opens You can perform the following actions e Position the marker with the rotary knob User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 120 Common Measurement Settings When positioning the marker with the rotary knob the step size is one pixel e Entera marker position with the number keys and confirm the entry with one of the unit keys 2 Confirm the marker position by pressing the rotary knob The Measurement Result View shows the horizontal position of all markers and the corresponding vertical valu
322. sichtigung der erh hten Schutzw rdigkeit des unge borenen Lebens m ssen Schwangere durch geeignete Ma nahmen gesch tzt werden Auch Tr ger von Herzschrittmachern k nnen durch elektromagnetische Strahlungen gef hrdet sein Der Arbeitgeber Betreiber ist verpflichtet Arbeitsst tten bei denen ein besonderes Risiko einer Strahlen exposition besteht zu beurteilen und zu kennzeichnen und m gliche Gefahren abzuwenden Im Falle eines Brandes entweichen ggf giftige Stoffe Gase Fl ssigkeiten etc aus dem Produkt die Gesundheitssch den verursachen k nnen Daher sind im Brandfall geeignete Ma nahmen wie z B Atemschutzmasken und Schutzkleidung zu verwenden Falls ein Laser Produkt in ein R amp S Produkt integriert ist z B CD DVD Laufwerk d rfen keine anderen Einstellungen oder Funktionen verwendet werden als in der Produktdokumentation beschrie ben um Personensch den zu vermeiden z B durch Laserstrahl EMV Klassen nach EN 55011 CISPR 11 sinngem EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Ger t der Klasse A Ein Ger t das sich f r den Gebrauch in allen anderen Bereichen au er dem Wohnbereich und solchen Bereichen eignet die direkt an ein Niederspannungs Versorgungsnetz angeschlossen sind das Wohngeb ude versorgt Hinweis Diese Einrichtung kann wegen m glicher auftretender leitungsgebundener als auch gestrahlten St rgr en im Wohnbereich Funkst rungen verursachen In diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt w
323. sidenciales y en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tension que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales Nota Los aparatos de clase A estan destinados al uso en entornos industriales Estos aparatos pueden causar perturbaciones radioel ctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas En este caso se le podr solicitar al operador que tome las medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones Aparato de clase B Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales as como en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales 1171 0000 42 08 Page 12 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Reparacion y mantenimiento 1 El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorizacion para ello Antes de manipular el producto o abrirlo es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tension de alimentaci n para evitar toda posibilidad de choque el ctrico El ajuste el cambio de partes el mantenimiento y la reparaci n deber n ser efectuadas solamente por electricistas autorizados por Rohde amp Schwarz Si se reponen partes con importancia para los aspectos de seguridad p ej el enchufe los transformadores o los fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos por partes originales Despu s de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad deber realizarse
324. signal to be measured DC is not affected The figures below show a weak sine signal In the first picture it is measured with a large video bandwidth and in the second with a narrow video bandwidth Spectrum 28 05 08 07 38 Spectrum 26 05 08 0133 Jk ak 60 0 gem SVT ZU ms race Clears Write Ee Ka A GE es VD 100 kHz Tig Fres Kun Detect Kurs Bea 133333335 333333333 KI Cantar 97 3 MHz Span 600 kHz Center 97 3 MHz Spare 600 kHz Manual Manual ARA AA Manual REW REW VEW REUV REW y Limiting the video bandwidth smoothes the trace considerably This makes it much easier to determine the level of the measured signal The detector comes after the video filter The detector combines the measured spec trum so that it can be represented as one pixel in the trace The R amp S FSH uses 631 pixels to form the trace e the whole measured spectrum has to be represented using just 631 pixels Common types of spectrum analyzer detectors are the peak detector PEAK the sample detector SAMPLE and the RMS detector RMS An Auto Peak detector which simultaneously displays the maximum peak and the minimum peak is usually also provided The Fig below explains how these detectors work Level Maximum sample Minimum The figure above shows 30 measured values which are represented by a single pixel The peak detector determines and displays the maximum measured value The Auto Peak detector ta
325. sing a small video bandwidth thus increases the measurement sensitivity and allows you to accurately determine the pulse peak power even for weak pulses Reducing the video bandwidth also increases the trigger sensitivity of the power sensor Note however that the video bandwidth should not be smaller than the RF bandwidth of the measured signal Otherwise measurement results may become invalid Averaging Traces Selecting the trace mode The Power vs Time result display provides two trace modes e The Clear Write mode overwrites the trace data after each measurement e The Average mode forms an average over several measurement and displays the data according to the selected detector When you select this mode you can define the number of measurements over which the trace data is calculated When you select this mode you can define the number of measurements over which the trace data is calculated 1 Press the Trace softkey 2 Select the trace mode you prefer for the measurement Selecting the detector When you are averaging traces you can also select a detector The detector defines the way the measured data is evaluated and which data is displayed In the Power vs Time result display you can select the Average detector or the Max Peak detector The Average detector displays the averaged measurement data User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 148 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Performing Pulse Power Measurements R am
326. sired block for configuration Alternatively press the rotary knob to select the block for configuration If there is an arrow on the block see index 3 this indicates that there are more parameters available for configuration Select the arrow to go to the next block for fur ther configuration Depending on the mode selected for operation blocks that are not available in the selected mode will be dimmed See details of each block configuration in Configuration Overview on page 39 for spectrum analyzing mode Touchscreen Gesture Element To enhance greater flexibility and user experience in the user interaction with R amp S Spectrum Rider special touchscreen gestures are introduced The following illustrated the list of special gestures that R amp S Spectrum Rider provides e Change Center FIBQU NOY ssico nicicaiada occ iii iii 17 e Change Reference Level ss 78 Change Span acusa Eo ao 79 o O UU nn POS e E O A 79 Delete All MATOS ricas pi ide eee 80 Change Center Frequency Swipe left or right horizontally in the trace window to adjust the center frequency of the spectrum measurement Alternatively select the Center in the Parameter View to adjust the center frequency or press the FREQ key on the front panel to display the Center Freq softkey label for adjustment R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Instrument Functions amp Spectrum sa 01 04 2015 19 32 REF 60 kHz 20 0 dBm 80 kHz 40 kHz 7 ATT 0 dB
327. situation dangereuse imm diate qui si elle n est pas vit e comporte un risque lev de blessures graves ou mortelles mortelles Indique une situation dangereuse qui si elle n est pas vit e comporte un risque faible de blessures mineures ou mod r es Indique une situation dangereuse possible qui si elle n est pas AVERTISSEMENT evitee comporte un risque modere de blessures graves ou Indique la possibilite d une fausse manoeuvre susceptible AVIS d endommager le produit Ces mots d alerte correspondent a la d finition habituelle utilis e pour des applications civiles dans l espace conomique europ en Des d finitions divergentes peuvent cependant exister dans d autres espaces conomiques ou dans le cadre d applications militaires Il faut donc veiller a ce que les mots d alerte d crits ici ne soient utilis s qu en relation avec la documentation produit correspondante et seulement avec le produit correspondant L utilisation des mots d alerte en relation avec des produits ou des documentations non correspondants peut conduire des erreurs d interpr tation et par cons quent a des dommages corporels ou mat riels tats et positions de fonctionnement L appareil ne doit tre utilis que dans les tats et positions de fonctionnement indiqu s par le fabricant Tout obstacle a la ventilation doit tre emp ch Le non respect des indications du fabricant peut provoquer des chocs lectriques des incendi
328. softkey at the Parameter view The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an entry box to enter the reference level 2 Enter a reference level of 25 dBm The R amp S Spectrum Rider reduces the reference level by 5 dB The maximum trace value is close to the maximum scale value of the measurement diagram The increase in the displayed noise floor is minimal The difference between the signal maximum and the displayed noise i e the dynamic range has however been increased Using Markers The R amp S Spectrum Rider has markers to read out signal levels and frequencies Mark ers are always positioned on the trace Both the level and frequency at their current positions are displayed on the screen gt Press the MARKER key The R amp S Spectrum Rider activates a marker and puts it on the maximum value on the trace The coordinates of the marker is shown in a table above the measure ment diagram A red vertical line represents the position of the marker on the horizontal axis i e the frequency A small red horizontal dash represents the marker position on the vertical axis i e the level Spectrum 4 1111 Mi 500 MHz 18 6 2015 15 03 30 0 20 dBm 40 0 50 0 10 dB 60 0 ON 3 MHz 3 MHz 20 ms Sek ar 500 MHz Clear Auto Peak Free 20 MHz New Marker Delete Marker Select Marker Marker Function R Set Marker Measuring the frequency The trace consists of 711 measurement points frequency points The marker is always positi
329. sonal injury e g due to laser beams 8 EMC classes in line with EN 55011 CISPR 11 and analogously with EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Class A equipment Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Note Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment This equipment may cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted as well as radiated disturbances In this case the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to eliminate these disturbances Class B equipment Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Repair and service 1 The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened it must be disconnected from the AC supply network Otherwise personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock 1171 0000 42 08 Page 5 Basic Safety Instructions Adjustments replacement of parts maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical experts authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers f
330. soon as all preceding commands have been executed This is used for command synchronization OPT Option identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the CD ROM Return values lt Options gt The query returns a list of all installed and activated options separated by commas where B lt number gt describes hardware options K lt number gt describes software options Example B3 K0 K7 K9 Usage Query only RST Reset Remote Control Commande Sets the instrument to a defined default status The default settings are indicated in the description of commands The command is equivalent to SYSTem PRESet Usage Setting only SRE lt Contents gt Service request enable Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value This command deter mines under which conditions a service request is triggered Parameters lt Contents gt Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 MSS mask bit is always 0 Range O to 255 STB Status byte query Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form Usage Query only TRG Trigger Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event In particular TRG generates a manual trigger signal This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem TRG corresponds to the INITiate IMMediate command Usage Event TST Sel
331. ssories For product specific information see the data sheet and the product documentation Safety labels on products The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers Notice general danger location ON OFF Power Observe product documentation A Caution when handling heavy equipment Standby indication A Danger of electric shock fe Direct current DC 1171 0000 42 08 Page 1 Basic Safety Instructions Caution Hot surface Alternating current AC Protective conductor terminal Direct alternating current DC AC To identify any terminal which is intended for connection to an external conductor for protection against electric shock in case of a fault or the terminal of a protective earth Earth Ground Class II Equipment to identify equipment meeting the safety requirements specified for Class Il equipment device protected by double or reinforced insulation Frame or chassis Ground terminal 9 EU labeling for batteries and accumulators For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive mg EU labeling for separate collection of electrical devices and electronic devices For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 2 Warning Laser radiation For additional information see section Operation item 7 Signal words and their meaning The following
332. t String containing the path and file name lt Hour gt Range O to 23 lt Minutes gt Range O to 59 lt Seconds gt Range O to 59 Example MMEM FILE TIME Public Screen Shots Screen0006 png 11 04 00 Sets the time to 11 04 00 MME Mon INIT lt DriveName gt This command formats the indicated drive Note Formatting deletes all data stored on the memory drive This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Parameters lt DriveName gt Example MMEM INIT Formats and deletes all data from the drive Usage Setting only MMEMory LOAD STATe lt 1 gt lt SettingsFile gt This command loads the settings from a set file Parameters lt 1 gt Remote Control Commands lt SettingsFile gt String containing the path and file name Example MMEM LOAD STAT 1 Public Datasets Dataset001 set Loads the settings from the file Dataset001 Usage Setting only MMEMory MDIRectory lt DirectoryName gt This command creates a new directory This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Parameters lt DirectoryName gt String containing the path and new directory name Example MMEM MDIR Public USER Creates the a directory called User Usage Setting only MMEMory MOVE lt SourceFile gt lt Destination gt This command renames files if lt file_destination gt contains no path Otherwise the file is moved to the indicated path and stored under the file
333. t on page 205 The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant for this command Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example See CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NOISe RESult on page 205 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion NOISe RESult This command queries the result of the noise measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end before reading out the result This is only possible in single sweep mode This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant for this command Example INIT CONT OFF Turns on single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON CALC MARK2 FUNC NOIS ON Turns on marker 2 and assigns the noise measurement to that marker INIT WAIL CALC MARK2 NOIS RES Performs the measurement and queries the noise marker results Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker If you use a delta marker the R amp S Spectrum Riderturns it into a normal marker This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker 9 6 2 7 Remote Control Co
334. t the frequency offset is always 2 0 HZ 1 Press the FREQ key 2 Press the Freq Offset softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to set the frequency offset 3 Enter the frequency offset you need The R amp S Spectrum Rider adds the frequency offset to the center frequency you have set A blue dot at the center frequency display indicates that a frequency off set has been set Defining a Start and Stop Frequency Defining a start an stop frequency is best suited for example for measurements on har monics or signals whose exact frequency is unknown 1 Press the FREQ key 2 Press the Start Freq softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the start frequency 3 Enter the start frequency you need 4 Seta stop frequency with the Stop Freq softkey User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 102 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode 5 1 2 5 The R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the horizontal axis according to your input begin ning with the start frequency and ending with the stop frequency If you have entered a stop frequency that is outside the maximum frequency range the R amp S Spectrum Rider sets the stop frequency to the possible maximum The softkey label of the Parameter View changes from Center and Span to Start and Stop Setting the Span The span is the frequency range around the center frequency that a spectrum analyzer displays on the screen
335. tage specified on the power supply unit e Attach the appropriate adapter to the power supply Connect the AC adapter R amp S HA Z301 order number 1321 1386 00 to the DC port on the left side of the R amp S Spectrum Rider item 1 of figure 3 1 Make sure to fully insert the plug into the port Depending on the system you need firmly connect the appropriate power cable inclu ded in the delivery to the AC adapter item 2 of figure 3 1 Finally connect the plug to an AC power outlet Fig 3 1 AC adapter 1 AC adapter 2 Power cable R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Getting Started The voltage range of the AC power supply is 100 V to 240 V AC After the R amp S Spectrum Rider is connected to the power supply you can turn it on with the POWER key on the front panel 3 1 1 5 Battery Operation The R amp S Spectrum Rider has a smart battery indicator which displays the battery charging status on the POWER key as well as the battery icon shown at the top right corner of the display in See chapter 3 2 3 1 Title Bar on page 36 The lithium ion battery has a capacity of approximately 6 4 Ah and it allows operation of up to 8 hours when it is fully charged The actual operation time depends on the current charge status the ambient tempera ture and the operating mode of the R amp S Spectrum Rider When the R amp S Spectrum Rider is in operation the power s LED displays green on the Ee button the battery charging stat
336. taset the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows a warning message that you need to confirm After confirming the deletion process the R amp S Spectrum Rider deletes the selected dataset from its memory Updating the Firmware You can download new firmware versions from the R amp S Spectrum Rider website http www rohde schwarz com product fph html The website also provides release notes for each new firmware version The release notes include instructions on how to perform a firmware update Installing Firmware Options You can equip the R amp S Spectrum Rider with several firmware options to enable addi tional operating modes or special measurements For more information see the Getting Started manual Installing Firmware Options Common Measurement Settings 5 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 9 1 The default operating mode of the R amp S Spectrum Rider is the spectrum analyzer The spectrum analyzer provides the functionality to perform measurements in the fre quency domain e g to identify the power of signals e Common Measurement Settings ss 99 e Working with Channel Tables 131 Using Transducer en eee eee 132 Common Measurement Settings Basic measurement settings that are common to many measurement tasks regardless of the application or operating mode are described here If you are performing a spe cific measurement task using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Ana lyzer mode or an application
337. te fondamentales Selon les fonctions certains produits tels que des systemes de radiocommunication RF peuvent produire des niveaux lev s de rayonnement lectromagn tique Etant donne la vuln rabilit de l enfant a naitre les femmes enceintes doivent amp tre protegees par des mesures appropriees Les porteurs de stimulateurs cardiaques peuvent egalement tre menaces par les rayonnements lectromagn tiques L employeur l exploitant est tenu d valuer et de reperer les lieux de travail soumis a un risque particulier d exposition aux rayonnements et de prevenir les dangers eventuels En cas diincendie il se peut que le produit degage des matieres toxiques gaz liquides etc susceptibles de nuire a la sant ll faut donc en cas d incendie prendre des mesures ad quates comme par exemple le port de masques respiratoires et de v tements de protection Si un produit laser est integre dans un produit Rohde amp Schwarz par exemple lecteur CD DVD il ne faut pas utiliser de reglages ou fonctions autres que ceux decrits dans la documentation produit pour eviter tout dommage corporel par exemple cause par rayon laser Classes CEM selon EN 55011 CISPR 11 selon EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 par analogie Appareil de la classe A Appareil appropri a un usage dans tous les environnements autres que l environnement r sidentiel et les environnements raccord s directement a un r seau d alimentation basse tens
338. tems the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level 5 Never use the product if the power cable is damaged Check the power cables on a regular basis to ensure that they are in proper operating condition By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by for example tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock 1171 0000 42 08 Page 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Basic Safety Instructions The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fuse protected with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket provided for this purpose Otherwise sparks that result in fire and or injuries may occur Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages Vms gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fuse protection current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment e g PCs or other industrial computers comply with the IEC 60950 1 EN 60950 1 or IEC 61010 1 EN 61010 1 standards that apply
339. th GSM for instance slots are counted from 0 to 7 In the case of remote control the slots are selected with the suffixes 1 to 8 If the numbering differs in manual operation and remote control it is indicated with the respective command Overview of Syntax Elements The following table offers an overview of the syntax elements The colon separates the key words of a command In a program message the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands within a program message lt does not alter the path 9 4 2 9 4 2 1 9 4 2 2 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax The comma separates several parameters of a com mand The question mark forms a query The asterisk marks a common command I Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it The hash symbol introduces binary octal hexa decimal and block data e Binary B10110 e Octal 07612 e Hexa HF3A7 A white space ASCII Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 deci mal e g blank separates header and parameter Parameters For most commands a parameter needs to be supplemented The parameter has to be separated from the header by a white space The type of parameter required for each command and the allowed range of values are specified in the command description o Numeric CAR Ae EE ee 163 e Special Numeric Valles unnsi or 163 e Boolean Harameiere nun nennen 164 EA AA 164 AA 165 EOC RE 165 Numeri
340. th the level that lies below the common levels The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case 9 4 4 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Example CALL InstrWrite analyzer SENSe FREQuency STARt 1E6 SENSe FREQuency STOP 1E9 This program message is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated from each other by the semicolon Both commands are part ofthe SENSe command system subsystem FREQuency i e they have two common levels When abbreviating the program message the second command begins with the level below SENSe FREQuency The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the program message reads as follows CALL InstrWrite analyzer SENSe FREQuency STARt 1E6 STOP 1E9 However a new program message always begins with the complete path Example CALL InstrWrite analyzer SENSe FREQuency STARt 1E6 CALL InstrWrite analyzer SENSe FREQuency STOP 1E9 Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 e The requested parameter is transmitted without header Example ENPULSCOUPLIing Response DC e Maximum values minimum values and all further quantities which are requested via a special text parameter are returned a
341. the R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the span automatically as soon as the maximum sweep time is reached 5 1 4 2 Setting the Video Bandwidth The video bandwidth VBW basically smoothes the trace by reducing the noise and therefore making power levels easier to see The noise reduction is a result of the video filter This lowpass filter defines the video bandwidth and filters the higher frequency parts of the voltage from the signal Video voltage is the DC voltage that results from the IF signal passing through the envelope detector which removes the IF components and outputs the envelope only This output is also known as the video signal The figure below shows that process on an AM modulated signal in the time domain In case of an AM modulated signal the envelope or video signal contains a DC com ponent that corresponds to the level of the carrier The video signal also contains an AC component whose frequency is the same as the AM frequency Envelope Signal AM RF Signal video voltage Amplitude o Ampe 7 Do voltage from carrer AC voltage from moduk kyn Time If the bandwidth of the video filter is less than the frequency of the AC component it is Suppressed depending on its maximum frequency If the AM component should be dis played truly the cutoff frequency of the filter has to be greater than the modulation fre quency If there is noise on the sine signal the modulation signal can be thought of as noi
342. the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENT register Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 Example STAT QUES NTR 65535 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt DecimalValue gt This command control the Positive TRansition part of the QUEStionable register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN register Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition lt DecimalValue gt This command control the Positive TRansition part of the QUEStionable register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 STATus QUEStionable LIMit PTRansition lt DecimalValue gt This command control the Positive TRansition part of the QUEStionable register User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 253 Remote Control Commande Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt DecimalValue gt Range O to 65535 STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition lt D
343. the number of count used to Trace Mode ClearWnte average up the measurement for the trace display X Trace1 Clear Write It also provides configuration to set the Trace Math method Er used to calculate the differences in the current trace measure ment and measurement saved in the memory Detector Mode Select Trigger to configure the trigger source trigger level and the trigger delay setting on the Gre Sie elas spectrum measurement E R Sp Free Run 50 Delay 3 2 4 On screen Keyboard The on screen keyboard is an additional means of interacting with the instrument It provides an ease of use together with the touch screen input Accessing the on screen keyboard is only available for text based entry e g save or open a filename Save as KI001 The on screen keyboard supports different languages To select your choice of lan guage see Selecting the language on page 51 You can toggle between English and your choice of language by selecting the button at the bottom left hand corner of the on screen keyboard The following is a list of languages that the instrument supports User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 41 3 2 5 3 2 5 1 3 2 5 2 3 2 5 3 3 2 5 4 Instrument Tour The on screen keyboard display can be switched on and off as desired using the On screen keyboard E icon highlighted at the top right hand corner Front Panel Keys POWER Key The POWER key
344. the rotary knob e Values that have flexible units like frequency or time can be confirmed with one of the unit keys If you confirm such a value with the rotary knob the R amp S Spectrum Rider always uses the last used unit e If you have opened a submenu or input field by accident you can close it without making any changes with the CANCEL key Remote Operation Remote operation is a way to control the R amp S Spectrum Rider from another device like a PC To use the R amp S Spectrum Rider this way you have to establish a connection between both devices via the LAN or USB interfaces of the R amp S Spectrum Rider The product range of the R amp S Spectrum Rider provides several tools for remote opera tion Remote commands Using remote commands that are compatible to SCPI standard to control the R amp S Spectrum Rider See chapter 9 6 Remote Control Commands on page 167 for details of remote commands to control R amp S Spectrum Rider Remote display with R amp S Instrument View The remote display is an application provided by the R amp S Instrument View software You can use it to access and control the R amp S Spectrum Rider in the R amp S Instrument View environment While the R amp S Spectrum Rider is running and connected to the control computer the screen contents and control elements keys softkeys etc are displayed Thus you can operate the R amp S Spectrum Rider just like the hardware itself 1 Connect the R
345. the screenshot on the in the corresponding directory on the R amp S Spectrum Rider Configuring Data Capture The following commands configure the data capture These commands are independent from the operating mode List of commands e sySTem CAPTure COUNter on page 223 e SySTem CAPTure DATaset STATe on page 223 e SYSTem CAPTure MODE on page 224 e sySTem CAPTure SCReen STATe on page 224 SYSTem CAPTure COUNter lt CaptureCounter gt This command defines the start of the file name counter The counter numbers the files stored when you capture data screenshots datasets etc Parameters lt CaptureCounter gt String containing the number with which to start numbering files RST 0000 Example SYST CAPT COUN 01007 Starts numbering files with 0100 e g Measurement0100 png SYSTem CAPTure DATaset STATe lt State gt This command includes or excludes datasets from the data capture Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF 9 6 7 Remote Control Commands Example SYST CAPT DAT ON Includes datasets into the data capture SYSTem CAPTure MODE lt CaptureMode gt This command selects the data types that the R amp S Spectrum Rider saves when you capture the current measurement data Parameters lt CaptureMode gt SCReen DATaset BOTH NONE SCReen Saves a Screenshot DATaset Saves a dataset BOTH Saves a screenshot and a dataset NONE Screen capture does not save anything
346. tinuous measurement or single measurement TRACE Configures the measured data acquisition and the analysis of the measurement data MARKER Sets and positions the absolute and relative measurement mark ers markers and delta markers Marker positioning using peak next peak minimum level refer ence level and center frequency Marker search limit function Provide the following marker functions Marker mode function which provide capability to measure noise measure frequency using frequency counter and measure bandwidth using the N dB down setting Marker display setting using the frequency or channel table AM and FM marker demodulation MEAS This key provides functionality to select and configure measure ment such as e Spectrum 3 2 5 6 Keypad The keypad is used to enter alphanumeric parameters including the corresponding units p dBm oaa JKL Im PORS TUV Jj ju It contains the following keys Alphanumeric keys Enter numbers and special characters in edit dialog boxes Decimal point Inserts a decimal point at the cursor position Sign key Changes the sign of a numeric parameter In the case of an alphanumeric parame ter inserts a at the cursor position User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 44 Instrument Tour Unit keys GHz These keys add the selected unit to the entered numeric value and complete the dBm MHz dBm entry kHz dB and Hz dB In the case of level e
347. tion esessisnensuradescnnedesnnnennennnnnnecniahenen 104 Regional SetlinNgS anne eamenicianeatinsineninibinadeneaai 51 Remote Control Commande nn rrenen 167 Remote Control Connection nennen nennen 154 changing the IP Address ENEE 154 Remote Operation EE 83 A 55 Reset values le 170 Resolution bandwidth essor 108 Restore dataset EE 95 RFARENUSNON es eneninda 106 A aa 30 ES a 115 Roay A 82 S E e NENIE AE E LEE TET AEE E T 115 Save on event Seege he 86 90 Saving GE 224 Saving measurement results oooocccccccconoccnnccnnnnnnconnnos 72 Scaling GHANA AAA ea ee 100 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax 158 Screen layout Configure overview ccccoooooccnccccononccnnccnonnnccononcnnnnrennonos 75 Power A ain 135 Power meter pulse A 143 DC UN esse ee ee 75 o A een age 85 Dass el 85 PSV I EA E E E EE 85 Seresnshol E 42 EI 16 ET 34 eene E elt 132 Self test REINE ee ee A 171 Service request enable register SRE A 171 Signal attenuation une 62 Single SWeSD EE 112 Softkey Configuration overview cccccsssssseeeeeceeesseeeeeseaneees 99 E EE 255 Ku WE 120 POWER MEILE nee eine 264 Spectrum EE 259 SO A ne 42 SD gee ee ee 103 Spectrum analyzer eucariotas cities 62 Spectrum Analyzer aussen ak 172 Configuring and Using Measurement Functions 172 Configuring the Horizontal Axis 172 Configuring the Vertical Axis A 172 Performing and Triggerin
348. tive the command turns these delta markers into normal markers The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Turns on marker 3 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt AOFF This command turns off all active markers delta markers and active marker measure ment functions This command is an event and therefore has no query and no RST value The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant for this command Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions a marker on the current trace maximum If necessary the corresponding marker is activated first This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CAL Culate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Remote Control Commandes Example CALC MARK2 MAX Moves marker 2 to the maximum peak Usage Event CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions a marker on the next smaller trace maximum If necessary the corresponding marker is activated first This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CAL Culate selects the trace The numeric suffi
349. to be taken when setting up the instrument for the first time Risk of injury and instrument damage The instrument must be used in an appropriate manner to prevent electric shock fire personal injury or damage e Do not open the instrument casing e Read and observe the Basic Safety Instructions delivered as a printed brochure with the instrument or in electronic format on the documentation CD ROM In addition read and observe the safety instructions in the following sections Notice that the data sheet may specify additional operating conditions Risk of instrument damage Note that the general safety instructions also contain information on operating condi tions that will prevent damage to the instrument The instrument s data sheet may con tain additional operating conditions 3 1 1 1 Preparing for Use Risk of electrostatic discharge ESD Electrostatic discharge ESD can cause damage to the electronic components of the instrument and the device under test DUT ESD is most likely to occur when you con nect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the instrument s test ports To prevent ESD use a wrist strap and cord and connect yourself to the ground or use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination For details refer to the safety instructions delivered in electronic format on the docu mentation CD ROM Risk of instrument damage during operation An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cau
350. to preview screenshot 1 Press the SAVE RECALL key 2 Press the File Manager softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens the file manager dialog to select a screenshot for the preview 3 Select the screenshot for preview 4 Press Preview softkey Saving Events The R amp S Spectrum Rider provides functionality that automatically saves measurement information if a certain situation or event occurs Saving events is possible in all operating modes 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the User Preference softkey EE User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 86 Saving Events 3 Select the Save on Event menu item 4 Select On from the Save on Event drop down menu The R amp S Spectrum Rider turns on automatic event recognition You can select one of several events that trigger the storage of measurement data Data types You can select several data types to save when an event occurs e A screenshot of the sweep that contains the event png or jpg file e A dataset of the sweep that contains the event set file 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the User Preference softkey 3 Select the Capture Screen or Capture Dataset menu item and turn it on or off If on the corresponding information is included in the saved data Timing of the data capture Note that the R amp S Spectrum Rider evaluates the measured data after a sweep is done and thus detects and saves an event only after a sweep has been co
351. trum Rider s default state the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the span Le if you change the span the R amp S Spectrum Rider adjusts the resolution band width Therefore you do not have to set the resolution bandwidth manually in many cases because the R amp S Spectrum Rider automatically sets the resolution bandwidth if you change the span 1 Press the BW key By default the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the span Press the Manual RBW softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the resolution bandwidth Enter the resolution bandwidth you need The R amp S Spectrum Rider uses the resolution bandwidth you have entered for the measurement If the resolution bandwidth is no longer coupled to the span the R amp S Spectrum Rider puts a blue dot at the RBW displays on the Parameter View Press the Auto RBW softkey to again couple the resolution bandwidth to the span User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 109 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Q Automatic adjustment of the sweep time In its default mode the R amp S Spectrum Rider automatically adjusts the sweep time as soon as you change the resolution bandwidth This is to make sure that the settling time required for the selected resolution filter is properly taken into account The maxi mum allowed sweep time is 1000 s For narrow resolution filters this value would be exceeded for large spans In order to avoid this
352. trument On and Off 25 Checking the Supplied Options 27 JE den 9 APP 28 Overview COMMON EE 29 Connectors of the R amp S Spectrum Rider 30 RE PE I T E E ET 30 SIE ae e EE 31 Headphone AR ner ee seele ee 32 USR e ER DCP GE ER Mechanical Locking Device ss 33 Mini USB and LAN Port 33 SP AIG SO en A O UA MA 34 Touchscreen DIS e TE 34 HN 36 32092 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 4 3 2 4 3 29 SAS 32092 3 2 9 3 3 2 9 4 3 2 9 9 3 2 9 6 3 291 3 2 6 3 2 6 1 3 2 6 2 3 2 6 3 3 2 7 3 2 7 1 3 2 1 2 3 2 7 3 3 2 7 4 3 2 7 5 3 2 7 6 3 2 7 7 3 2 8 3 2 8 1 3 2 8 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 2 30 13 3 3 1 4 Measurement Result VICW cccccseccsssececsserscssseresssenecasersecuserensseresaserssausersanserssaserens 36 Measurement Trace Window ss 37 Parameter VIEW ee a ou oc 37 On screen KeYDOANd ns reisen a cat enoaue cernes ete au 41 Font TN 42 POWER apa ae ee ee 42 SCHEENIENOL KOY E 42 EIERE 42 AS PA 42 ls een o E 43 EEN 44 Navigation Controls E 45 Managing OO ONS see ee ie han 45 Enabling OP ONE see ea ae ee 46 Checking OD UOM An ee een en 46 Managing Options with R amp S License Manager 46 Configuring the R amp S Spectrum Rider 48 Configuring the Ee VE 49 Configuring Date and Time seen res 50 Selecting Regional Gettmge ss 51 Configuring TG DIS EE 52 Configuring the Audio OULDUTs 2 2 eme tes esse esse rene 53 Configuring Power SUD DIY E 54 Resetting the R amp S Spectrum Rider 55 Connecting the R amp
353. ttenuation adjusts the input range inside the analyzer It is coupled directly to the reference level If you have set a high reference level RF attenuation is turned on in 10 dB steps according to the table below so that the input mixer always remains in the lin ear range The R S Spectrum Rider provides three attenuation modes e Auto Low Distortion If this mode is active the R amp S Spectrum Rider sets the RF attenuation 10 dB higher according to the table below making the stress of the input mixer 10 dB less at the specified reference level If the spectrum is densely occupied with signals e g in a television cable network the input mixer reduces the R amp S Spectrum Rider inherent spurious products However the inherent noise display of the R amp S Spec trum Rider increases due to the increased attenuation in front of the input mixer e Auto Low Noise If this mode is active the R amp S Spectrum Rider sets the RF attenuation 10 dB lower This increases the sensitivity of the R amp S Spectrum Rider which means that the inherent noise display decreases due to the lower attenuation in front of the input mixer User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 106 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode e Manual Manual selection of the attenuation You can check the status of the RF attenuation and the preamplifier in the Configura tion Overview dialog and in the Parameter View area Reference Level Preamplifier OFF Preamplifi
354. ubsequently the traffic is continued If however the buffer is not yet full when receiving the delimiter the input unit can already receive the next command during command recognition and execution The receipt of DCL clears the input buffer and immediately resets the command recognition Command Recognition The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit It proceeds in the order in which it receives the data Only DCL is serviced with priority for exam R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands REESEN 9 3 3 9 3 4 9 3 5 ple GET Group Execute Trigger is only executed after the commands received before Each recognized command is immediately transferred to the internal instrument settings data base but not executed immediately The command recognition detects syntax errors in the commands and transfers them to the status reporting system The rest of a program message after a syntax error is analyzed further if possible and serviced After the syntax test the value range of the parameter is checked if required If the command recognition detects a delimiter it passes the command to an execution unit that performs the instrument settings In the meantime the command recognition is ready to process new commands overlapping execution A DCL command is pro cessed in the same way Data Base and Instrument Hardware Here the expression instrument hardware denotes the part of the instrument fulfillin
355. uence e PE IIA 171 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization 167 Common Ken EE 168 Configuring Data Capture uud 223 Configuring the Instrument nennen 227 AUdIO 2 LE DS ER are 227 Controlling the GPS Receiver coooocccccccconnnconcnnnnnnos 227 Display Configuration sauna 227 Mode Selection sn nennen 227 Setting up a Network Connection occccccccccnccccoo 227 ELE ES SUR EE 227 CONNEC OTS EE 30 Continue SWeep sssssssissssmrenesanennnenecoenmneencennetmenensenss 112 Ee 29 Conventions E 12 D Data management nenne 88 Dale amp AULE 50 Date EE 51 DO POT eg 32 Default values le 170 SC ln 113 Delta marker unse ee 121 D COR a i reiia 115 Display E EE 75 Reiter 105 pe a dt nie oui 52 E Event status enable register ESE RO ee 169 Event status register ESR RO ae 169 EE ee a ce 86 External reference ccooooccnncccoccncccoccnncccoconcncononnnnnononcnnonennos 31 Exte al MAGEN ana 31 Reference level oocccccoconccccccoccnncccoconcccononococononcnnnnos 113 F File management susanne 88 File Management zu naeh 216 A e 97 ds o AAA 127 o o 113 Se e A 64 OUND eege 125 lee En 131 EE eebe 102 PPP 138 e 101 EE NOD ee da te eue 102 Front panel REVS deet 42 eo ad CI e PO E 43 H Hardware settings EH 49 Es A 67 Headphones Jack E 32 HOZ MaS E 100 How a Spectrum Analyzer Works 271 Identification Lei 170 IMDEHANEE een 108 Input EE e WE 81 A II 81
356. uency Step Size ss 101 e Setting a Frequency Offset ss 102 e Defining a Start and Stop Frequency Rs 102 SEUNG NE EE 103 Defining the Center Frequency The center frequency represents the frequency at the center of the horizontal axis in the diagram area 1 Press the FREQ key 2 Press the Center Freq softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens an input field to define the center frequency 3 Enter the center frequency you need The frequency you have entered becomes the new center frequency Special touchscreen gesture Alternatively define the center frequency by swiping horizontally across the touch screen to change the center frequency See chapter 4 2 1 Change Center Frequency on page 77 While adjusting the center frequency you may obtain a value that is outside the R amp S Spectrum Rider maximum span If this happens the R amp S Spectrum Rider automati cally reduces the span Defining a Frequency Step Size If you set the center frequency with the rotary knob the distance of each step that you take depends on the span With the rotary knob the smallest possible step is a pixel As the trace consists of 711 pixels each step is equal to 1 711 of the span You can set another step size 1 Press the FREQ key 2 Press the CF Step Size softkey The R amp S Spectrum Rider opens a submenu that contains possible step sizes e 0 1 x Span The step size equals 10
357. uency range covered by a pixel The min peak detector displays sine signals with the correct level and suppresses noise Therefore it is useful to find sine signals in the vicinity of noise e Sample If the sample detector is active the R amp S Spectrum Rider shows one random power level that was measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel The sample detector is useful for measurements in the time domain span O Hz as it provides the only way to represent the timing of the video signal correctly In the frequency domain the sample detector is a good way to measure noise power because noise usually has a uniform spectrum with a normal amplitude dis tribution Signals may get lost if you are using the sample detector for measurements with a span that is greater than RBW 711 e RMS If the RMS detector is active the R amp S Spectrum Rider measures the spectral power over one pixel In case of power measurements the RMS detector always shows the true power of a signal regardless of the shape of the signal The RMS detector is best for measurements on digitally modulated signals because it provides stable and true power readings In combination with a high User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 116 R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode sweep time you can increase the display stability even more because the measure ment time for each pixel increases Noise measurements also provide stable results if you apply the RMS d
358. um PEAK on page 197 e CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt Xxon page 197 e CALCulate lt 1l1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt X SLIMits lt l 2 gt STATe on page 198 Remote Control Commands o CALCulate lt l MARRer lt l s b gt 1X 5LIMite lt L LEFT on page 198 e CabCulate lt lo 2 MARRer lt ls DA OLIMIES lt L RIGHE on page 199 e CALCulate lt 1 4 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt Y on page 199 CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If you set the suffix at DELTamarker to 1 or use no suffix the R amp S Spectrum Rider interprets this as delta marker 2 because the first marker has to be a normal marker If more than one normal marker 2 to 6 are already active the command turns these marker into delta markers If no delta marker is active yet the command activates the delta marker and positions it on the trace maximum The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at DELTamarker selects the deltamarker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT3 ON Turns delta marker 3 on or turn marker 3 into a delta marker CALCulate lt 1 2 gt DELTamarker lt 1 6 gt AOFF This command turns off all active delta markers This command is an event and therefore has no query and no RST value The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at DELTamarker is irr
359. un control de seguridad control a primera vista control del conductor de protecci n medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n de la corriente de fuga control de funcionamiento Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto Bater as y acumuladores o celdas Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones en cuanto a las bater as y acumuladores o celdas pueden producirse explosiones incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte El manejo de bater as y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos p ej celdas de litio debe seguir el est ndar EN 62133 1 2 No deben desmontarse abrirse ni triturarse las celdas Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a calor ni fuego Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz directa del sol Las celdas y bater as deben mantenerse limpias y secas Limpiar las conexiones sucias con un pa o seco y limpio Las celdas o bater as no deben cortocircuitarse Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o bater as en estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto rec proco o por contacto con otros materiales conductores No deben extraerse las celdas o bater as de sus embalajes originales hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a impactos mec nicos fuertes indebidos En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda el l quido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la piel ni los ojos
360. us can also be viewed on the Title Bar See chap ter 3 2 3 1 Title Bar on page 36 When the R amp S Spectrum Rider is not in operation the power s LED displays blue BR for a fully charged battery and it blinks in blue to indicate a battery charging process The battery charging and discharging process of the battery icon shown on the Mea surement Title is illustrated below sE si Ci Sci sql Fig 3 2 Battery charging process Qu Cu Cu C1 Fig 3 3 Battery discharging process While charging the green slot on the battery icon is added from the right to left to indi cate that the battery is charging while connected to the power supply When battery is fully charged there will be four green slots in the battery icon Every single slot is approximately 25 of the battery capacity See figure 3 2 During the discharging process the white slot in the battery icon is reduced until it turns to a single red slot This shows that the battery has reached low level See fig ure 3 3 Charging time is about 3 hours when the R amp S Spectrum Rider is in inactive mode i e R amp S Spectrum Rider is switched off If the instrument is in active mode i e R amp S Spectrum Rider is switched on the charging time is extended to about 4 hours because the charging current is reduced as the power is partially drained by the usage of the R amp S Spectrum Rider During operation in the field you can also charge the battery
361. uses A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced visual inspection protective conductor test insulation resistance measurement leakage current measurement functional test This helps ensure the continued safety of the product Batteries and rechargeable batteries cells If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries cells is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions fire and or serious personal injury and in some cases death Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard 1 2 Cells must not be taken apart or crushed Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided Keep cells and batteries clean and dry Clean soiled connectors using a dry clean cloth Cells or batteries must not be short circuited Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a drawer where they can short circuit each other or where they can be short circuited by other conductive materials Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they are ready to be used Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted If a cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the ski
362. ute surchauffe risque de provoquer une explosion ou un incendie ce qui peut entrainer des blessures graves 3 Conserver les batteries dans un lieu sec et propre Nettoyer les points de contact sales a l aide d un chiffon sec et propre 4 Charger les batteries avant utilisation Utiliser seulement le chargeur Rohde amp Schwarz approprie pour recharger les batteries Les references exactes du chargeur sont indiqu es dans le manuel ou la fiche technique de l appareil Une recharge incorrecte des batteries peut entrainer des explosions susceptibles de causer des blessures graves 5 Recharger imp rativement des temperatures comprises entre 0 C et 45 C restrictions eventuelles voir le manuel 6 Decharger imp rativement a des temperatures comprises entre 0 C et 50 C restrictions eventuelles voir le manuel 7 Terminer la charge des que les batteries sont compl tement recharg es Une surcharge repetee diminue la longevite des batteries 8 Retirer les batteries de l appareil lorsqu elles ne sont pas utilis es Apres un stockage prolonge plusieurs cycles de recharge et de decharge peuvent s av rer necessaires pour retablir la pleine capacite des batteries 9 Utiliser les batteries exclusivement dans les appareils Rohde amp Schwarz auxquels elles sont destin es Voir le manuel fourni avec chaque appareil 10 Ne pas liminer les batteries avec les d chets municipaux non tri s mais s assurer qu elles soient co
363. utes TEMPerature This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs LIMit device specific This bit is set if a limit value is violated CALibration The bit is set if a measurement is performed unaligned label UNCAL This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register This register contains information about the reference frequency It can be read using the commands STATus QUEStionable LIMit FREQuency and STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt Table 9 9 Meaning of bits in STATus QUEStionable FREQuency register EXTernal REFerence This bit is set if an external reference is used This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register This register contains information about the observance of limit lines It can be read using the commands STATus QUEStionable LIMit CONDition and STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVENt R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Remote Commands Table 9 10 Meaning of bits in STATus QUEStionable LIMit register LIMit 1 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated LIMit 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated 21014 to 14 Ween used ee This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable POWer Register This register contains information about possible overload states It can be read using the commands STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition and STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt Table 9 11 Meaning of bits in STATus QUEStionable POWer register
364. vated for the previous marker To get a valid result you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end to make sure that the R amp S Spectrum Rider actually reaches the fre quency you want to measure This is only possible in single sweep mode The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INIT CONT OFF CALC MARK ON Turns on single sweep mode and marker 1 CALC MARK COUN ON Turns on the frequency counter for marker 1 INIT WAIL CALC MARK COUN FREQ Performs a measurement and queries the results of the fre quency counter CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FREQuency MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the marker frequency display mode The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Remote Control Commands Parameters lt Mode gt FREQuency CHANnel FREQuency Sets the marker frequency mode to frequency input in Hz CHANnel Sets the marker frequency mode to channel input as a channel number RST FREQ Example CALC MARK FREQ MODE FREQ Selects the frequency display mode CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt FUNCtion CENTer This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker If you use a delta marker the R amp S Spectrum Rider turns it into a normal marker This command
365. ve occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be quer ied via Ethernet The information is of a hierarchical structure The register status byte STB defined in IEEE 488 2 and its associated mask register service request enable SRE form the uppermost level The STB receives its information from the standard event status reg ister ESR which is also defined in IEEE 488 2 with the associated mask register standard event status enable ESE and registers STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument 9 6 9 1 Remote Control Commands The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB Structure of an SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts which each have a width of 16 bits and have different functions The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number that applies to all five parts For example bit 0 of the STATus OPERation register is assigned to the calibration status of the R amp S Spectrum Rider Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero for all parts Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integer DCE eon IQ
366. verview 24 Parameter View 25 Unavailable softkey function 26 Available softkey function 27 Currently selected softkey function 4 1 1 Configuration Overview Screen Layout The Configuration Overview BY is an operation mode dependable function When selected it opens the Config Overview window which consists of six configuration blocks to configure the relevant parameters at each stages of the measurement The button is located at the bottom right corner of the display The following illustrates the screen layout of the Config Overview window Spectrum y H A Trace Ref Level 30 dBm Center Freq 2 GHz Clear Write RF Impedance 500 Ref Offset OdB Span 4 GHz Power Sensor Att Mode Manual Start Freq 0 Hz Att 0dB Stop Freq 4 GHz Auto Peak x A D Trace Mode Clear Write Source External Rise RBW 3 MHz Auto VBW 3 MHz Auto Trace Memory Delay SWT 50 ms Auto Memory Trace Detector Mode Manual amp y User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 76 4 2 4 2 1 Touchscreen Gesture Element 1 Current selected block 2 Scroll bar 3 Associated block see table 3 3 4 Drop down list When the block in the Config Overview window is selected it displays a blue frame around the selected block You can also used the rotary knob to select the block for configuration The parameters displayed in the block are current parameters applied to the spectrum measurement To configure the parameters select the de
367. von Elektro und Elektronikger ten Elektroaltger te d rfen nicht ber unsortierten Siedlungsabfall entsorgt werden sondern m ssen getrennt gesammelt werden Weitere Informationen siehe Seite 7 Seite 2 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Signalworte und ihre Bedeutung Die folgenden Signalworte werden in der Produktdokumentation verwendet um vor Risiken und Gefahren zu warnen kennzeichnet eine unmittelbare Gef hrdung mit hohem Risiko die Tod oder schwere K rperverletzung zur Folge haben wird wenn sie nicht vermieden wird A GEFAHR ACHTUNG kennzeichnet eine m gliche Gef hrdung mit mittlerem Risiko die Tod oder schwere K rperverletzung zur Folge haben kann wenn sie nicht vermieden wird kennzeichnet eine Gef hrdung mit geringem Risiko die leichte oder mittlere K rperverletzungen zur Folge haben k nnte wenn sie nicht vermieden wird weist auf die M glichkeit einer Fehlbedienung hin bei der das Produkt Schaden nehmen kann Diese Signalworte entsprechen der im europ ischen Wirtschaftsraum blichen Definition f r zivile Anwendungen Neben dieser Definition k nnen in anderen Wirtschaftsraumen oder bei milit rischen Anwendungen abweichende Definitionen existieren Es ist daher darauf zu achten dass die hier beschriebenen Signalworte stets nur in Verbindung mit der zugeh rigen Produktdokumentation und nur in Verbindung mit dem zugeh rigen Produkt verwendet werden Die Verwendung von Signalworten
368. voquer des tincelles incendies et ou blessures Ne pas surcharger les prises les c bles prolongateurs ou les multiprises cela pouvant provoquer des incendies ou chocs lectriques En cas de mesures sur les circuits lectriques d une tension efficace gt 30 V prendre les pr cautions n cessaires pour viter tout risque par exemple quipement de mesure appropri fusibles limitation de courant coupe circuit isolation etc En cas d interconnexion avec des quipements informatiques comme par exemple un PC ou un ordinateur industriel veiller ce que ces derniers soient conformes aux normes IEC 60950 1 EN 60950 1 ou IEC 61010 1 EN 61010 1 en vigueur Sauf autorisation expresse il est interdit de retirer le couvercle ou toute autre pi ce du bo tier lorsque le produit est en cours de service Les c bles et composants lectriques seraient ainsi accessibles ce qui peut entra ner des blessures des incendies ou des d g ts sur le produit 1171 0000 43 08 Page 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Consignes de securite fondamentales Si un produit est connect de facon stationnaire tablir avant toute autre connexion le raccordement du conducteur de protection local et du conducteur de protection du produit L installation et le raccordement ne peuvent tre effectues que par un electricien ou lectronicien qualifi Sur les appareils stationnaires sans fusible ni disjoncteur automatique ou dispos
369. with low levels or modulated signals e Along measurement time is appropriate for signals with very low power levels lt 50 dBm To eliminate noise and the effects of noise on the measurement effectively use the R amp S FSH Z1 power sensor User Manual 1321 1011 02 01 01 139 Using a Power Sensor 1 Press the MT softkey 2 Select the measurement time most suitable for your test setup Taking additional loss or gain into account At high powers that cause the power sensor maximum input level to be exceeded or at very low levels that are below the R amp S Spectrum Rider minimum sensitivity the R amp S Spectrum Rider can take additional loss or gain between the DUT and the power sen sor into account These are defined in terms of an offset in dB relative to the measured level A positive offset corresponds to a loss and a negative offset to a gain The R amp S Spectrum Rider shows the current offset in the diagram header 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Press the Ref Offset softkey The entry box for the reference offset opens 3 Enter the required offset The offset is taken into account in the power or level display 7 Using the Internal Power Meter R amp S FPH K19 The R amp S Spectrum Rider also supports power measurements without using a power sensor In that case you can connect the DUT directly to the R amp S Spectrum Rider and still perform accurate channel power measurements The screen layout is t
370. x at MARKer selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT Moves marker 2 to the next smaller maximum peak Usage Event CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt MINimum PEAK This command positions a marker on the current trace minimum If necessary the corresponding marker is activated first This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Moves marker 2 to the trace minimum Usage Event CALCulate lt 1 2 gt MARKer lt 1 6 gt X lt FrequencyOrTime gt This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the horizontal axis If one or more delta markers 2 to 6 are already active the command turns these delta markers into normal markers Note that it is possible to place the marker outside the visible trace In that case this value is invalid If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first The numeric suffix at CALCulate selects the trace The numeric suffix at MARKer selects the marker Remote Control Commands Parameters lt FrequencyOrTime gt Indicates the coordinate on the horizontal axis The unit in spectrum analyzer mode depends on the measure ment e g Hz for measurements in the frequency domain and seconds for measurements in the time domain Range Maximum span Default unit GHz Example CALC MARK2 X 10
371. x to turn on or off the Preamp menu item The R amp S Spectrum Rider turns the preamplifier on and off Setting the Input Impedance In the default state the input impedance is 50 2 The R amp S Spectrum Rider can also handle 75 2 systems The R amp S Spectrum Rider does not select a 75 RF input Instead it selects a 75 Q matching pad connected at the RF input The 50 75 matching pad R amp S RAZ is recommended for 75 Q matching see recommended accessories The R amp S Spectrum Rider automatically considers the conversion factor when a value of 75 Q is set 1 Press the AMPT key 2 Press the Att Amp Imp softkey 3 Select the impedance you need You can also use other matching pads e g R amp S RAM or R amp S FSH Z38 by acti vating transducer factors Using Transducer Factors For more information see chapter 5 3 Using Transducer Factors on page 132 Setting Bandwidths The bandwidth menu contains all settings to set up filter bandwidths available in the R amp S Spectrum Rider You can access it with the BW key e Setting the Resolution Bandwidth 108 e Setting the Video Bandwucdth ss 110 Setting the Resolution Bandwidth The resolution bandwidth in a spectrum analyzer determines the frequency resolution for frequency domain measurements and therefore determines how well it can sepa R amp S Spectrum Rider FPH Spectrum Analyzer Mode rate adjacent frequencies The measur
372. y analogy the ESE can be taken as the ENABle part of the ESR Overview of the Status Register The following figure shows the status registers used by the R amp S Spectrum Rider Remote Control Commands reserved reserved y served IF_Overload 1 reserved reserved en 4 reserved er reserved 4 TEMPerature reserved 5 FREQuency reserved 6 reserved reserved 4 Y reserved reserved a reserved reserved 9 LIMA a 1 reserved 10 CALibration UN Cal reserved 11 SYNC reserved a 12 reserved reserved 716 5 4 3 2 1 0 PPE 13 reserved Eee ELL 14 reserved 8 rer QUE Stionable P OWer IST Message WEIER 15 not used QUE Stonable Status Dal reserved reserved HE y ASA 0 Operation Complete reserve GR Error Queue reserved geg III Sep 2 Query Error reserved MEN H MESE men 3 Device Dependent Emor reserved III i Es Glen ommand Error reserves 5 reserved reserved T Power On reserved E vent Status Register reserved SRQ Message 2EAEAEAEAEAEAE Event Status Enable na 765125721110 ri 1 SRE a C Alibrating QUE Stonable FREQuency reserved reserved LiMiti FAIL reserved LIM it FAIL reserved reserved reserved 3 reserved reserved reserved reserved 5 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved 1 reserved reserved reserved not used reserved Operation Statu reserved Bt ge 1
373. yout and at the bottom right corner it displays the Configuration Overview button See figure 3 6 You can select any parameter in the Parameter view to adjust the configurations of the spectrum measurement See details of each of the parameter in the R amp S Spectrum Rider user manual Center Start Stop This display setting is function specific depending on the softkey Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq selected in the softkey label See chap 300 MHz ter 3 2 5 3 Softkey on page 42 It displays an entry box to configure the center fre quency start or stop frequency for the spectrum measurement Select Trace to display the trace menu with a list of settings Clear Write Average Min Hold Max Hold Detect Select Detect to display the trace detector menu with a list of settings Auto Peak Max Peak Min Jetect Max Peak Peak Sample RMS Select Trig to display the gate trigger menu with a list of settings Free Run Ext Rise Ext Fall Select Span to display an entry box to configure the span of the spectrum measurement REF Select REF to display an entry box to configure the reference level for the spectrum measurement 30 dBm Select ATT to display an entry box to configure the attenuation setting for the spectrum measurement AMP Select AMP to toggle between the ON and OFF status for the optional preamplifier R amp S FPH B22 of the spectru

R&S®Spectrum Rider FPH User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;Spectrum Rider FPH User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®Spectrum Rider FPH User Manual